Volvo V40 2018 Owner's Manual

OWNER'S MANUAL
VÄLKOMMEN!
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The
car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your passengers. Volvo is one of the world's safest passenger vehicles. Your
Volvo is also designed to meet applicable safety and environmental
requirements.
In order to increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that
you read the instructions and maintenance information in this owner's
manual. The owner's manual is also available as a mobile app (Volvo
Manual) and on the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com).
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
2
SAFETY
This is how you find owner's information
12
General information on seatbelts
28
Child seats - location
52
Digital owner's manual in the car
13
Seatbelt - putting on
29
Child seat - ISOFIX
53
Volvo Cars support site
15
Seatbelt - loosening
30
ISOFIX - size classes
53
Reading the owner's manual
16
Seatbelt - pregnancy
30
ISOFIX - types of child seat
55
Recording data
19
Seatbelt reminder
31
Child seats - upper mounting points
57
Accessories and extra equipment
20
Seatbelt tensioner
31
Volvo ID
20
Safety - warning symbol
32
Environmental philosophy
22
Airbag system
33
The owner's manual and the environment
25
Airbags on driver's side
34
Laminated glass
25
Passenger airbag
35
Passenger airbag - activating/deactivating*
36
Side airbag (SIPS)
38
Inflatable Curtain (IC)
39
General information on WHIPS
(whiplash protection)
40
WHIPS - seating position
41
General information on safety mode
42
Safety mode - attempting to start the car
43
Safety mode - moving the car
43
Pedestrian airbag
44
Pedestrian airbag - moving the car
45
Pedestrian airbag - folding up
45
General information on child safety
46
Child seats
47
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Instruments and controls, left-hand
drive car - overview
60
Steering wheel
87
Light switches
88
Menu navigation - combined instrument panel
110
Instruments and controls, right-hand
drive car - overview
63
Position lamps
90
Menu overview - analogue combined
instrument panel
111
Combined instrument panel
66
Daytime running lights
90
Analogue combined instrument
panel - overview
66
Tunnel detection*
Menu overview - digital combined
instrument panel
111
91
Main/dipped beam
Digital combined instrument panel overview
67
91
Messages
112
92
Messages - handling
113
94
MY CAR
Eco guide & Power guide*
70
113
Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern
95
Trip computer
Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols
71
114
Rear fog lamp
98
116
Brake lights
98
Trip computer - analogue combined
instrument panel
Hazard warning flashers
99
Trip computer - digital combined
instrument panel
120
99
Trip computer - trip statistics*
123
Active main beam*
Active bending lights*
Combined instrument cluster meaning of warning symbols
73
Outside temperature gauge
75
Trip meter
direction indicators
75
Clock
Interior lighting
75
100
Combined instrument panel - license
agreement
Home safe lighting
76
102
Approach light duration
102
Wipers and washers
102
Power windows
104
Door mirrors
106
Windows and door mirrors - heating
107
Symbols in the display
Volvo Sensus
Key positions
77
79
80
Key positions - functions at different
levels
81
Seats, front
Rearview mirror - interior
108
82
Glass roof*
109
Seats, front - electrically operated
84
Compass*
109
Seats, rear
85
3
CLIMATE CONTROL
4
LOADING AND STORAGE
General information on climate control
126
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater* - direct start
141
Actual temperature
127
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater* - immediate stop
142
Air quality - passenger compartment filter 128
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater* - timer
142
Air quality - Clean Zone Interior
Package (CZIP)*
128
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater* - messages
143
Air quality - IAQS*
128
Additional heater*
144
Air quality - material
129
Fuel-driven additional heater*
144
Menu settings - climate control
129
Electric additional heater*
145
Air distribution in the passenger
compartment
129
Sensors - climate control
127
Air quality
127
Electronic climate control - ECC*
131
Electronic temperature control - ETC
132
Heated front seats*
133
Heated rear seat*
133
Fan
134
Auto-regulation
134
Temperature control in the passenger compartment
135
Air conditioning
135
Demisting and defrosting the windscreen
136
Air distribution - recirculation
137
Air distribution - table
138
Engine block and passenger compartment heater*
140
Storage spaces
148
Storage compartment driver’s side
150
Tunnel console
150
Tunnel console - armrest
150
Glovebox
151
Inlaid mats*
151
Vanity mirror
151
Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets
152
Loading
152
Loading - long load
153
Roof load
154
Load retaining eyelets
154
Loading - bag holder
154
Loading - folding bag holder*
155
12 V socket - cargo area
155
Cargo net*
156
Hat shelf
157
LOCKS AND ALARM
DRIVER SUPPORT
Remote control key
160
Remote control key - losing
160
Remote control key - personalisation*
161
Locking/unlocking - indicator
162
Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the
key blade
172
Adjustable steering force*
186
Keyless Drive* - lock settings
173
Electronic stability control (ESC) general
186
Keyless Drive* - antenna location
173
188
Locking/unlocking - from the outside
174
Electronic stability control (ESC) operation
Manual locking of the door
174
Electronic stability control (ESC) symbols and messages
189
Locking/unlocking - from the inside
175
Speed limiter*
191
Global opening
176
Speed limiter* - getting started
191
Locking/unlocking - glovebox
176
Speed limiter* - changing speed
Locking/unlocking - tailgate
192
176
Locking/unlocking - fuel filler flap
193
178
Speed limiter - temporary deactivation and standby mode*
178
Speed limiter* - alarm for speed
exceeded
194
Speed limiter* - deactivation
194
Remote control key - electronic
immobiliser
163
Remote-controlled immobiliser with
tracking system*
163
Remote control key - functions
164
Remote control key - range
165
Remote control key with PCC* unique functions
165
Remote control key with PCC* - range
166
Deadlocks*
Detachable key blade
167
Child safety locks - manual activation
180
167
Child safety locks - electrical activation*
180
Alarm*
181
Detachable key blade - detaching/
attaching
Cruise control*
194
Cruise control* - managing speed
195
Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode
197
Detachable key blade - unlocking doors
168
Alarm indicator*
182
Remote control key/PCC - replacing
the battery
168
Alarm* - automatic re-arming
182
Keyless drive*
169
Alarm* - automatic arming
183
Cruise control* - resume set speed
198
Alarm* - remote control key not working
183
Cruise control* - deactivate
199
Keyless Drive* - range
170
Keyless Drive* - secure handling of
the remote control key
170
Keyless Drive* - interference to
remote control key function
171
Keyless Drive* - locking
171
Keyless Drive* - unlocking
172
Alarm signals*
183
Distance Warning*
199
Reduced alarm level*
184
Distance Warning* - limitations
201
Type approval - remote control key
system
184
Distance Warning* - symbols and
messages
202
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)*
203
5
6
Adaptive cruise control* - function
204
City Safety™ - symbols and messages
227
Lane Keeping Aid - function
250
Adaptive cruise control* - overview
205
Collision warning system*
228
Lane Keeping Aid - operation
252
252
254
Adaptive cruise control* - managing
speed
206
Collision warning system* - function
229
Lane Keeping Aid - limitations
Adaptive cruise control* - set time
interval
207
Collision warning system* - detection
of cyclists
230
Lane Keeping Aid - symbols and
messages
231
255
208
Collision warning system* - detection
of pedestrians
Park Assist*
Adaptive cruise control* - temporary
deactivation, and standby mode
Park assist syst* - function
255
Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking
another vehicle
209
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate
209
Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue
assistance
210
Adaptive cruise control* - switch
cruise control functionality
212
Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing and action
213
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols
and messages
214
Radar sensor
216
Radar sensor - limitations
216
Type approval - radar system
218
City Safety™
221
City Safety™ - function
222
City Safety™ - operation
222
City Safety™ - limitations
City Safety™ - laser sensor
Collision warning system* - operation
232
Park assist syst* - backward
Collision warning system* - limitations
256
234
Park assist syst* - forward
Collision warning system* - camera
sensor limitations
257
235
Park assist syst* - fault indication
258
Collision warning system* - symbols
and messages
236
BLIS
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
258
Park assist camera
259
238
Park assist camera - settings
262
BLIS - operation
239
Park assist camera - limitations
263
CTA*
240
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)*
263
BLIS and CTA - symbols and messages
242
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function
264
Road Sign Information* (RSI)
243
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation
265
Road Sign Information (RSI)* - operation
244
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations
267
Road Sign Information* (RSI) - limitations
246
268
Driver Alert System*
246
Active Park Assist (PAP)* - symbols
and messages
Driver Alert Control (DAC)*
247
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation
248
223
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols
and messages
249
225
Lane assistance*
250
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting the engine
270
Parking brake
291
Switching off the engine
271
Driving in water
292
Steering lock
271
Overheating
293
Jump starting
271
Driving with open tailgate
293
Gearboxes
273
Overload - starter battery
294
Manual gearbox
273
Before a long journey
294
Gear shift indicator*
274
Winter driving
294
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic*
274
Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing
295
Gear selector inhibitor
277
Fuel filler flap - manual opening
295
Hill start assist (HSA)*
278
Filling up with fuel
296
279
Fuel - handling
296
Start/Stop* - function and operation
279
Fuel - petrol
297
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
281
Fuel - diesel
298
282
Catalytic converters
299
Start/Stop* - the engine does not
auto-start
283
Filling with fuel - with a fuel can
300
Diesel particle filter (DPF)
300
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual
gearbox
284
Economical driving
301
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages
285
Driving with a trailer
302
Drive mode ECO*
287
Driving with a trailer - manual gearbox
303
Foot brake
289
Driving with a trailer - automatic gearbox
304
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system
290
Foot brake - emergency brake lights
and automatic hazard warning flashers
290
Start/Stop*
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts
Towing bracket
304
Detachable towbar* - storage
305
Detachable towbar* - specifications
305
Detachable towbar* - attachment/
removal
306
Trailer Stability Assist - TSA
309
Towing
310
Towing eye
311
Recovery
311
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance 291
7
WHEELS AND TYRES
8
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Tyres - maintenance
314
Tyres - direction of rotation
315
Inflating tyres with compressor from
the emergency puncture repair kit*
333
Volvo service programme
336
Book service and repair*
336
339
Tyres - tread wear indicators
316
Raising the car
Tyres - air pressure
316
Bonnet - opening and closing
341
Wheel and wheel rim dimensions
317
Engine compartment - overview
341
Tyres - dimensions
317
Engine compartment - checking
342
Tyres - load index
318
Engine oil - general
342
Tyres - speed ratings
318
Engine oil - checking and filling
343
Wheel nuts
319
Coolant - level
345
Winter tyres
320
Brake and clutch fluid - level
346
Spare wheel*
320
347
Changing wheels - taking out the
spare wheel*
321
Climate control system - fault tracing
and repair
Lamp replacement - general
347
Changing wheels - removing wheels
322
348
Changing wheels - fitting
324
Lamp replacement - location of front
lamps
Warning triangle
325
Lamp replacement - headlamps
349
Jack*
326
Lamp replacement - cover for main/
dipped beam bulbs
350
First aid kit*
326
Lamp replacement - dipped beam
350
Tyre monitoring (TM)*
326
Lamp replacement - main beam
351
Emergency puncture repair*
328
351
Emergency puncture repair kit* overview
329
Lamp replacement - direction indicators front
Lamp replacement - position lamps, front
351
Emergency puncture repair* - operation
330
352
Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking
332
Lamp replacement - daytime running
lights
SPECIFICATIONS
Lamp replacement - location of rear
lamps
352
Lamp replacement - direction indicators rear, brake lights and reversing lamp
353
Lamp replacement - rear fog lamp
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting
Lamps - specifications
Wiper blades
Washer fluid - filling
Starter battery - general
Battery - symbols
Starter battery - replacement
Battery - Start/Stop
Electrical system
Fuses - general
Fuses - in engine compartment
353
354
354
355
357
358
360
360
361
363
363
364
Fuses - under glovebox
367
Fuses - under the right-hand front seat
370
Car wash
372
Polishing and waxing
374
Water and dirt-repellent coating
375
Rustproofing
375
Cleaning the interior
376
Paint damage
377
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Type designations
380
Dimensions
383
Weights
385
Towing capacity and towball load
386
Engine specifications
388
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions
389
Engine oil - grade and volume
390
Coolant - grade and volume
392
Transmission fluid - grade and volume
393
Brake fluid - grade and volume
394
Fuel tank - volume
395
Air conditioning, fluid - volume and grade
396
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
398
Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions
402
Load index and speed rating
404
Tyres - approved tyre pressures
405
Alphabetical Index
407
9
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This is how you find owner's
information
Owner's information is available in several different product formats, both digital and printed.
The owner's manual is available in the car's
screen, as a mobile app and on the Volvo Cars
support site. There is a Quick Guide and a supplement to the owner's manual available in the
glovebox, with specifications and fuse information, amongst other things. A printed owner's
manual can be ordered.
The car's screen1
A digital version of the owner's
manual is available in the car's
screen. Press the MY CAR button in the centre console, press
OK/MENU and select
Owner's manual. The information is searchable and can
also be subdivided into categories.
Read more in the Digital owner's manual in the
car.
Volvo Cars support site
Go to support.volvocars.com
and select your country. Here
you can find owner's manuals,
both online and in PDF format.
On the Volvo Cars support site
there are also video tutorials
and further information and
help regarding your Volvo and your car ownership. The page is available for most markets.
Read more on the Volvo Cars support site.
Printed information
Mobile app
In App Store or Google Play,
search for "Volvo Manual",
download the app to your
smartphone or tablet and select
the car.
The app contains video tutorials
as well as options for visual navigation with exterior and interior images of the car. It is easy to
navigate between the different sections in the
owner's manual and the content is searchable.
Read more about Owner's Manual in mobile devices.
There is a supplement to the
owner's manual2 in the glovebox that contains information
on fuses and specifications, as
well as a summary of important
and practical information.
There is also a Quick Guide available in printed
format that helps you to get started with the most
commonly used functions in the car.
Depending on equipment level selected, market,
etc. additional owner's information may also be
available in printed format in the car.
A printed owner's manual and associated supplement can be ordered. Contact a Volvo dealer to
order. See how the owner's manual is structured
in Reading the owner's manual.
1A
2A
12
complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the screen.
complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the screen.
INTRODUCTION
Changing the language in the car's
screen
Changing the language in the car's display may
mean that some information does not correspond
to national or local laws and regulations. Don't
change to a language that's difficult to understand, it may then be difficult to find your way
back in the structure on the screen.
IMPORTANT
Digital owner's manual in the car
• Favourites - Quick access to favourite-
The owner's manual can be read on the screen
in the car3. The content is searchable and it is
easy to navigate between different sections.
• Quick Guide - A selection of articles for
Open the digital owner's manual - press the MY
CAR button in the centre console, press OK/
MENU and select Owner's manual.
Select the information symbol in the lower righthand corner in order to obtain information about
the digital owner's manual.
For basic navigation, see Operating the system.
See below for a more detailed description.
The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven safely in traffic and that applicable laws and regulations are followed. It is
also important that the car is maintained and
handled in accordance with Volvo's recommendations in the owner's information.
bookmarked articles.
common functions.
NOTE
The digital owner's manual is not available
while driving.
Search
If there should be a difference between the
information in the screen and the printed
information then it is always the printed information that applies.
Related information
•
•
•
Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 13)
Volvo Cars support site (p. 15)
Reading the owner's manual (p. 16)
Owner's manual, start page.
There are four options for finding information in
the digital owner's manual:
• Search - Search function for finding an article.
• Categories - All articles sorted into categories.
3
Applies to certain car models.
Searching using the character wheel.
Character list.
Changing the input mode (see following
table).
}}
13
INTRODUCTION
||
Use the character wheel to enter a search term,
e.g. "seatbelt".
a|A
1.
||}
Turn TUNE to the desired letter, press OK/
MENU to confirm. The number and letter
buttons on the control panel in the centre
console can also be used.
2.
Continue with the next letter and so on.
3.
To change the input mode to numbers or
special characters, or to perform a search,
turn TUNE to one of the options (see explanation in the following table) in the list for
changing the input mode (2), press OK/
MENU.
123/AB
C
Change between letters and numbers with OK/MENU.
MORE
Change to special characters with
OK/MENU.
OK
Perform the search. Turn TUNE to
select a search result article, press
OK/MENU to go to the article.
Changes between lowercase and
uppercase letters with OK/MENU.
Changes from the character wheel
to the search field. Move the cursor with TUNE. Delete any misspelling with EXIT. To return to the
character wheel, press OK/MENU.
•
Stop with the cursor on the desired character
in order to select it - the character is shown
on the enter line.
Note that the digit and letter buttons on the control panel can be
used for editing in the search field.
•
Delete/undo using EXIT.
To enter a number, hold in the corresponding
number key.
Enter with the numerical keyboard
Favourites
Another way of entering characters is to use the
centre console's buttons 0-9, * and #.
14
Categories
The articles in the owner's manual are structured
into main categories and subcategories. The
same article can be in several appropriate categories in order to be found more easily.
Turn TUNE to navigate in the category tree and
press OK/MENU to open a category - selected
- or article - selected
. Press EXIT to go
back to the previous view.
Numerical keyboard.
4
When e.g. 9 is pressed, a bar appears with all
characters4 under the button, e.g. W, x, y, z and
9. Quick presses on the button move the cursor
through these characters.
The character for each button may vary depending on market/country/language.
Located here are the articles that are saved as
favourites. To select an article as a favourite, see
the heading "Navigating in an article" below.
Turn TUNE to navigate in the favourite list and
press OK/MENU to open an article. Press EXIT
to go back to the previous view.
INTRODUCTION
Quick Guide
Located here is a selection of articles for getting
to know the car's most common functions. The
articles can also be accessed via categories, but
are collected here for quick access.
Turn TUNE to navigate in the Quick Guide and
press OK/MENU to open an article. Press EXIT
to go back to the previous view.
Navigating in an article
ated symbol is shown here as well as the
number of such texts in the article.
Turn TUNE to navigate between the links or
scroll in an article. When the screen has scrolled
to the start/end of an article the home and
favourite options are accessed by scrolling a further step up/down. Press OK/MENU to activate
the selection/highlighted link. Press EXIT to go
back to the previous view.
Volvo Cars support site
More information on your car is available on the
Volvo Cars website and support site.
Support on the Internet
Go to support.volvocars.com or use the QR code
below to visit the page. The support page is available for most markets.
Related information
•
Volvo Cars support site (p. 15)
QR code that leads to the support page.
Home - leads to the start page for the
owner's manual.
Favourite - adds/removes an article as a
favourite. You can also press the FAV button
in the centre console to add/remove an article as a favourite.
Highlighted link - leads to linked article.
Special texts - if the article contains warnings, important or note texts then an associ-
The information on the support page is searchable and can also be subdivided into different categories. Available here is support for options related to e.g. Internet connected services and functions, Volvo On Call*, the navigation system* and
apps. Video and step-by-step instructions explain
different procedures, e.g. how the car is connected to the Internet via a mobile phone.
Downloadable information from the
support page
Maps
For cars equipped with Sensus Navigation*, there
is the facility to download maps from the support
page.
}}
* Option/accessory.
15
INTRODUCTION
||
Apps
For selected Volvo models from model year 2014
and 2015, the owner's manual is available in the
form of an app. The Volvo On Call* app can also
be accessed from here.
Owner's manuals from previous model years
Owner's manuals from previous model years are
available here in PDF format. The Quick Guide
and supplement can also be accessed from the
support page. Select car model and model year in
order to download the publication required.
Contact
On the support page there is contact information
for customer support and the nearest Volvo
dealer.
Log in to the Volvo Cars website
Create a personal Volvo ID and log in to
www.volvocars.com. Once you are logged in you
can get an overview of service, agreements and
warranties, amongst other things. There is also
information here about accessories and software
adapted for your car model.
Related information
•
Volvo ID (p. 20)
Reading the owner's manual
Owner's Manual in mobile devices
A good way of getting to know your new car is
to read the owner's manual, ideally before your
first journey.
Reading the owner's manual is a good way to
become familiar with new functions, get advice
on how best to handle the car in different situations and learn how to make the best use of all
the car's features. Please pay attention to the
safety instructions contained in the owner's manual.
Development work is constantly in progress to
improve our product. Modifications may mean
that information, descriptions and illustrations in
the owner's manual differ from the equipment in
the car. We reserve the right to make modifications without prior notice.
© Volvo Car Corporation
NOTE
The Owner's manual is available for download
as a mobile application (applies for certain car
models and mobile devices), see
www.volvocars.com.
The mobile application also includes video
and searchable content and easy navigation
between different sections.
Options/accessories
All types of option/accessory are marked with an
asterisk*.
In addition to standard equipment, the owner's
manual also describes options (factory fitted
equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted
extra equipment).
16
* Option/accessory.
INTRODUCTION
The equipment described in the owner's manual
is not available in all cars - they have different
equipment depending on adaptations for the
needs of different markets and national or local
laws and regulations.
In the event of uncertainty over what is standard
or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo dealer.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts appear if there is a risk of
injury.
Message texts
In the car there are displays that show menu
texts and message texts. In the owner's manual
the appearance of these texts differs from the
normal text. Examples of menu texts and message texts: Media, Sending location.
is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or
fatality.
Risk of property damage
Decals
The car contains different types of decal which
are designed to convey important information in a
simple and clear manner. The decals in the car
have the following descending degree of importance for the warning/information.
Warning for personal injury
G031592
IMPORTANT
"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of
damage.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if
the warning is ignored, may result in damage to
property.
NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate
the use of features and functions for example.
Footnote
There is footnote information in the owner's manual that is located at the bottom of the page. This
information is an addition to the text that it refers
to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a
table then letters are used instead of numbers
for referral.
G031590
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white
text/image on black message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning
}}
17
INTRODUCTION
||
Information
Procedure lists
Procedures where action must be taken in a certain sequence are numbered in the owner's manual.
When there is a series of illustrations for
step-by-step instructions each step is numbered in the same way as the corresponding
illustration.
G031593
Lists of letters appear adjacent to the series
of illustrations where the order of the instructions is not significant.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in
the owner's manual should be exact replicas
of those in the car. They are included to show
their approximate appearance and locations
in the car. The information that applies to your
particular car can be found on the decal on
the car.
Arrows appear numbered and unnumbered
and are used to illustrate a movement.
Arrows with letters are used to clarify a
movement when the reciprocal order is of no
relevance.
If there is no series of illustrations for step-bystep instructions then the different steps are
numbered with normal numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used in
overview images where different components
are pointed out. The number recurs in the
position list featured in connection with the
illustration that describes the item.
Bulleted lists
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
Example:
18
•
•
Coolant
Engine oil
Related information
Related information refers to other articles containing closely-associated information.
Images
The manual's images are sometimes schematic
and may deviate from the car's appearance
depending on equipment level and market.
To be continued
}} This symbol is located furthest down to the
right when an article continues on the following
page.
Continued from previous page
|| This symbol is located furthest up to the left
when an article continues from the previous
page.
Related information
•
The owner's manual and the environment
(p. 25)
•
Volvo Cars support site (p. 15)
INTRODUCTION
Recording data
As part of Volvo's safety and quality assurance,
certain information about the vehicle's operation,
functionality and incidents are recorded in the
car.
This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data
Recorder" (EDR). Its primary purpose is to register and record data related to traffic accidents or
collision-like situations, such as times when the
airbag deploys or the vehicle strikes an obstacle
in the road. The data is recorded in order to
increase understanding of how vehicle systems
work in these types of situations. The EDR is
designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short time,
usually 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
data related to the following in the event of traffic
accidents or collision-like situations:
•
•
How the various systems in the car worked
Whether the driver and passenger seatbelts
were fastened/tensioned
•
The driver's use of the accelerator or brake
pedal
•
The travel speed of the vehicle
This information can help us better understand
the circumstances in which traffic accidents, injuries and damage occur. The EDR only records
data when a non-trivial collision situation occurs.
The EDR does not record any data during normal
driving conditions. Similarly, the system never
registers who is driving the vehicle or the geographic location of the accident or near-miss situation. However, other parties, such as the police,
could use the recorded data in combination with
the type of personally identifiable information
routinely collected after a traffic accident. Special
equipment and access to either the vehicle or the
EDR is required to be able to interpret the registered data.
In addition to the EDR, the car is equipped with a
number of computers designed to continually
check and monitor the function of the car. They
can record data during normal driving conditions,
but in particular register faults affecting the vehicle's operation and functionality, or upon activation of the vehicle's active driver support function
(e.g. City Safety and the auto brake function).
Volvo will not contribute to the above-described
information being disclosed to third parties without the vehicle owner's consent. To comply with
national legislation and regulations, Volvo may be
forced to disclose information of this nature to
the police or other authorities who may assert a
legal right to access such. Special technical
equipment which Volvo and workshops that have
entered into agreements with Volvo have access
to is required to be able to read and interpret the
recorded data. Volvo is responsible that the information, which is transferred to Volvo during servicing and maintenance, is stored and handled in a
secure manner and that the handling complies
with applicable legal requirements. For further
information - contact a Volvo dealer.
Some of the recorded data is required to enable
service and maintenance technicians to diagnose
and remedy any faults that occurred in the vehicle. The registered information is also needed to
enable Volvo to satisfy legal requirements laid out
in laws and by government authorities. Information registered in the vehicle is stored in its computer until the vehicle is serviced or repaired.
In addition to the above, the registered information can be used in aggregate form for research
and product development with the aim of continuously improving the safety and quality of Volvo
cars.
19
INTRODUCTION
Accessories and extra equipment
Volvo ID
The incorrect connection and installation of
accessories and extra equipment can negatively
affect the car's electronic system.
Volvo ID provides access to a wide range of personalized Volvo services5 online.
Examples of services:
Certain accessories only function when associated software is installed in the car's computer
system. Volvo therefore recommends that you
always contact an authorised Volvo workshop
before installing accessories or extra equipment
which are connected to or affect the electrical
system.
Heat-reflecting windscreen*
The windscreen is equipped with a heat-reflecting film (IR) that reduces the solar heat radiation
into the passenger compartment.
The positioning of electronic equipment, such as
a transponder, behind a glass surface with heatreflecting film may affect its function and performance.
Areas where IR film is not applied.
Dimensions
A
65 mm
B
150 mm
C
125 mm
For the optimal function of electronic equipment,
it should be positioned on the part of the windscreen with no heat-reflecting film (see the highlighted area in the illustration).
5
20
•
In an Internet-connected car* - Certain functions and services require that you have registered your car to a personal Volvo ID, for
example to be able to send a new address
from a map service on the Internet directly to
the car.
•
Volvo On Call* - Volvo ID is used when logging in to the Volvo On Call app.
Advantages of Volvo ID
•
One user name and one password to access
online services, i.e. only one username and
one password to remember.
•
When changing the username/password for
a service (e.g. Volvo On Call) it will also be
changed automatically for other services.
Create a Volvo ID
To create a Volvo ID you need to enter a personal
e-mail address. Then follow the instructions in
the e-mail message that is automatically sent to
the specified address in order to complete the
registration. It is possible to create a Volvo ID via
one of the following services:
The services available may vary over time and vary depending on equipment level and market.
* Option/accessory.
INTRODUCTION
•
Volvo Cars website - Go to
www.volvocars.com and log in6 at the icon,
top right. Select Create Volvo ID.
•
For an Internet-connected car* - Enter your
e-mail address in the app that requires Volvo
ID and follow the instructions. Alternatively,
press the Connect button
in the centre
console twice and select Apps Settings
and follow the instructions.
•
Volvo On Call* - Download the latest version
of the Volvo On Call app. Choose to create a
Volvo ID from the start page, enter e-mail
address and follow the instructions.
Related information
•
6
Volvo Cars support site (p. 15)
Available in certain markets.
* Option/accessory.
21
INTRODUCTION
Environmental philosophy
Volvo Car Corporation is constantly working on
the development of safer and more efficient
Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars’ core values and influences all operations. The environmental work is based on the whole life cycle of
the car and takes into account the environmental
impact it has, from design to scrapping and recycling. Volvo Cars' basic principle is that every new
product developed must have less impact on the
environment than the product it replaces.
Volvo's environmental management work has
resulted in the development of the more efficient
and less polluting Drive-E drivelines. The personal
environment is also important to Volvo - the air
22
products and solutions in order to reduce the
negative impact on the environment.
inside a Volvo is, for example, cleaner than the air
outside thanks to the climate control system.
Your Volvo complies with stringent international
environmental standards. All Volvo's manufacturing units must be ISO 14001 certified, and this
supports a systematic approach to the operation's environmental issues, which leads to continuous improvement with reduced environmental
impact. Holding the ISO certificate also means
that environmental laws and regulations in force
are complied with. Volvo also requires that its
partners must also meet these requirements.
Fuel consumption
Since a large part of a car's total environmental
impact stems from its use, the emphasis of Volvo
Cars' environmental work is on reducing fuel consumption, carbon dioxide emissions and other air
pollutants. Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption in each of their respective classes.
Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower
emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
INTRODUCTION
Contributing to a better environment
An energy-efficient and fuel-efficient car not only
contributes to a reduced impact on the environment, but also means reduced costs for the
owner of the car. As the driver, it is easy to
reduce fuel consumption and thereby save
money and contribute to a better environment here is some advice:
•
•
Plan for an effective average speed. Speeds
above approx. 80 km/h (50 mph) and below
50 km/h (30 mph) lead to increased energy
consumption.
Follow the Service and Warranty Booklet's
recommended intervals for service and maintenance of the car.
shop in the event of uncertainty about how this
type of waste should be discarded - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Following this advice can save money, the planet's resources are saved, and the car's durability
is extended. For more information and further
advice, see Eco guide (p. 70), Economical driving (p. 301) and Fuel consumption (p. 398).
Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept
"Clean inside and out" – a concept that encompasses a clean interior environment as well as
highly efficient emission control. In many cases
the exhaust emissions are well below the applicable standards.
•
Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the
engine when stationary for longer periods.
Pay attention to local regulations.
•
Plan the journey - a lot of unnecessary stops
and uneven speed contribute to increased
fuel consumption.
A passenger compartment filter prevents dust
and pollen from entering the passenger compartment via the air intake.
•
If the car is equipped with an engine block
heater*, use it before starting from cold - it
improves starting capacity and reduces wear
in cold weather and the engine reaches normal operating temperature more quickly,
which lowers consumption and reduces
emissions.
The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* ensures
that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the
traffic outside.
Also remember to always dispose of environmentally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oil, in
an environmentally safe manner. Consult a work-
Clean air in the passenger
compartment
The system cleans the air in the passenger compartment from contaminants such as particles,
hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level
ozone. If the outside air is contaminated then the
air intake is closed and the air is recirculated.
Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic,
queues and tunnels for example.
IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*, which also includes a function that
allows the fan to start when the car is unlocked
with the remote control key.
Interior
The material used in the interior of a Volvo is
carefully selected and has been tested in order to
be pleasant and comfortable. Some of the details
are hand-made, such as the seams of the steering wheel that are sewn by hand. The interior is
monitored in order not to emit strong odours or
substances that cause discomfort in the event of
e.g. high heat and bright light.
Volvo workshops and the environment
Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a
long service life and low fuel consumption for
your car. In this way you also contribute to a
cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops
are entrusted with the service and maintenance
of your car it becomes part of Volvo's system.
Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in
which workshop premises shall be designed in
order to prevent spills and discharges into the
environment. The workshop staff have the knowledge and the tools required to guarantee good
environmental care.
Recycling
Since Volvo works from a life cycle perspective, it
is also important that the car is recycled in an
environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the
car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is
* Option/accessory.
}}
23
INTRODUCTION
||
therefore requested to contact a dealer for referral to a certified/approved recycling facility.
Related information
•
24
The owner's manual and the environment
(p. 25)
INTRODUCTION
The owner's manual and the
environment
The paper pulp in a printed owner's manual
comes from Forest Stewardship Council® certified forests or other controlled sources.
The FSC® symbol shows that the paper pulp in a
printed owner's manual comes from FSC® certified forests or other controlled sources.
Laminated glass
The glass is reinforced which provides
better protection against break-ins and
improved sound insulation in the passenger compartment. The windscreen
and other windows* have laminated glass.
Related information
•
Environmental philosophy (p. 22)
* Option/accessory.
25
SAFETY
SAFETY
General information on seatbelts
Heavy braking can have serious consequences
if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all passengers are using their seatbelts during the journey.
Remember
•
•
Do not use clips or anything else that can
prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly.
The seatbelt must not be twisted or caught
on anything.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
diminish the protection provided by the airbag
in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.
Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal
shoulder belt up towards the shoulder. The hip strap
must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen).
It is important that the seatbelt lies against the
body so it can provide maximum protection. Do
not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is
designed to protect in a normal seating position.
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten
their (p. 29) seatbelt by means of an audio and
visual reminder (p. 31).
28
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop.
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major
load, such as in conjunction with a collision,
the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of
the seatbelt's protective properties may have
been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear
damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced
if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new
seatbelt must be type-approved and designed
for installation at the same location as the
replaced seatbelt.
Related information
•
•
•
Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 30)
Seatbelt - loosening (p. 30)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 31)
SAFETY
Seatbelt - putting on
Remember
Put on the seatbelt (p. 28) before driving starts.
The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by pressing
its locking tab into the seatbelt buckle. A loud
"click" indicates that the belt has locked.
•
•
•
if it is pulled out too quickly
during braking and acceleration
if the car leans heavily.
Related information
Incorrectly fitted seatbelt. The belt must rest on the
shoulder.
•
•
•
•
Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 30)
Seatbelt - loosening (p. 30)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 31)
Seatbelt reminder (p. 31)
Correctly fitted seatbelt.
Seatbelt height adjustment. Press the button and move
the belt vertically. Position the belt as high as possible
without it chafing against your throat.
The locking tab at the centre rear seat only fits
into the intended seatbelt buckle.
29
SAFETY
Seatbelt - loosening
Seatbelt - pregnancy
Loosen the seatbelt (p. 28) when the car is stationary.
Seatbelt (p. 28) must always be worn during
pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the
correct way.
Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle and
then let the belt retract. If the seatbelt does not
retract fully, feed it in by hand so that it does not
hang loose.
Related information
Seatbelt - putting on (p. 29)
Seatbelt reminder (p. 31)
G020998
•
•
The diagonal section should wrap over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to
the side of the abdomen.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and
as low as possible under the abdomen. – It must
never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the
slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as
close to the body as possible. In addition, check
that there are no twists in the seatbelt.
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
must adjust the seat (p. 82) and steering wheel
(p. 87) such that they can easily maintain control of the vehicle as they drive (which means that
they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel). The aim should be to
30
position the seat with as large a distance as possible between abdomen and steering wheel.
Related information
•
•
Seatbelt - putting on (p. 29)
Seatbelt - loosening (p. 30)
SAFETY
Seatbelt reminder
The message is acknowledged automatically
after approximately 30 seconds driving or
after pressing the indicator stalk OK button
(p. 110). If anyone is unbelted then the message can only be acknowledged manually by
pressing the indicator stalk OK button.
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten
their (p. 29) seatbelt by means of an audio and
visual reminder.
•
Provides a warning if one of the rear seatbelts is unfastened during travel. This warning takes the form of a message in the combined instrument panel along with the audio/
visual signal. The warning stops when the
seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can also be
acknowledged manually by pressing the OK
button.
Seatbelt tensioner
Seatbelts (p. 28) on the driver's side, the passenger side and at the outer rear seats are fitted
with seatbelt tensioners. A mechanism in the
seatbelt tensioner tightens the seatbelt in the
event of a sufficiently violent collision. The seatbelt then provides more effective restraint for the
occupants.
WARNING
Never insert the tongue of the passenger's
seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's side.
Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into
the buckle on the correct side. Do not make
any damages on seatbelts nor insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts and
buckles would then possibly not function as
intended in the event of a collision. There is a
risk of serous injury.
The combined instrument panel's information display shows which seatbelts are in use. This information is always available.
The audio reminder is speed dependent, and in
some cases time dependent. The visual reminder
is located in the roof console and in the combined instrument panel (p. 66).
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt
reminder system.
Related information
•
General information on seatbelts (p. 28)
Rear seat
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
•
Provides information on which seatbelts
(p. 28) are being used in the rear seat. A
message appears in the combined instrument panel when the seatbelts are in use, or
if one of the rear doors has been opened.
31
SAFETY
Safety - warning symbol
WARNING
The warning symbol is shown if a fault is
detected during fault tracing or if a system has
been activated. Where required, the warning
symbol is shown together with a message in the
combined instrument panel (p. 66) information
display.
If the warning symbol for the airbag system
remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, it means that the airbag system does not
have full functionality. The symbol indicates a
fault in the airbag system, the belt tensioner
system, SIPS, the IC system or some other
fault in the system. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop
immediately.
Related information
Warning triangle and warning symbol for the airbag system in the digital combined instrument panel.
Warning triangle and warning symbol for the airbag system (p. 33) in the analogue combined instrument
panel.
32
The warning symbol in the combined instrument
panel is switched on with the remote control key
in key position II (p. 81), fault tracing is performed each time the ignition is switched on. The
symbol clears after approx. 6 seconds provided
the airbag system is fault-free.
The warning symbol is shown if a fault is
detected during fault tracing or if a system has
been activated. Where required, the warning symbol is shown together with a message in the display. If the warning symbol malfunctions, the
warning triangle illuminates and SRS airbag
Service required or SRS airbag Service
urgent appears in the display. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo
workshop immediately.
•
General information on safety mode (p. 42)
SAFETY
Airbag system
In the event of a frontal collision the airbag system helps to protect the head, face and chest of
the driver and passenger.
The system consists of airbags and sensors. A
sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and
the airbag(s) are inflated and become hot. The
airbag cushions the initial collision impact for the
occupant. The airbag deflates when compressed
by the collision. When this occurs, smoke
escapes into the car. This is completely normal.
The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.
If the airbags have deployed, the following is recommended:
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that
you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo
workshop. Do not drive with deployed airbags.
•
Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to handle the
replacement of components in the car's
safety systems.
G018665
•
Airbag system viewed from above, left-hand-drive car.
•
Always contact a doctor.
G018666
WARNING
Airbag system viewed from above, right-hand-drive car.
The airbag system's control module is located
in the centre console. If the centre console is
drenched with water or other liquid, disconnect the battery cables. Do not attempt to
start the car since the airbags may deploy.
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that
you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo
workshop.
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They can
make steering difficult. Other safety systems
may also be damaged. The smoke and dust
created when the airbags are deployed can
cause skin and eye irritation/injury after intensive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with
cold water. The rapid deployment sequence
and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin
burns.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop for repair. Defective work in the airbag system could cause
malfunction and result in serious personal
injury.
NOTE
The detectors react differently depending on
the nature of the collision and whether or not
the seatbelt is fastened. Applies to all seatbelt positions apart from centre seat rear.
It is therefore possible that only one (or none)
of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The
detectors sense the force of the collision on
the vehicle and the action is adapted accordingly so that one or more airbags are
deployed.
}}
33
SAFETY
||
Related information
•
•
•
Airbags on driver's side (p. 34)
Passenger airbag (p. 35)
Safety - warning symbol (p. 32)
Airbags on driver's side
To supplement the protection afforded by the
seatbelt (p. 28) on the driver side, the car is
equipped with two airbags (p. 33).
One of the airbags is folded up into the centre of
the steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked
AIRBAG.
Knee airbag on the driver's side in a left-hand-drive car.
The second airbag (at knee level) is fitted in the
lower part of the instrument panel on the driver's
side; this panel is labelled AIRBAG.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt
is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
diminish the protection provided by the airbags in the event of a collision.
34
Related information
•
Passenger airbag (p. 35)
SAFETY
Passenger airbag
To supplement the protection afforded by the
seatbelt (p. 28) on the passenger side, the car
is equipped with an airbag (p. 33).
The airbag is folded up into a compartment
above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked
AIRBAG.
Location of the front passenger airbag in a right-hand
drive car.
Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label
becomes visible when the passenger door is opened.
Label for passenger airbag
The warning label for the passenger airbag is
positioned as shown above.
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on a seat
protected by an activated airbag. Failure to
follow this advice can lead to death or serious
injury to the child.
Location of the front passenger airbag in a left-hand
drive car.
Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
}}
35
SAFETY
||
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt
is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
diminish the protection provided by the airbag
in the event of a collision.
Switch - PACOS*
The front passenger airbag can be deactivated
(p. 36) if the car is equipped with a switch,
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch).
WARNING
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and backs
against the backrest. Seatbelts must be
secured.
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the
dashboard where the passenger airbag is
located.
If the car is equipped with an airbag for the
front passenger seat, but does not have a
switch PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off
Switch), then the airbag will always be activated.
Related information
•
•
Airbags on driver's side (p. 34)
Passenger airbag - activating/
deactivating*
The front passenger airbag (p. 35) can be deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch,
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch).
Switch - PACOS
The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS) is
located on the passenger end of the instrument
panel and is accessible when the passenger door
is open.
Check that the switch is in the required position.
The remote control key's key blade (p. 167)
should be used to change position.
Child seats (p. 47)
WARNING
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of
the front passenger seat.
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the passenger airbag is
activated.
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the front passenger seat if
the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
36
Location of airbag switch.
ON- the airbag is activated. With the switch
in this position, all front-facing passengers
* Option/accessory.
SAFETY
(children and adults) can sit safely on the
passenger seat.
OFF - the airbag is deactivated. With the
switch in this position, children in rear-facing
child seats can sit safely on the front passenger seat.
WARNING
Activated airbag (passenger seat):
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat when the passenger airbag is
activated.
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the front passenger seat
when the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
NOTE
When the remote control key is in key position II (p. 81) the warning symbol (p. 32) for
the airbag is shown in the combined instrument panel for approx. 6 seconds.
Following which, the indicator in the roof console is illuminated showing the correct status
for the front passenger seat airbag.
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is activated.
A text message and a warning symbol in the roof
console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is activated (see preceding illustration).
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
seat if the passenger airbag is activated and
symbol in the roof console is illumithe
nated to indicate this. Failure to follow this
advice could endanger the life of the child.
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is deactivated.
A text message and a symbol in the roof console
indicate that the airbag for the front passenger
seat is deactivated (see preceding illustration).
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to sit in the front passenger seat if the message in the roof console indicates that the airbag is deactivated,
and if the warning symbol (p. 32) for the airbag system is also displayed on the combined
instrument panel. This indicates that there has
been a severe malfunction. Visit a workshop
as soon as possible. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger the lives of passengers in the car.
}}
37
SAFETY
||
Related information
•
Child seats (p. 47)
Side airbag (SIPS)
In a side impact collision a large proportion of
the collision force is transferred by the SIPS
(Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pillars, the floor, the roof and other structural parts
of the body. The side airbags at the driver's and
front passenger seats protect the chest area and
the hip and are an important part of the SIPS.
Driver's seat, left-hand drive.
The SIPS bag system consists of two main components, side airbag and sensors. The side airbags are located in the front seat's backrests.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag
inflates between the occupant and the door
panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The
airbag deflates when compressed by the collision.
The side airbag is normally only deployed on the
side of the collision.
38
Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.
SAFETY
WARNING
•
Volvo recommends that repairs are only
carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop. Defective work in the SIPS-bag
system could cause malfunction and
result in serious personal injury.
•
Do not put objects in the area between
the outside of the seat and the door
panel, since this area is required by the
side airbag.
•
Volvo recommends the use only of car
seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat
covers may impede the operation of the
side airbags.
•
Inflatable Curtain (IC)
WARNING
The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the driver
and passengers from striking their heads on the
inside of the car during a collision.
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
handles in the roof. The hook is only designed
for light clothing (not for solid objects such as
umbrellas for example).
Do not screw or install anything onto the car's
headlining, door pillars or side panels. This
could compromise the intended protection.
Volvo recommends that you only ever use
Volvo genuine parts that are approved for
placement in these areas.
WARNING
Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under
the top edge of the windows in the doors.
Otherwise, the intended protection of the
inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the
headlining, may be compromised.
Side airbags are a supplement the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
SIPS and child seats
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is
not diminished by the side airbag.
The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is
part of the SIPS system (p. 38). It is fitted along
the headlining on both sides and helps protect
the driver and passengers in the car's outer
seats. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the
seatbelts.
Related information
•
•
•
Always use a seatbelt.
Airbags on driver's side (p. 34)
Passenger airbag (p. 35)
Inflatable Curtain (IC) (p. 39)
Related information
•
•
•
General information on seatbelts (p. 28)
Airbag system (p. 33)
Side airbag (SIPS) (p. 38)
39
SAFETY
General information on WHIPS
(whiplash protection)
and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an
influence.
WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) is a protection against whiplash injuries. The system
consists of energy absorbing backrests and
specially designed head restraints in the front
seats.
WARNING
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Seat properties
When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front
seat backrests are lowered backward to change
the seating position of the driver and front seat
passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash
injury.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
system yourself. Volvo recommends that you
contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WHIPS and child seats
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is
not diminished by the WHIPS system.
Related information
•
•
The WHIPS system is actuated by a rear-end collision, where the angle and speed of the collision,
40
WHIPS - seating position (p. 41)
General information on seatbelts (p. 28)
SAFETY
WHIPS - seating position
In order to obtain optimum protection from the
WHIPS system (p. 40) the driver and passenger
must have the correct seating position and make
sure that the system's function is not obstructed.
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat's backrest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the
function of the WHIPS system.
Seating position
WARNING
If a seat has been subjected to extreme
forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, the
WHIPS system must be checked. Volvo recommends that it is checked by an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Part of the WHIPS system's protective
capacity may have been lost even if the seat
appears to be undamaged.
Set the correct seating position in the front seat
(p. 82) before driving starts.
Driver and front seat passenger should sit in the
centre of the seat with as little space as possible
between the head and the head restraint.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop to have the system checked even after a minor rear-end collision.
Function
Do not place objects on the rear seat that may prevent
the WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the driver's
seat/passenger seat that may prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.
If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered or a
rear-facing child seat is used in the rear seat,
the corresponding front seat must be moved
forward so that it does not make contact with
the lowered backrest or child seat.
41
SAFETY
General information on safety mode
Related information
Safety mode is a protective state that is triggered when a collision may have damaged any
of the car's vital functions, such as the fuel lines,
sensors for any of the safety systems, or the
brake system.
Warning triangle in the digital combined instrument
panel.
Warning triangle in the analogue combined instrument
panel.
If the car is involved in a collision, the text Safety
mode See manual may appear in the combined
instrument panel (p. 66) information display.
This means that the car has reduced functionality.
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset the
electronics yourself if the car has been in
safety mode. This could result in personal
injury or the car not functioning as normal.
Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to check and
restore the car to normal status after Safety
mode See manual has been displayed.
42
•
Safety mode - attempting to start the car
(p. 43)
•
Safety mode - moving the car (p. 43)
SAFETY
Safety mode - attempting to start
the car
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to
restart the car if it smells of fuel when the
Safety mode See manual message is displayed. Leave the car at once.
If the car is set in safety mode (p. 42) then an
attempt to start the car can be made if everything seems normal and the absence of fuel
leakage has been checked.
If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode
See manual has been reset after attempting to
start the car (p. 43) , the car can be moved carefully out of a dangerous position.
Do not move the car further than necessary.
WARNING
First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car.
There must be no smell of fuel either.
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its location. Volvo recommends that it is transported
to an authorised Volvo workshop.
If everything seems normal and you have
checked for indications of fuel leakage, you may
attempt to start the car.
Remove the remote control key and open the
driver's door. If a message is now shown to the
effect that the ignition is on, press the start button. Then close the door and reinsert the remote
control key. The car's electronics will now try to
reset themselves to normal mode. Then try to
start the car.
Safety mode - moving the car
Related information
•
General information on safety mode (p. 42)
Related information
•
Safety mode - moving the car (p. 43)
If the message Safety mode See manual is
still shown on the display, then the car must not
be driven or towed, but a vehicle recovery service
(p. 311) must be used instead. Even if the car
appears to be driveable, hidden damage may
make the car impossible to control once moving.
43
SAFETY
Pedestrian airbag
NOTE
The airbag for pedestrians (Pedestrian Airbag)
contributes in certain frontal collisions to alleviating the collision of the pedestrian with the car.
There may be objects in the traffic environment that prompt a signal to the sensors that
is similar to a collision with a pedestrian. It is
possible that the system will be activated in
the event of a collision with such an object.
If the airbag is activated (Pedestrian Airbag)
•
the rear part of the bonnet is raised and
locked in this position
•
•
the hazard warning flashers are activated
the brake system is prepared for the upcoming emergency braking.
WARNING
The pedestrian airbag (Pedestrian Airbag) is fitted under the bonnet near the windscreen. In the
event of certain frontal collisions with a pedestrian, the sensors in the front bumper react and
the airbag inflates if required, based on the force
of the impact. The sensors are active at a speed
of approx. 20-50 km/h (12-30 mph) and an
ambient temperature between -20 and +70°C.
The sensors are designed to detect a collision
with an object that has similar properties to those
of the human leg.
44
Do not fit any accessories or change anything
in the front. Incorrect intervention at the front
may cause incorrect function in the system
and lead to serious injury and damage to the
car.
Volvo recommends that genuine wiper arms
are used and that you only use genuine parts
for them.
WARNING
Volvo recommends contacting an authorised
Volvo workshop in the event of damage to the
bumper in order to ensure that the system is
intact.
Related information
•
•
Pedestrian airbag - moving the car (p. 45)
Pedestrian airbag - folding up (p. 45)
SAFETY
Pedestrian airbag - moving the car
Pedestrian airbag - folding up
3.
The car may be moved if it has not been set in
safety mode (p. 42).
Pedestrian airbag (p. 44) (Pedestrian Airbag)
must be folded up before the car is moved.
Press the rolled up portion of the airbag into
the airbag housing (2).
4.
Repeat points 1-3 for the right-hand side. It
may be necessary to fold the gathered fabric
twice on this side in order to wind the Velcro
strap around it.
5.
The airbag housing cover will be open
slightly. This is completely normal.
If any of the other airbags in the passenger compartment were activated then the car remains in
safety mode.
If only the pedestrian airbag (p. 44) (Pedestrian
Airbag) has been activated:
1.
Move the car to a safe location as close as
possible.
2.
Fold up the airbag in accordance with the
instructions (p. 45).
3.
Seek the nearest workshop.
Related information
•
Airbag
WARNING
Airbag housing
Volvo recommends that, after activation of the
airbag, you contact an authorised Volvo workshop as soon as possible.
Related information
•
Pedestrian airbag (p. 44)
Pedestrian airbag - moving the car (p. 45)
Velcro strap, right-hand side
Velcro strap, left-hand side
The airbag may feel warm and give off smoke.
This is normal. Fold the airbag as follows:
1.
Find the Velcro strap on the
left-hand side (4).
2.
Gather the airbag fabric along its length on
the left-hand side. Then fold the gathered
fabric towards the centre. Wind the Velcro
strap (double sided) around as much fabric
as possible and fasten it.
45
SAFETY
General information on child safety
Child safety locks
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats,
booster cushions & attachment devices) which
is designed for fitting in this particular car.
The controls for operating the rear door power
windows and the rear door opening handles can
be blocked (p. 180) from opening from the
inside.
Using Volvo's child safety equipment, the optimum conditions are obtained for the child to
travel safely in the car. In addition, the child safety
equipment fits well and is simple to use.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to
sit on the knee of a passenger.
Volvo recommends that children travel in rearfacing child seats until as late an age as possible,
at least up to 3-4 years of age, and then in frontfacing booster cushions/child seats until the
child is 140 cm tall.
NOTE
Legal provisions about the type of child seat
that must be used for children of different
ages and heights vary from country to country. Check what does apply.
NOTE
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety products, contact the manufacturer for
clearer instructions.
46
Related information
•
•
•
•
Child seats (p. 47)
Child seats - location (p. 52)
Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 53)
Child seats - upper mounting points (p. 57)
SAFETY
Child seats
Children should sit comfortably and safely. Make
sure that the child seat is being used correctly.
NOTE
When using child safety products it is important to read the installation instructions
included.
NOTE
Never leave a child seat unsecured in the car.
Always secure it according to the instructions
for the child seat, even when it is not in use.
WARNING
Do not secure the straps of the child seat to
the seat's horizontal adjustment bar, springs
or the rails and beams under the seat. Sharp
edges may damage the straps.
Look in the installation instructions for the child
seat for the correct fitting.
}}
47
SAFETY
||
Recommended child seats1
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child seats)
Group 0
Outer rear seat
Group 0+
Type approval: E1 04301146
max 13 kg
(L)
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant
Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt.
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rearfacing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Group 0+
Type approval: E1 04301146
Type approval: E1 04301146
max 13 kg
(U)
(U)
max 10 kg
Centre rear seat
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rearfacing child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system.
max 10 kg
Group 0
Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child
seats)
Volvo infant seat
(Volvo Infant Seat) rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's
seatbelt.
Type approval: E1
04301146
(U)
Group 0
max 10 kg
Group 0+
Child seats which are universally
approved.A
Child seats which are universally approved.
(U)
(U)
max 13 kg
1 With
48
regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
SAFETY
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child seats)
Group 1
Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) – rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps.
9-18 kg
Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child
seats)
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible
Child Seat) – rear-facing child seat, secured
with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
(L)
Group 1
Volvo rear-facing child seat
Volvo rear-facing child seat
9-18 kg
Type approval: E5 04212
Type approval: E5 04212
(L)
(L)
Group 1
Front-facing child seats which
are universally approved.A, B
9-18 kg
Child seats which are universally approved.
(U)
(UF)
Group 2
15-25 kg
Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) – rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible
Child Seat) – rear-facing child seat, secured
with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
(L)
Group 2
Volvo rear-facing child seat
Volvo rear-facing child seat
15-25 kg
Type approval: E5 04212
Type approval: E5 04212
(L)
(L)
}}
49
SAFETY
||
Weight
Group 2
15-25 kg
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child seats)
Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child
seats)
Outer rear seat
Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) - frontfacing child seat, secured with
the car's seatbelt.
Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible
Child Seat) - front-facing child seat, secured
with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
Type approval: E5 04191
(U)
(U)
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with
backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo
Booster Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
(UF)
50
Group 2/3
Volvo booster seat
Volvo booster seat
15-36 kg
Type approval: E1 04301312
Type approval: E1 04301312
(UF)
(UF, L)
Centre rear seat
SAFETY
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child seats)
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child
seats)
Outer rear seat
Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushion
with and without backrest).
Booster cushion with and without backrest
(Booster Cushion with and without backrest).
Type approval: E5 04216
Centre rear seat
Type approval: E5 04216
(UF)
(UF)
L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.
B: Built-in child seats approved for this weight class.
A
B
Only for rear-facing child seat. Set the seat's backrest in upright position.
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Child seats - location (p. 52)
Child seats - upper mounting points (p. 57)
Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 53)
General information on child safety (p. 46)
51
SAFETY
Child seats - location
Label for passenger airbag
The position of a child in the car and the choice
of equipment are dictated by the child's weight
and size.
You may place:
•
a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat when the passenger airbag is deactivated.
•
a front-facing child seat/booster cushion on
the front passenger seat when the passenger airbag is activated.
•
one or more child seats/booster cushions in
the rear seat.
WARNING
G020739
Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
Rear-facing child seat and airbag are not compatible.
WARNING
Always fit rear-facing child seats (p. 47) in the
rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated
(p. 36). If a child is sitting on the front passenger
seat then he/she could suffer serious injury if the
airbag deploys.
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of
the front passenger seat.
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the passenger airbag is
activated.
If the passenger airbag is deactivated then rearfacing child seats can be fitted on the front passenger seat.
Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label
becomes visible when the passenger door is opened.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is
positioned as shown above.
52
Never use a rear-facing child seat on a seat
protected by an activated airbag. Failure to
follow this advice can lead to death or serious
injury to the child.
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the front passenger seat if
the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
SAFETY
WARNING
Booster cushions/child seats with steel
braces or some other design that could rest
on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must
not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt
buckle to open accidentally.
Child seat - ISOFIX
ISOFIX - size classes
ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child seats
(p. 47) that is based on an international standard.
There is a size classification for child seats using
the ISOFIX (p. 53) fixture system in order to
assist users in choosing the correct type of child
seat (p. 55).
Size
class
Do not allow the upper section of the child
seat to rest against the windscreen.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the placement of children in cars vary from country to country.
Check what does apply.
Related information
•
•
•
General information on child safety (p. 46)
Child seats - upper mounting points (p. 57)
Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 53)
Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system are
located at the lower section of the rear seat
backrest, in the outer seats.
The location of the mounting points is indicated
by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see preceding illustration).
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to the
ISOFIX mounting points.
Related information
•
•
•
ISOFIX - size classes (p. 53)
Description
A
Full size, front-facing child seat
B
Reduced size (alt. 1), front-facing
child seat
B1
Reduced size (alt.2), front-facing
child seat
C
Full size, rear-facing child seat
D
Reduced size, rear-facing child
seat
E
Rear-facing infant seat
F
Transverse infant seat, left-hand
G
Transverse infant seat, right-hand
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated.
ISOFIX - types of child seat (p. 55)
General information on child safety (p. 46)
}}
53
SAFETY
||
NOTE
If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classification, the car model must be included on the
vehicle list for the child seat.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo dealer for recommendations
about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends.
Related information
•
54
ISOFIX - types of child seat (p. 55)
SAFETY
ISOFIX - types of child seat
Child seats are in different sizes – cars are in different sizes. This means that not all child seats
are suitable for all seats in all car models.
Type of child seat
Infant seat transverse
Infant seat, rear-facing
Weight
max 10 kg
max 10 kg
Size class
Passenger seats for ISOFIXA installation of child seats
Front seat
Outer rear seat
F
X
X
G
X
X
E
X
OK
(IL)
Infant seat, rear-facing
max 13 kg
E
X
D
X
OK
(IL)
OK
(IL)
C
X
OK
(IL)
Child seat, rear-facing
9-18 kg
D
X
C
X
OK
(IL)
OK
(IL)
}}
55
SAFETY
||
Type of child seat
Front-facing child seat
Weight
Size class
9-18 kg
B
Passenger seats for ISOFIXA installation of child seats
Front seat
Outer rear seat
X
OKB
(IUF)
B1
X
OKB
(IUF)
A
X
OKB
(IUF)
X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.
IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for a particular car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.
A
B
ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child seats that is based on an international standard.
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
Make sure you select the right size class (p. 53)
of child seat with ISOFIX fixture system.
Related information
•
56
Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 53)
SAFETY
Child seats - upper mounting points
NOTE
The car is equipped with upper mounting points
for certain front-facing child seats (p. 47). These
mounting points are located on the rear of the
seat.
In cars with a cargo cover over the luggage
compartment, this must be removed before
child seats can be attached to the securing
points.
Upper mounting points
For detailed information on how the child seat
should be tensioned in the upper mounting
points, see the seat manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING
The child seat's straps must always be drawn
through the hole in the head restraint leg
before they are tensioned at the attachment
point.
Related information
The upper mounting points are primarily intended
for use with front-facing child seats. Volvo recommends that small children should sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age as possible.
•
•
•
General information on child safety (p. 46)
Child seats - location (p. 52)
Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 53)
NOTE
Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate
fitting this type of child seat in cars with folding head restraints on the outer seats.
57
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Instruments and controls, left-hand
drive car - overview
The overview shows where the car's displays
and controls are located.
60
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Overview, left-hand drive cars
}}
61
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
62
Function
See
Function
See
Menus and messages, direction indicators, main/dipped
beam, trip computer
(p. 110),
(p. 113),
(p. 99),
(p. 91) and
(p. 114).
Door handle
–
Control panel
Manual gear changing in an automatic
gearbox*
(p. 274).
(p. 175),
(p. 180),
(p. 104) and
(p. 106).
Hazard warning
flashers
(p. 99).
Cruise control*
(p. 194) and
(p. 203).
Horn, airbags
(p. 87) and
(p. 33).
Control panel for
infotainment system
and menu navigation
(p. 113) and the
Sensus Infotainment supplement.
Combined instrument
panel
(p. 66).
Control panel for climate control
(p. 131) or
(p. 132).
Menu navigation,
audio control, phone
control*
(p. 113) and the
Sensus Infotainment supplement.
Gear selector
(p. 273) or
(p. 274).
Parking brake
(p. 291).
Wipers and washing
(p. 102).
START/STOP
ENGINE button
(p. 270).
(p. 87).
Ignition switch
(p. 80).
Steering wheel
adjustment
Bonnet opener
(p. 341).
Screen for infotainment and display of
menus
(p. 113) and the
Sensus Infotainment supplement.
Light switch, opener
for tailgate
(p. 88) and
(p. 176).
Seat adjustment*
(p. 84).
Related information
•
•
•
Outside temperature gauge (p. 75)
Trip meter (p. 75)
Clock (p. 75)
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Instruments and controls, righthand drive car - overview
The overview shows where the car's displays
and controls are located.
}}
63
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
64
Overview, right-hand drive cars
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Function
See
Function
See
Function
See
Wipers and washing
(p. 102).
Control panel
Manual gear changing in an automatic
gearbox*
(p. 274).
(p. 175),
(p. 180),
(p. 104) and
(p. 106).
Light switch, opener
for tailgate
(p. 88) and
(p. 176).
Seat adjustment*
(p. 84).
Menu navigation,
audio control, phone
control*
(p. 113) and the
Sensus Infotainment supplement.
Horn, airbags
(p. 87) and
(p. 33).
Combined instrument
panel
(p. 66).
Cruise control*
(p. 194) and
(p. 203).
START/STOP
ENGINE button
(p. 270).
Ignition switch
(p. 80).
Screen for infotainment and display of
menus
(p. 113) and the
Sensus Infotainment supplement.
Door handle
–
Bonnet opener
(p. 341).
Hazard warning
flashers
(p. 99).
Control panel for
infotainment system
and menu navigation
(p. 113) and the
Sensus Infotainment supplement.
Control panel for climate control
(p. 131) or
(p. 132).
Gear selector
(p. 273) or
(p. 274).
Parking brake
(p. 291).
Menus and messages, direction indicators, main/dipped
beam, trip computer
(p. 110),
(p. 113),
(p. 99),
(p. 91) and
(p. 114).
Steering wheel
adjustment
(p. 87).
Related information
•
•
•
Outside temperature gauge (p. 75)
Trip meter (p. 75)
Clock (p. 75)
* Option/accessory.
65
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Combined instrument panel
The combined instrument panel's information
display shows information on some of the car's
functions, as well as messages.
•
Analogue combined instrument panel - overview (p. 66)
•
Digital combined instrument panel - overview
(p. 67)
•
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 71)
•
Combined instrument cluster - meaning of
warning symbols (p. 73)
Analogue combined instrument
panel - overview
Gauges and indicators
The combined instrument panel's information
display shows information on some of the car's
functions, as well as messages.
Information display
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking1, the yellow indicator
symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illuminated. See also Trip computer (p. 114) and
Filling up with fuel (p. 296).
Information display, analogue instrument panel.
There are further descriptions under the functions that use the display.
Eco meter The meter provides an indication
of how economically the car is being driven.
The higher the reading on the scale, the
more economically the car is driven.
Speedometer
1
66
When the display's message Distance to empty fuel tank: starts to show ----, the marking becomes red.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per minute
(rpm).
Gear shift indicator2 / Gear position indicator3. See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 274)
or Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 274).
Indicator and warning symbols
Functionality check
All indicator and warning symbols, apart from
symbols in the centre of the information display,
illuminate in key position II or when the engine is
started. When the engine has started, all the
symbols should go out except the parking brake
symbol, which only goes out when the brake is
disengaged.
Digital combined instrument panel overview
The combined instrument panel's information
display shows information on some of the car's
functions, as well as messages.
Information display
If the engine does not start or if the functionality
check is carried out in key position II then all
symbols go out within a few seconds except the
symbol for faults in the car's emissions system
and the symbol for low oil pressure.
Related information
•
•
Indicator and warning symbols, analogue instrument
panel.
Indicator symbols
Indicator and warning symbols
Warning
2
3
4
symbols4
Combined instrument panel (p. 66)
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 71)
•
Combined instrument cluster - meaning of
warning symbols (p. 73)
•
Digital combined instrument panel - overview
(p. 67)
Information display, digital instrument panel*.
There are further descriptions under the functions that use the display.
Gauges and indicators
Various themes can be selected for the digital
combined instrument panel. Possible themes are
"Elegance", "Eco" and "Performance".
Manual gearbox.
Automatic gearbox.
Certain engine variants do not have systems to warn of oil pressure loss. In cars with these variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warning for low oil level is via display text. For more information, see
Engine oil - general (p. 342).
* Option/accessory.
}}
67
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
A theme can only be selected when the engine is
running.
Theme "Elegance"
Theme "Eco"
Gauges and indicators, theme "Elegance".
Gauges and indicators, theme "Eco".
To select the theme, press the left-hand stalk
switch's OK button and select the Themes
menu option by turning the thumbwheel on the
lever. Press the OK button. Turn the thumbwheel
to select the theme and confirm the selection by
pressing the OK button.
On certain model variants, the appearance of the
centre console's screen follows the theme
selected for the combined instrument panel.
The contrast mode and colour mode for the
instrument can also be set using the left-hand
stalk switch.
For more information on menu navigation, see
Menu navigation - combined instrument panel
(p. 110).
The choice of theme and setting of contrast
mode and colour mode can be stored for each
remote control key in the car key memory*, see
Remote control key - personalisation* (p. 161).
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking5, the yellow indicator
symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illuminated. See also Trip computer (p. 114) and
Filling up with fuel (p. 296).
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking5, the yellow indicator
symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illuminated. See also Trip computer (p. 114) and
Filling up with fuel (p. 296).
Temperature gauge for engine coolant
Eco guide. See also Eco guide & Power
guide* (p. 70).
Speedometer
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per minute
(rpm).
Gear shift indicator6 / Gear position indicator7. See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 274)
or Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 274).
5
6
7
68
Speedometer
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per minute
(rpm).
When the display's message Distance to empty fuel tank: starts to show ----, the marking becomes red.
Manual gearbox.
Automatic gearbox.
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Gear shift indicator6 / Gear position indicator7. See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 274)
or Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 274).
Theme "Performance"
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per minute
(rpm).
Power guide. See also Eco guide & Power
guide* (p. 70).
Gear shift indicator6 / Gear position indicator7. See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 274)
or Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 274).
Indicator and warning symbols
Functionality check
All indicator and warning symbols, apart from
symbols in the centre of the information display,
illuminate in key position II or when the engine is
started. When the engine has started, all the
symbols should go out except the parking brake
symbol, which only goes out when the brake is
disengaged.
If the engine does not start or if the functionality
check is carried out in key position II then all
symbols go out within a few seconds except the
symbol for faults in the car's emissions system
and the symbol for low oil pressure.
Related information
•
•
Gauges and indicators, theme "Performance".
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking5, the yellow indicator
symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illuminated. See also Trip computer (p. 114) and
Filling up with fuel (p. 296).
Temperature gauge for engine coolant
Speedometer
Indicator and warning symbols, digital instrument panel.
Combined instrument panel (p. 66)
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 71)
•
Combined instrument cluster - meaning of
warning symbols (p. 73)
•
Analogue combined instrument panel - overview (p. 66)
Indicator symbols
Indicator and warning symbols
Warning symbols8
6
7
5
8
Manual gearbox.
Automatic gearbox.
When the display's message Distance to empty fuel tank: starts to show ----, the marking becomes red.
Certain engine variants do not have systems to warn of oil pressure loss. In cars with these variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warning for low oil level is via display text. For more information, see
Engine oil - general (p. 342).
* Option/accessory.
69
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Eco guide & Power guide*
Instantaneous value
Eco guide and Power guide are two combined
instrument panel (p. 66) instruments which help
the driver to drive the car with optimum driving
economy.
Average value
The car also stores statistics of journeys made,
which can be viewed in the form of a block diagram; see Trip computer - trip statistics*
(p. 123).
Eco guide
This instrument provides an indication of how
economically the car is being driven.
To view this function, select the theme "Eco"; see
Digital combined instrument panel - overview
(p. 67).
To view this function, select the theme
"Performance"; see Digital combined instrument
panel - overview (p. 67).
Instantaneous value
The instantaneous value is shown here - the
higher the reading on the scale, the better.
The instantaneous value is calculated based on
speed, engine speed, engine power utilised plus
use of the foot brake.
Optimum speed (50-80 km/h (30-50 mph)) and
low engine speeds are encouraged. The pointers
fall during acceleration and braking.
Very low instantaneous values illuminate the red
zone on the meter (with a short delay), which
means poor driving economy and hence should
be avoided.
Average value
The average value slowly follows the instantaneous value and describes how the car has been
driven most recently. The higher the pointers on
the scale, the better the economy achieved by
the driver.
Power guide
This instrument shows the relationship between
how much power (Power) is being taken from the
engine and how much power is available.
Available engine power
Engine power utilised
Available engine power
The smaller, upper pointer shows the available
engine power9. The higher the reading on the
scale, the more power is available in the current
gear.
Engine power utilised
The larger, lower pointer shows the engine power
utilised9. The higher the reading on the scale, the
more power is being taken from the engine.
A large gap between the two pointers indicates a
large power reserve.
9
70
Power is dependent on engine speed.
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Combined instrument panel meaning of indicator symbols
The indicator symbols alert the driver that a function is activated, that the system is operating, or
that an error or failure has occurred.
Indicator symbols
Symbol
Symbol
Specification
Main beam On
Left-hand direction indicator
Right-hand direction indicator
Specification
ABL fault
Eco- function on, see Drive mode
ECO* (p. 287)
Emissions system
ABS fault
Start/Stop, the engine auto-stopped; see Start/Stop* - function and
operation (p. 279)
Rear fog lamp on
Tyre pressure system , see Tyre
monitoring (TM)* (p. 326)
Stability system, see Electronic stability control (ESC) - general
(p. 186)
ABL fault
The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in the
ABL function (Active Bending Lights).
Stability system, sport mode, see
Electronic stability control (ESC) operation (p. 188)
Emissions system
If the symbol illuminates after the engine has
been started then it may be due to a fault in the
car's emissions system. Drive to a workshop for
checking. Volvo recommends that you seek
assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Engine preheater (diesel)
Low level in fuel tank
Information, read display text
ABS fault
If this symbol illuminates then the system is not
working. The car's regular brake system continues to work, but without the ABS function.
1.
Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
2.
Restart the engine.
3.
If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to a
workshop to have the ABS system checked.
Volvo recommends that you seek assistance
from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Rear fog lamp on
This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp is
switched on. There is only one rear fog lamp - it
is located on the driver's side.
Stability system
A flashing symbol indicates that the stability system is operating. If the symbol illuminates with
constant glow then there is a fault in the system.
Stability system, sport mode
The symbol illuminates when the sport mode is
activated. Sport mode allows for a more active
driving experience. The system then detects
whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel
movements and cornering are more active than in
normal driving and then allows controlled skidding of the rear section up to a certain level
before it intervenes and stabilises the car.
Engine preheater (diesel)
This symbol illuminates during engine preheating.
Preheating mostly takes place due to low temperature.
}}
* Option/accessory.
71
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
Low level in fuel tank
When the symbol illuminates the level in the fuel
tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.
Start/Stop
The symbol shines when the engine is auto-stopped.
Information, read display text
When one of the car's systems does not behave
as intended, this information symbol illuminates
and a text appears on the information display.
The message text is cleared with the OK button,
see Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel (p. 110), or it disappears automatically
after a time (time depending on which function is
indicated). The information symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.
Tyre pressure system
The symbol illuminates in the event of low tyre
pressure, or if a fault arises in the tyre pressure
system.
NOTE
When a service message is shown, the symbol and message are cleared using the OK
button, or disappear automatically after a
time.
Main beam On
The symbol illuminates when main beam is on
and with main beam flash.
Left/right-hand direction indicator
Both direction indicator symbols flash when the
hazard warning flashers are used.
Eco function on
This symbol illuminates when the Eco function is
activated.
10
72
Reminder – doors not closed
If one of the doors is not closed properly then the
information or warning symbol illuminates
together with an explanatory image in the information display. Stop the car in a safe place as
soon as possible and close the door that is open.
Related information
•
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 66)
Combined instrument cluster - meaning of
warning symbols (p. 73)
•
Analogue combined instrument panel - overview (p. 66)
•
Digital combined instrument panel - overview
(p. 67)
If the car is driven at a speed lower than
approx. 7 km/h (approx. 4 mph) then the
information symbol illuminates.
If the car is driven at a speed higher than
approx. 7 km/h (approx. 4 mph) then the
warning symbol illuminates.
If the bonnet10 is not closed properly then the
warning symbol illuminates together with an
explanatory image in the information display. Stop
the car in a safe place as soon as possible and
close the bonnet.
If the tailgate is not closed properly then the
information symbol illuminates together with an
explanatory image in the information display. Stop
the car in a safe place as soon as possible and
close the tailgate.
Only cars with alarm*.
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Combined instrument cluster meaning of warning symbols
The warning symbols alert the driver that an
important function is activated, or that a serious
error or a serious failure has occurred.
Warning symbols
Symbol
Specification
Low oil pressureA
Parking brake applied, digital
instrument panel
Parking brake applied, analogue
instrument panel
Airbags – SRS
Seatbelt reminder
Alternator not charging
Fault in brake system
Warning
A
Certain engine variants do not have systems to warn of oil pressure loss. In cars with these variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warning for low oil level is via display text. For
more information, see Engine oil - general (p. 342).
Low oil pressure
If this symbol illuminates during driving then the
engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the engine
immediately and check the engine oil level, top
up if necessary. If the symbol illuminates and the
oil level is normal, contact a workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Parking brake applied
This symbol illuminates with a constant glow
when the parking brake is applied. The symbol is
illuminated during application. For more information, see Parking brake (p. 291).
Airbags – SRS
If the symbol remains illuminated or illuminates
while driving, a fault has been detected in one of
the car's safety systems. Drive to a workshop for
checking as soon as possible. Volvo recommends
that you seek assistance from an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Seatbelt reminder
This symbol flashes if someone in a front seat
has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in a
rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.
Fault in brake system
If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level
may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place and
check the level in the brake fluid reservoir; see
Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 346).
If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at the
same time, there may be a fault in the brake
force distribution system.
1.
Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
2.
Restart the engine.
•
If both symbols extinguish, continue driving.
•
If the symbols remain illuminated, check
the level in the brake fluid reservoir; see
Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 346). If
the brake fluid level is normal but the
symbols are still illuminated, the car can
be driven, with great care, to a workshop
to have the brake system checked. Volvo
recommends that you seek assistance
from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Alternator not charging
This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault
has occurred in the electrical system. Visit a
workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek
assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
}}
73
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
WARNING
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid.
The loss of brake fluid must be investigated
by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you
contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Read the information on the information display. Implement the action in accordance
with the message in the display. Clear the
message using the OK button.
Reminder – doors not closed
If one of the doors is not closed properly then the
information or warning symbol illuminates
together with an explanatory image in the information display. Stop the car in a safe place as
soon as possible and close the door that is open.
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the
same time, there is a risk that the rear end will
skid during heavy braking.
If the car is driven at a speed lower than
approx. 7 km/h (approx. 4 mph) then the
information symbol illuminates.
Warning
The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault
has been indicated which could affect the safety
and/or driveability of the car. An explanatory text
is shown on the information display at the same
time. The symbol remains visible until the fault
has been rectified but the text message can be
cleared with the OK button; see Menu navigation
- combined instrument panel (p. 110). The warning symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with
other symbols.
If the car is driven at a speed higher than
approx. 7 km/h (approx. 4 mph) then the
warning symbol illuminates.
Action:
1.
11
74
2.
Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car further.
Related information
•
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 66)
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 71)
•
Analogue combined instrument panel - overview (p. 66)
•
Digital combined instrument panel - overview
(p. 67)
If the bonnet11 is not closed properly then the
warning symbol illuminates together with an
explanatory image in the information display. Stop
the car in a safe place as soon as possible and
close the bonnet.
If the tailgate is not closed properly then the
information symbol illuminates together with an
explanatory image in the information display. Stop
the car in a safe place as soon as possible and
close the tailgate.
Only cars with alarm*.
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Outside temperature gauge
Trip meter
Clock
The display for the outside temperature gauge
appears in the combined instrument panel.
The trip meter display appears in the combined
instrument panel.
The clock display appears in the combined
instrument panel.
Trip meter, digital instrument.
Clock, digital instrument panel.
Display for outside temperature gauge, digital instrument panel
Display for outside temperature gauge, analogue instrument panel
When the temperature lies between +2 °C to -5
°C a snowflake symbol illuminates in the display.
This warns of icy roads. If the car has been stationary, the gauge may display a reading that is
too high.
Related information
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 66)
Display for showing the time13
Display for trip meter12
The two trip meters T1 and T2 are used for
measuring short distances. The distance is
shown in the display.
Turn the left stalk switch thumbwheel to show
the required meter.
A long press (until the change occurs) on the
left-hand stalk switch's RESET button resets the
trip meter shown. For more information, see Trip
computer (p. 114).
Set the clock
The clock can be adjusted in the menu system
MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).
Related information
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 66)
Related information
•
12
Combined instrument panel (p. 66)
Display appearance may differ depending on instrument variant.
75
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Combined instrument panel license agreement
A license is an agreement for the right to operate a certain activity or the right to use someone
else's entitlement according to the terms and
conditions in the agreement. The following text is
Volvo's agreement with the manufacturer/developer.
Combined Instrument Panel Software
Open Source Software Notice
This product uses certain free / open source and
other software originating from third parties, that
is subject to the GNU Lesser General Public
License version 2 (LGPLv2), The FreeType
Project License ("FreeType License") and other
different and/or additional copy right licenses,
disclaimers and notices. The links to access the
exact terms of LGPLv2, and the other open
source software licenses, disclaimers,
acknowledgements and notices are provided to
you below. Please refer to the exact terms of the
relevant License, regarding your rights under said
licenses. Volvo Car Corporation (VCC) offers to
provide the source code of said free/open source
software to you for a charge covering the cost of
performing such distribution, such as the cost of
media, shipping and handling, upon written
request. Please contact your nearest Volvo
Dealer.
13
76
The offer is valid for a period of at least three (3)
years from the date of the distribution of this
product by VCC / or for as long as VCC offers
spare parts or customer support.
Portions of this product uses software
copyrighted © 2007 The FreeType Project
(www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
Portions of this product uses software with
Copyright © 1994–2013 Lua.org, PUC-Rio
(http://www.lua.org/)
This product includes software under
following licenses:
LGPL v2.1: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/oldlicenses/lgpl-2.1.html
•
•
GNU FriBidi
DevIL
The FreeType Project License: http://
git.savannah.gnu.org/cgit/freetype/freetype2.git/
tree/docs/FTL.TXT
•
FreeType 2
The time is shown in the middle of the instrument panel when an analogue instrument panel is fitted.
MIT License: http://opensource.org/licenses/
mit-license.html
•
Lua
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Symbols in the display
Symbol
There are a variety of different symbols in the
display in the car. The symbols are divided into
warning, indicator and information symbols.
Shown below are the most common symbols with
their meanings and a reference to where in the
manual further information can be found.
- Red warning symbol, illuminates when a
fault has been indicated which could affect the
safety and/or driveability of the car. An explanatory text is shown on the information display in
the combined instrument panel at the same time.
- When one of the car's systems does not
behave as intended, this information symbol illuminates, and a text appears on the information
display in the combined instrument panel. The
yellow information symbol can also illuminate in
conjunction with other symbols.
Warning symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol
Specification
See
Low oil pressure
(p. 73)
Parking brake
applied, digital
instrument panel
(p. 73),
(p. 291)
Specification
See
Parking brake
applied, analogue
instrument panel
(p. 73)
Airbags – SRS
(p. 32),
(p. 73)
Seatbelt reminder
(p. 28),
(p. 73)
Alternator not charging
(p. 73)
Fault in brake system
(p. 73),
(p. 289)
Warning, safety
mode
(p. 32),
(p. 42),
(p. 73)
Control symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol
Specification
See
ABL fault*
(p. 71),
(p. 94)
Emissions system
(p. 71)
ABS fault
(p. 71),
(p. 289)
Symbol
Specification
See
Rear fog lamp on
(p. 71),
(p. 98)
Stability system,
ESC (Electronic
Stability Control),
Trailer stability
assist*
(p. 71),
(p. 189),
(p. 309)
Stability system,
sport mode
(p. 71),
(p. 189)
Engine preheater
(diesel)
(p. 71)
Low level in fuel
tank
(p. 71),
(p. 143)
Information, read
display text
(p. 71)
Main beam On
(p. 71),
(p. 91)
Left-hand direction
indicators
(p. 71)
Right-hand direction indicators
(p. 71)
Start/Stop*, engine
auto-stopped
(p. 71),
(p. 279)
}}
* Option/accessory.
77
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
Symbol
Specification
See
ECO function* on
Tyre pressure system*
Specification
See
(p. 71),
(p. 287)
Cruise control*
(p. 194)
(p. 71), Tyre
monitoring
(TM)*
(p. 326)
Speed limiter
(p. 191)
Radar sensor*
Information symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol
78
Specification
See
Main beam with auto
dimming - AHB*
(p. 92)
Camera sensor*,
Laser sensor*
(p. 92),
(p. 227),
(p. 236),
(p. 249),
(p. 254)
Adaptive cruise control*
(p. 214)
Adaptive cruise control*
(p. 206),
(p. 214)
Adaptive cruise control*, Distance Warning* (Distance Alert)
(p. 214),
(p. 199)
Adaptive cruise control*
(p. 205)
Symbol
Specification
See
Engine block heater
and passenger compartment heater*
Service required
(p. 143)
(p. 214),
(p. 202),
(p. 236)
Activated timer*
(p. 143)
Start/Stop*
(p. 285)
Activated timer*
(p. 143)
Start/Stop*
(p. 285)
ABL system*
(p. 94)
Start/Stop*
(p. 285)
Low battery
(p. 143)
Park Assist Pilot PAP*
(p. 263)
Rain sensor*
(p. 102)
Lane assistance*
(p. 252)
Driver Alert System*,
Lane assistance*
(p. 254)
Distance warning*
(Distance Alert), City
SafetyTM, Collision
warning system*,
Auto-brake*
(p. 202),
(p. 227),
(p. 236)
Engine block and
passenger compartment heater*
(p. 143)
Symbol
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Symbol
Specification
See
Driver Alert System*,
Lane assistance*
(p. 249),
(p. 254)
Driver Alert System*,
Time for a break
Driver Alert System*,
Time for a break
Information symbols in the roof console
display
Symbol
Specification
See
Seatbelt reminder
(p. 31)
Airbag, passenger seat,
activated
(p. 36)
Airbag, passenger seat,
deactivated
(p. 36)
(p. 248)
(p. 249)
Gear shift indicator
(p. 274)
Gear positions
(p. 274)
Volvo Sensus
Volvo Sensus is the heart of the personal Volvo
experience and connects you with the car and
outside world. Sensus provides information,
entertainment and assistance when it is needed.
Sensus consists of intuitive functions that both
enhance the car journey and simplifies ownership of the car.
Related information
Recorded speed
information*
(p. 244)
Measuring the oil
level
(p. 343)
•
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 71)
•
Combined instrument cluster - meaning of
warning symbols (p. 73)
•
Messages - handling (p. 113)
An intuitive navigation structure makes it possible
to receive relevant support, information and
entertainment when it is necessary, without distracting the driver.
Sensus covers all the car's solutions that enable
connection* to the outside world and provides
you with intuitive control over all the car's capabilities.
Volvo Sensus combines and presents many functions in several of the car's systems on the centre
console's screen. With Volvo Sensus the car can
be personalised by means of an intuitive user
}}
* Option/accessory.
79
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
interface. Settings can be made in Car settings,
Audio and media, Climate control, etc.
Overview
Key positions
The remote control key can be used to set the
vehicle's electrical system in different modes/
levels so that different functions are available;
see Key positions - functions at different levels
(p. 81).
With the centre console buttons and controls or
the steering wheel's right-hand keypad* functions
can be activated or deactivated and many different settings can be made.
With a press on MY CAR all settings related to
the driving and control of the car are presented,
such as City Safety, locks and alarm, automatic
fan speed, setting the clock, etc.
With a press on the respective function RADIO,
*, NAV* and CAM14 other
MEDIA, TEL*,
sources, systems and functions can be activated,
e.g. AM, FM, CD, DVD*, TV*, Bluetooth®*, navigation* and park assist camera*.
For more information about all functions/
systems, see the relevant section in the owner's
manual or its supplement.
Control panel in centre console. The figure is schematic
- the number of functions and layout of the buttons both
vary, depending on the equipment selected and the market.
Navigation* - NAV, see separate supplement
(Sensus Navigation).
Audio and media - RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*, see
separate supplement (Sensus Infotainment).
Internet-connected car *, see separate
supplement (Sensus Infotainment).
Climate control system (p. 126).
Function settings - MY CAR, see MY CAR
(p. 113).
14
80
Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/
inserted.
NOTE
For cars with the keyless start and lock system* function the key does not need to be
inserted into the ignition switch but can be
stored in e.g. a pocket. For more information
on the keyless start and lock system, see
Keyless drive* (p. 169).
Applies to certain car models.
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Insert the key
1.
2.
Hold the end of the remote control key with
the detachable key blade and insert the key
in the ignition switch.
Then press the key in the lock up to its end
position.
IMPORTANT
Foreign objects in the ignition switch can
impair the function or destroy the lock.
Key positions - functions at different
levels
To enable the use of a limited number of functions with the engine switched off, the car's electrical system can be set in 3 different levels - 0, I
and II - with the remote control key. This owner's
manual describes these levels throughout using
the denomination "key positions".
The following table shows the functions available
in each key position/level.
Level
Functions
0
•
Odometer, clock and temperature
gauge are illuminated.
•
Electrically operated seats can be
adjusted.
•
The audio system can be used for
a limited time - see the Sensus
Infotainment supplement.
I
•
Sunroof, power windows, 12 V
socket in the passenger compartment, navigation, phone, ventilation
fan and windscreen wipers can be
used.
II
•
•
The headlamps come on.
•
Several other systems are activated. However, electric heating in
seat cushions and the rear window
can only be activated after starting
the engine.
Do not press in the remote control key incorrectly turned - Hold the end with the detachable key blade; see Detachable key blade detaching/attaching (p. 167).
Withdraw the key
Grip the remote control key and pull it out from
the ignition switch.
Warning/indicator lamps illuminate
for 5 seconds.
This key position consumes a lot of
current from the starter battery and
should therefore be avoided!
}}
81
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
Selecting key position/level
•
Key position 0 - Unlock the car - This
means that the car's electrical system is at
level 0.
NOTE
To reach level I or II without starting the
engine - do not depress the brake/clutch
pedal when these key positions are due to be
selected.
•
Key position I - With the remote control key
fully inserted into the ignition switch15 Briefly press START/STOP ENGINE.
•
Key position II - With the remote control
key fully inserted into the ignition switch15 Give a long16 press on START/STOP
ENGINE.
•
Back to key position 0 - To return to key
position 0 from position II and I - Briefly
press on START/STOP ENGINE.
Audio system
For information on audio system functions with
remote control key removed, see the Sensus
Infotainment supplement.
Starting and stopping the engine
Seats, front
For information about starting/switching off the
engine, see Starting the engine (p. 270).
The car's front seats have different setting
options for optimum seating comfort.
Towing
For important information about the remote control key during towing, see Towing (p. 310).
Related information
•
Key positions (p. 80)
To adjust lumbar support*, turn the wheel17.
Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust
the distance to the steering wheel and pedals. Check that the seat is locked after
adjusting position.
To raise/lower the front edge of seat cushion*, pump up/down.
Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.
Raise/lower the seat*, pump up/down.
Control panel for power seat*, see Seats,
front - electrically operated (p. 84).
15
16
17
82
Not required for cars with keyless start and lock system*.
Approx. 2 seconds.
Also applies to electrically operated seat.
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
WARNING
Lowering the passenger seat backrest*
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat before
setting off, never while driving. Make sure that
the seat is in locked position in order to avoid
personal injury in the event of heavy braking
or an accident.
Grasp the backrest and make sure that it is
properly locked after being folded up in order
to avoid personal injury in the event of sudden
braking or an accident.
Related information
Adjusting the front seat head restraints
•
•
Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 84)
Seats, rear (p. 85)
The passenger seat backrest can be folded forward to make room for long loads.
Move the seat as far back/down as possible.
Adjust the backrest to an upright position.
Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest
and fold it forward.
The height of the head restraints can be adjusted.
Adjust the head restraint based on the person's
height so that the whole of the back of the head
is covered if possible.
To adjust the height, the button (see illustration)
must be pressed while the restraint is moved up
or down.
The head restraint can be adjusted in three different positions.
4.
Push the seat forward so that the head
restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
WARNING
Do not use the seat behind the passenger
seat, or the rear centre seat, when the passenger seat's backrest is lowered.
* Option/accessory.
83
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Seats, front - electrically operated
The car's front seats have different setting
options for optimum seating comfort. The power
seat can be moved forward/backward and up/
down. The front edge of the seat cushion can be
raised/lowered. The backrest angle can be
changed.
Electrically operated seat*
key position I or 0 and wait a short time before
adjusting the seat again.
Store setting
Memory button
Only one movement (forward/back/up/down)
can be made at a time.
Memory button
Memory button
Preparations
The seat can be adjusted for a certain time after
unlocking the door with the remote control key
without the key in the ignition switch. Seat adjustment is normally made in key position I and can
always be made when the engine is running.
Seat with memory function*
Button for storing settings
1.
Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
2.
Press and hold button M while pressing button 1, 2 or 3 simultaneously. Hold the buttons depressed until the acoustic signal is
heard and the text is shown the combined
instrument panel.
The seat must be adjusted again before a new
memory can be set.
Using a stored setting
Press one of the memory buttons 1-3 until the
seat and the door mirrors stop. If the button is
released, the movement of the seat and door mirrors will be interrupted.
Front edge of seat cushion up/down
Raise/lower seat
Seat, forward/backward
Backrest rake
Key memory* in remote control key
The memory function stores settings for the seat
and the door mirrors.
The power seats have overload protection which
is tripped if a seat is blocked by an object. If this
should happen, set the car's electrical system in
18
84
All remote control keys can be used by different
drivers to store the settings for the driver's seat
and door mirrors18, see Remote control key - personalisation* (p. 161).
Only if the car is equipped with power seat with memory and retractable power door mirrors.
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Emergency stop
Seats, rear
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press one
of the setting buttons for the seat or memory
buttons in order to stop the seat.
The rear seat backrest and the outer seat head
restraints can be folded. The centre seat head
restraint can be adjusted to suit the height of the
passenger.
WARNING
Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do
not play with the controls. Check that there
are no objects in front of, behind or under the
seat during adjustment. Make sure that none
of the passengers in the rear seat is in danger
of becoming trapped.
Head restraint, centre seat, rear
WARNING
The centre seat head restraint must be in its
lowest position when the centre seat is not
used. When the centre seat is used, the head
restraint must be correctly adjusted to the
height of the passenger so that it covers the
whole of the back of the head if possible.
Manual lowering of the outer head
restraints, rear seat
Heated seats
For heated seats, see Heated front seats*
(p. 133) and Heated rear seat* (p. 133).
Related information
•
•
Seats, front (p. 82)
Seats, rear (p. 85)
Adjust the head restraint according to passenger
height so that the whole of the back of the head
is covered if possible. Slide it up as required.
To lower the head restraint again, the button (see
illustration) must be pressed while the restraint is
carefully moved down.
The head restraint can be adjusted in five different positions.
Pull the locking handle closest to the head
restraint to fold the head restraint forward.
The head restraint is moved back manually.
WARNING
The head restraint must be in locked position
after being folded up.
}}
* Option/accessory.
85
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
Lowering the rear seat backrest
NOTE
When the backrest has been raised, the red
indicator should no longer be showing. If it is
still showing then the backrest is not locked
in place.
IMPORTANT
When the backrest is to be folded, the rear
seat cup holder must not be open and there
must be no objects in the rear seat. Nor may
the seat belts be connected. Otherwise there
is a risk of damage to the rear seat upholstery.
NOTE
The front seats may need to be pushed forwards, and/or the backrests adjusted
upwards, in order that the rear backrests can
be fully folded forward.
•
•
Both sections can be folded separately.
If the entire backrest is to be folded then the
different sections should be folded separately.
WARNING
If the right-hand section is being lowered release and adjust head restraint for the centre seat, see the earlier section "Head
restraint, centre seat, rear".
The outer head restraints are lowered automatically when the backrests are lowered.
Pull up the backrest's locking handle
while folding the backrest forward at the
same time. A red indicator on the lock catch
shows that the backrest is no longer
locked in place.
NOTE
When the backrests have been lowered the
head restraints must be moved forward
slightly so as not to make contact with the
seat cushion.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
86
Check that the backrests and head restraints
in the rear seat are locked properly after
being folded up.
Related information
•
•
Seats, front (p. 82)
Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 84)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Steering wheel
The steering wheel can be adjusted in different
positions and has controls for horn and cruise
control, as well as menu, audio and phone control.
Adjusting
3.
Pull the lever back to fix the steering wheel
in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering
wheel lightly at the same time as you push
the lever back.
Keypads* and paddles*
WARNING
Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before
driving away. The steering wheel must never
be adjusted while driving.
With speed related power steering* the level of
steering force can be adjusted, see Adjustable
steering force* (p. 186).
Keypads and paddles in the steering wheel.
Cruise control* (p. 194)* and Adaptive cruise
control (ACC)* (p. 203)*.
Adjusting the steering wheel.
Lever - releasing the steering wheel
Possible steering wheel positions
Paddle for manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox, see Automatic gearbox Geartronic* (p. 274).
Audio and phone control, see supplement,
Sensus Infotainment.
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both
height and depth:
1.
Push the lever forwards to release the steering wheel.
2.
Adjust the steering wheel to the position that
suits you.
}}
* Option/accessory.
87
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
Horn
Light switches
The headlamp control activates and adjusts the
external lighting. It is also used to adjust display
and instrument lighting and ambience lights
(p. 100).
Knob positions
Position
Specification
Daytime running lightsA when the
car's electrical system is in key
position II or the engine is running.
Main beam flash can be used.
Daytime running lights, side marker
lamps rear and position lamps
when the car's electrical system is
in key position II or the engine is
running.
Horn.
Side marker lamps rear and position lamps when the car is parkedB.
Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal.
Main beam flash can be used.
Overview, light switches.
Thumbwheel for adjusting display and instrument lighting as well as ambience lights*
Button for rear fog lamp
Knob for lighting while driving and parking
Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling
A car with LED19 headlamps* has automatic
headlamp levelling and therefore does not have
the thumbwheel for headlamp levelling.
19
88
Daytime running lights, side marker
lamps rear and position lamps in
daylight when the car's electrical
system is in key position II or the
engine is running.
Dipped beam, side marker lamps
rear and position lamps in weak
daylight or darkness, or when rear
fog lamps are activated.
The tunnel detection (p. 91)*
function is activated.
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Position
Specification
The Active main beam (p. 92)*
function can be used.
Main beam can be activated when
dipped beam is switched on.
Main beam flash can be used.
The display lighting is automatically subdued in
darkness - the sensitivity is set with the thumbwheel.
Dipped beam, side marker lamps
rear and position lamps.
The intensity of the instrument lighting is
adjusted with the thumbwheel.
Main beam can be activated.
Headlamp levelling
The load in the car changes the vertical alignment of the headlamp beam, which could dazzle
oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting the
height of the beam. Lower the beam if the car is
heavily laden.
Main beam flash can be used.
A
B
Display and instrument lighting
Different display and instrument lighting is
switched on depending on key position; see Key
positions - functions at different levels (p. 81).
Fitted in or under the front bumper.
Also at idle when the engine is running, provided that the knob
is moved to this position from another position.
Volvo recommends that
when the car is driven.
mode is used
WARNING
The car's audio system is not able to determine when daylight is too weak or sufficiently
strong, e.g. in fog and rain, in all situations.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the car is driven with a beam pattern suitable for the traffic situation and in accordance
with applicable traffic regulations.
1.
Leave the engine running, or have the car's
electrical system in key position I.
2.
Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/lower
beam alignment.
Thumbwheel positions for different load cases.
Only driver
Driver and passenger in the front passenger
seat
Occupants in all seats
Occupants in all seats and maximum load in
the cargo area
Driver and maximum load in the cargo area
Related information
•
•
•
Position lamps (p. 90)
Daytime running lights (p. 90)
Main/dipped beam (p. 91)
* Option/accessory.
89
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Position lamps
Position lamps are switched on using the headlamp control's knob.
running lights are switched on and Reset light
switch position is shown in the combined
instrument panel, which prompts you to turn to a
.
mode other than
Related information
•
Light switches (p. 88)
Daytime running lights
With the knob for headlamp control in
position, and the car's electrical system in key
position II or the engine running, the daytime
running lights are activated automatically in daylight.
Daytime running lights during the day.
DRL
Knob for headlamp control in the position for position
lamps.
Turn the knob to the position for
(number
plate lighting is switched on at the same time).
If the car's electrical system is in key position II or
the engine is running then the daytime running
lights also switch on.
When it is dark outside and the tailgate is
opened the rear position lamps illuminate to alert
traffic behind. This takes place irrespective of
what position the knob is in or what key position
the car's electrical system is in.
When driving for more than 30 seconds at max.
10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), or if the speed
exceeds 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), the daytime
90
Knob for headlamp control in AUTO position.
With the knob for headlamp control in
position the daytime running lights (Daytime
Running Lights - DRL) are activated automatically when the car is driven in daylight. A light
sensor on the top of the instrument panel
changes from daytime running lights to dipped
beam at twilight or when daylight becomes too
weak. Switching to dipped beam also takes place
when the rear fog lamps are activated.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
WARNING
This system help to save energy - it cannot
determine in all situations when daylight is too
weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and
rain.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the car is driven with the correct beam
pattern for the traffic situation and in accordance with applicable traffic regulations.
Related information
•
•
Main/dipped beam (p. 91)
Light switches (p. 88)
Tunnel detection*
Main/dipped beam
Tunnel detection changes the lighting from daytime running lights to dipped beam when the car
is driven into a tunnel.
With the knob for headlamp control in position
and the car's electrical system in key position II or the engine running, the dipped beam is
activated automatically in poor light conditions.
The tunnel detection function is available in cars
with rain sensor*. The sensor detects the
entrance to a tunnel and resets the lighting from
daytime running lights to dipped beam. Approx.
20 seconds after the car has left the tunnel, the
lighting returns to daytime running lights. If the
car is driven into another tunnel within this time
period then dipped beam is kept switched on.
This prevents frequent changes to the car's beam
pattern.
Note that the headlamp control's knob must
remain in
position for tunnel detection to
work.
Related information
•
•
Main/dipped beam (p. 91)
Light switches (p. 88)
Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control.
Position for main beam flash
Position for main beam
Dipped beam
With the knob in
position, dipped beam is
activated automatically at dusk or when daylight
becomes too weak. Dipped beam is also activated automatically if the rear fog lamp is activated.
position, dipped beam is
With the knob in
always switched on when the engine is running
or when key position II is active.
* Option/accessory.
}}
91
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
Main beam flash
Move the stalk switch gently towards the steering
wheel to the position for main beam flash. Main
beam comes on until the stalk switch is released.
Main beam
Main beam can be activated when the knob is in
20 or
position
. Activate/deactivate
main beam by moving the stalk switch towards
the steering wheel to the end position and then
releasing. Alternatively, the main beam can be
deactivated by a light press of the stalk switch
toward the steering wheel.
When main beam has been activated the
symbol illuminates in the combined instrument
panel.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
20
92
Active bending lights* (p. 94)
Active main beam* (p. 92)
Light switches (p. 88)
Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern
(p. 95)
Tunnel detection* (p. 91)
Active main beam*
Active main beam function detects the headlamp
beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights of
vehicles in front, and switches the lighting from
main beam to dipped beam. The lighting returns
to main beam when the incoming light has stopped.
Active main beam - AHB
Active main beam (Active High Beam - AHB) is a
function which uses a camera sensor at the top
edge of the windscreen to detect the headlamp
beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights of
vehicles in front, and then switches from main
beam to dipped beam. The function can also take
streetlights into account.
The lighting returns to main beam about a second after the camera sensor no longer detects
the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the
rear lights from vehicles in front.
Activating/deactivating
AHB can be activated when the headlamp control's knob is in position
(provided that the
function has not been deactivated in the menu
system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113)).
Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control in AUTO
position.
The function can start while driving in the dark
when the car's speed is approx. 20 km/h
(12 mph) or higher.
Activate/deactivate AHB by moving the left-hand
stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the
end position and then releasing. Deactivation
when main beam is on means that the lights are
reset directly to dipped beam.
Car with analogue combined instrument
panel
When AHB is activated the
symbol illuminates in the instrument's information display.
When dipped beam is activated.
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
When main beam has been switched on the
symbol also illuminates in the combined
instrument panel.
Car with digital combined instrument panel
When AHB is activated the
symbol turns
white in the instrument's information display.
When main beam is activated, the symbol shines
blue.
Manual operation
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and
dirt.
symbol are shown. The
symbol goes out
when these messages are shown.
IMPORTANT
Examples of when manual switching between
main and dipped beam may be required:
AHB may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in situations with dense fog or heavy rain. When AHB
becomes available again, or the windscreen sensors are no longer blocked, the message goes
out and the
symbol illuminates.
WARNING
AHB is an aid for using the optimum beam
pattern when conditions are favourable.
The driver always bears responsibility for manually switching between main and dipped
beam when traffic situations or weather conditions so require.
Do not stick or attach anything to the windscreen in front of the camera sensor as this
may reduce effectiveness or cause one or
more of the systems dependent on the camera to stop working.
If the message Active main beam Temporary
unavailable Switch manually is shown in the
combined instrument panel's information display
then you have to switch manually between main
and dipped beam. However, the knob for headlamp control can still remain in position
.
The same applies if the message Windscreen
sensors blocked See manual and the
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
In heavy rain or dense fog
•
If there are highly reflective objects such
as signs in the vicinity of the road
•
When the lighting from oncoming traffic
is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier
•
•
•
When there is traffic on connecting roads
In freezing rain
In snow flurries or slush
In moonlight
When driving in poorly lit built-up areas
When the traffic ahead has weak lighting
If there are pedestrians on or beside the
road
On the brow of a hill or in a hollow
In sharp bends.
For more information on the limitations of the
camera sensor, see Collision warning system* camera sensor limitations (p. 235).
Related information
•
•
Main/dipped beam (p. 91)
Light switches (p. 88)
* Option/accessory.
93
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Active bending lights*
Active bending lights are designed to provide
maximum illumination in bends and junctions.
Cars with LED21 headlamps* can have active
bending lights, depending on the car's equipment level.
tivated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY
CAR (p. 113)). In the event of a fault in the funcsymbol illuminates in the comtion the
bined instrument panel at the same time as the
information display shows an explanatory text and
a further illuminated symbol.
Symbol
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and
activated (right) respectively.
The LED headlamps can include the Active bending lights function, depending on the car's equipment level. Active bending lights follow steering
wheel movements to provide maximum illumination in bends and junctions and thereby increase
safety.
The function is activated automatically when the
car is started (provided that it has not been deac21
22
94
Message
Specification
Headlamp
system
malfunction
Service
required
The system is disengaged. Visit a
workshop if the
message remains.
Volvo recommends
that you contact an
authorised Volvo
workshop.
The function is only active in twilight or darkness
and only when the car is moving.
The function22 can be deactivated/activated in
the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR
(p. 113).
Related information
•
•
•
Main/dipped beam (p. 91)
Active main beam* (p. 92)
Light switches (p. 88)
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
Activated on delivery from the factory.
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Headlamps - adjusting headlamp
pattern
The halogen headlamp pattern must be adjusted
to avoid dazzling oncoming motorists and can
be set for right or left-hand traffic.
3.
Start from the design lines on the headlamp
lenses; see the lines in the following figure.
Position the self-adhesive templates at the
design lines with the help of the illustration.
LED headlamps*
The light pattern does not need to be adjusted.
The headlamp pattern is designed in such a way
that oncoming traffic is not dazzled.
Halogen headlamps
The headlamp pattern for halogen headlamps is
readjusted by masking the headlamp lens. The
headlamp pattern may not be as good.
Masking the headlamps
1. Copy the A and B templates for left-hand
drive cars or the C and D templates for righthand drive cars, see later section "Templates
for halogen headlamps". The templates have
a scale of 1:2. Use a photocopier with a
zoom function for example, and copy the
templates at 200 %:
2.
•
•
•
A = LHD Right (left-hand drive, right lens)
•
D = RHD Left (right-hand drive, left lens)
B = LHD Left (left-hand drive, left lens)
C = RHD Right (right-hand drive, right
lens)
Transfer the template to a self-adhesive
waterproof material and cut it out.
}}
* Option/accessory.
95
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
Upper row: left-hand drive cars, templates A and B. Lower row: right-hand drive cars, templates C and D.
96
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Templates for halogen headlamps
97
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Rear fog lamp
When visibility is reduced by fog the rear fog
lamp can be used so that other road users can
detect the vehicle in front at an early stage.
The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically
when the START/STOP ENGINE button is
depressed or when the headlamp control's knob
or
.
is turned to position
NOTE
Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps vary
from country to country.
Related information
•
Button for rear fog lamp.
The rear fog lamp consists of a lamp on the lefthand side in a left-hand drive car, or on the righthand side in a right-hand drive car.
The rear fog lamp can only be switched on when
key position II is active or the engine is running
and the headlamp control's knob is in position
or
.
Press the button for On/Off. The indicator symbol
in the combined instrument panel and
the light in the button both illuminate when the
rear fog lamp is switched on.
98
Light switches (p. 88)
Brake lights
The brake light automatically comes on during
braking.
The brake light is switched on when the brake
pedal is depressed. In addition, it is switched on
when one of driving support systems Adaptive
cruise control (p. 203), City Safety (p. 221) or
Collision warning system (p. 228) brakes the car.
Related information
•
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 290)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Hazard warning flashers
The hazard warning flashers warn other road
users by means of all of the car's direction indicator lamps flashing simultaneously when this
function is activated.
Related information
•
•
direction indicators (p. 99)
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 290)
direction indicators
The car's direction indicators are operated with
the left-hand stalk switch. The direction indicator
lamps flash three times or continuously, depending on how far up or down the stalk switch is
moved.
Button for hazard warning flashers.
Press the button to activate the hazard warning
flashers. Both direction indicator symbols in the
combined instrument panel flash when the hazard warning flashers are used.
The hazard warning flashers are activated automatically when the car has been braked so suddenly that the emergency brake lights have been
activated and speed is below approx. 10 km/h
(6 mph). The hazard warning flashers remain
active when the car has stopped and are deactivated automatically when you start driving again;
they can also be deactivated by pressing the button.
Direction indicators.
Short flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the first
position and release. The direction indicator
lamps flash three times. The function can be
activated/deactivated in the menu system
MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).
Continuous flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to its end
position.
}}
99
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
The stalk switch remains in its position and is
moved back manually, or automatically by the
steering wheel movement.
Direction indicator symbols
Interior lighting
•
The passenger compartment lighting is activated/deactivated with the buttons in the controls above the front seats and the rear seat.
the engine has been switched off and the
car's electrical system is in key position 0
•
the car has been unlocked but the engine
has not been started.
For direction indicator symbols, see Combined
instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols
(p. 71).
Front reading lamps*
The reading lamps are switched on or off by
briefly pressing the relevant button in the roof
console.
Related information
•
Hazard warning flashers (p. 99)
Brightness is adjusted by holding the button
pressed in.
Rear reading lamps*
Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and
passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Passenger compartment lighting (floor
lamps* and ceiling lamps) - On/Off
Auto function for passenger compartment
lighting
Reading lamp, right-hand side
All lighting in the passenger compartment can be
switched on and off manually within 30 minutes
from when:
100
Rear reading lamps.
The lamps are switched on or off by briefly pressing the relevant button.
Brightness is adjusted by holding the button
pressed in.
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Floor lighting as ambient light*
To make the interior brighter while driving the
floor lighting can be activated at dimmed level.
The passenger compartment lighting is switched
on and remains on for 30 seconds if:
•
the car is unlocked with the remote control
key or key blade, see Remote control key functions (p. 164) or Detachable key blade unlocking doors (p. 168)
•
the engine has been switched off and the
car's electrical system is in key position 0.
Floor lamp intensity can be changed in the menu
system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).
Lighting in the front door storage
compartments*
Lighting in the front door storage compartments
comes on when the engine starts.
Glovebox lighting
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
Vanity mirror lighting
The lighting for the vanity mirror (p. 151) is
switched on and off respectively when the cover
is opened or closed.
Lighting in the cargo area
The lighting in the cargo area is switched on and
off respectively when the tailgate is opened or
closed.
Auto function for passenger
compartment lighting
The auto function is activated when the lamp in
the AUTO button is lit.
The passenger compartment lighting is then
switched on and off as indicated below.
switched off. The intensity and colour of the light
can be changed in the menu system MY CAR,
see MY CAR (p. 113).
Passenger compartment lighting is switched off
when:
•
•
the engine is started
the car is locked.
The passenger compartment lighting is switched
on and off respectively when a side door is
opened or closed.
It remains switched on for two minutes if one of
the doors is open.
If any lighting is switched on manually and the
car is locked then it will be switched off automatically after two minutes.
Ambience lights*
When the normal passenger compartment lighting is switched off and the engine is running, an
LED illuminates in the front and rear roof console
respectively in order to provide a low light and
enhance the ambience while driving. The light
also makes it easier during dark periods of the
day to see objects in storage compartments, etc.
This lighting switches off when the engine is
* Option/accessory. 101
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Home safe lighting
Approach light duration
Wipers and washers
Home safe lighting consists of dipped beam,
position lamps, lamps in the outside handles and
number plate lighting.
Approach lighting consists of position lamps,
lamps in the door mirrors, number plate lighting,
interior roof lighting as well as floor lighting.
Wipers and washers clean the windscreen and
rear window. The headlamps are cleaned with
high-pressure washing.
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
switched on to work as home safe lighting after
the car has been locked.
Approach lighting is switched on with the remote
control key, see Remote control key - functions
(p. 164), and is used to switch on the car's lighting at a distance.
Windscreen wipers23
1.
Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch.
2.
Move the left-hand stalk switch toward the
steering wheel to the end position and
release it. The function can be activated in
the same way as with main beam flash; see
Main/dipped beam (p. 91).
3.
Get out of the car and lock the door.
When the function is activated, dipped beam,
position lamps, lamps in the outside handles and
number plate lighting are switched on.
The length of time for which the home safe lighting should be kept on can be set in the menu
system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).
When the function is activated with the remote
control key, position lamps, lamps in the outside
handles, number plate lighting, interior roof lighting and floor lighting are switched on.
The length of time for which the approach lighting should be kept on can be set in the menu
system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).
Related information
•
Home safe lighting (p. 102)
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers.
Rain sensor, On/Off
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
Windscreen wipers off
Move the stalk switch to position 0 to
switch off the windscreen wipers.
Related information
•
Approach light duration (p. 102)
Single sweep
Raise the stalk switch and release to
make one sweep.
23
102
For replacing the wiper blades and service position wiper blades, see Wiper blades (p. 355). For filling washer fluid, see Washer fluid - filling (p. 357).
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Intermittent wiping
Set the number of sweeps per time
unit with the thumbwheel when intermittent wiping is selected.
Continuous wiping
The wipers sweep at normal speed.
The wipers sweep at high speed.
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers - ensure that the
wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any
snow or ice on the windscreen (and rear window) is scraped away.
IMPORTANT
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen
must be wet when the windscreen wipers are
operating.
Service position wiper blade
For cleaning the windscreen/wiper blades and
replacement of wiper blades, see Car wash
(p. 372) and Wiper blades (p. 355).
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor automatically starts the windscreen wipers based on how much water it
detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of the
rain sensor can be adjusted using the thumbwheel.
When the rain sensor is activated a lamp in the
button is illuminated and the rain sensor symbol
is shown in the combined instrument
panel.
Activating and setting the sensitivity
When activating the rain sensor, the car must be
running or the remote control key in position I or
II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch must
be in position 0 or in the position for a single
sweep.
tion switch or five minutes after the engine has
been switched off.
IMPORTANT
The windscreen wipers could start and be
damaged in an automatic car wash. Switch off
the rain sensor while the car is in motion or
when the remote control key is in position I or
II. The symbol in the combined instrument
panel and the light in the button go out.
Washing the headlamps and windows
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain sensor button
. The windscreen wipers make
one sweep.
Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to make
an extra sweep.
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitivity and downward for lower sensitivity. (An extra
sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned
upward.)
Deactivate
Washing function.
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the rain
sensor button
or move the stalk switch
down to another wiper program.
Washing the windscreen
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated when
the remote control key is removed from the igni-
The windscreen wipers will make several more
sweeps and the headlamps are washed once the
stalk switch has been released.
Move the stalk switch toward the steering wheel
to start the windscreen and headlamp washers.
}}
* Option/accessory. 103
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
High-pressure headlamp washing*
High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a
large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the
headlamps are washed automatically at every
fifth windscreen wash cycle.
Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrow in
the illustration above) to initiate rear window
washing and wiping.
NOTE
The rear window wiper is equipped with overheating protection which means that the
motor is switched off if it overheats. The rear
window wiper works again after a cooling
period (30 seconds or longer, depending on
the heat in the motor and the outside temperature).
Reduced washing
If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains in
the reservoir and the message that you should fill
the washer fluid is shown in the combined instrument panel, then the supply of washer fluid to the
headlamps is switched off. This is in order to prioritise cleaning the windscreen and the visibility
through it.
Wiping and washing the rear window
Wiper – reversing
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wipers are on initiates intermittent rear window wiping24. The function stops when reverse gear is
disengaged.
If the rear window wiper is already on at continuous speed, no change is made.
NOTE
On cars with rain sensors, the rear wiper is
activated during reversing if the sensor is
activated and it is raining.
Rear window wiper – intermittent wiping
Rear window wiper – continuous speed
24
104
Power windows
All power windows can be operated using the
control panel for the driver's door - the control
panels for the other doors operate their respective power window.
Driver's door control panel.
Electric child safety locks that prevent children from being able to open the rear doors
from inside* and open/close the rear windows, see Child safety locks - electrical activation* (p. 180).
Controls for rear windows
Controls for front windows
Related information
•
Washer fluid - filling (p. 357)
This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends an authorised Volvo workshop.
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
WARNING
Operating
Check that children or other passengers are
not trapped when the windows are closed
from the driver's door.
WARNING
Check that children or other passengers are
not trapped if/when the windows are closed
using the remote control key.
NOTE
WARNING
If there are children in the car - remember to
always switch off the power supply to the
power windows by selecting key position 0
and then take the remote control key with you
when leaving the car. For information on key
positions - see Key positions - functions at
different levels (p. 81).
Closing of the windows is stopped and the window is opened if anything prevents its movement.
It is possible to override the pinch protection
when closing has been interrupted, e.g. if there is
ice forming. After two successive closing interruptions the pinch protection will be forced and
the automatic function deactivated for a short
while, now it is possible to close by continually
holding the button pulled up.
Operating the power windows.
Operating without auto
Operating with auto
All power windows can be operated using the
control panel for the driver's door - the control
panels for the other doors can only operate their
respective power window. Only one control panel
can be operated at a time.
In order for the power windows to be used, the
key position must be at least I - see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 81). The
power windows can be operated for a few
minutes after the engine has been switched off
and after the remote control key has been
removed - although not after a door has been
opened.
One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise
when the rear windows are open is to also
open the front windows slightly.
Operating without auto
Move one of the controls up/down gently. The
power windows move up/down as long as the
control is held in position.
Operating with auto
Move one of the controls up/down to the end
position and release it. The window runs automatically to its end position.
Operating with the remote control key or
central locking button
To operate the power windows from the outside
with the remote control key or from inside with
the central locking button, see Remote control
key - functions (p. 164) or Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 175).
}}
105
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
Resetting
Door mirrors
If the battery is disconnected then the function
for automatic opening must be reset so that it
can work correctly.
The door mirror positions are adjusted with the
joystick in the driver's door controls.
1.
Gently raise the front section of the button to
raise the window to its end position and hold
it there for one second.
2.
Release the button briefly.
3.
Raise the front section of the button again
for one second.
Storing settings25
The settings for the door mirrors and the positions of the driver's seat can be stored for each
remote control key in the car key memory*, see
Remote control key - personalisation* (p. 161).
Angling the door mirror when parking25
WARNING
The door mirror can be angled down for the
driver to view the side of the road when parking
for example.
A reset must take place for pinch protection
to work.
Controls for door mirrors.
Adjusting
25
106
WARNING
Both mirrors are bent to provide optimal
vision. Objects may appear further away than
they actually are.
1.
Press the L button for the left-hand door mirror or the R button for the right-hand door
mirror. The light in the button illuminates.
2.
Adjust the position with the joystick in the
centre.
3.
Press the L or R button again. The light
should no longer be illuminated.
–
Engage reverse gear and press the L or R
button.
When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
automatically returns to its original position after
approx. 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing the
button labelled L or R respectively.
Automatic angling of the door mirror
when parking25
When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror is
automatically angled down so that the driver can
see the side of the road when parking for example. When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
Only in combination with power seat with memory, see Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 84).
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
automatically returns to its original position after
a short time.
The function can be activated/deactivated in the
menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).
Automatic retraction when locking*
When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote
control key the door mirrors are automatically
retracted/extended.
The function can be activated/deactivated in the
menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).
Resetting to neutral
Mirrors that have been moved out of position by
an external force must be reset electrically to the
neutral position for electric retracting/extending
to work correctly:
1.
Retract the mirrors with the L and R buttons.
2.
Fold them out again with the L and R buttons.
3.
Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
Retractable power door mirrors*
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving
in narrow spaces:
1.
Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously
(key position must be at least I).
2.
Release them after approximately 1 second.
The mirrors automatically stop in the fully
retracted position.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and
R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully extended position.
Windows and door mirrors - heating
The defroster is used to quickly remove misting
and ice from the windscreen, rear window and
door mirrors.
Heated windscreen*, rear window and
door mirrors
Home safe and approach lighting
The lamp on the door mirrors illuminates when
approach lighting (p. 102) or home safe lighting
(p. 102) is selected.
Related information
•
•
Rearview mirror - interior (p. 108)
Windows and door mirrors - heating (p. 107)
Heating, windscreen
Heating, rear window and door mirrors
The function is used to remove ice and misting
from the windscreen, rear window and door mirrors.
One press of the respective button starts the
heating. The light in the button indicates that the
function is active. Switch off the heating as soon
as the ice/misting is cleared in order not to load
the battery unnecessarily. However, the function
is switched off automatically after a certain time.
}}
* Option/accessory. 107
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
See also Demisting and defrosting the windscreen (p. 136).
The door mirrors and rear window are demisted/
defrosted automatically if the car is started in an
outside temperature lower than +7 °C. Automatic
defrosting can be selected in the menu system
MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).
Rearview mirror - interior
Automatic dimming*
The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed with
a control in the mirror's lower edge. Alternatively,
the rearview mirror dims automatically.
Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed
by the rearview mirror. The control for manual
dimming is not available on mirrors with automatic dimming.
The rearview mirror contains two sensors - one
forward facing and one rearward facing - that
work together to identify and eliminate dazzling
light. The forward facing sensor detects ambient
light, while the rearward facing sensor detects
the light from vehicle headlights behind.
The compass (p. 109) is deactivated when the
heated windscreen is activated. When the heated
windscreen is deactivated, the compass is reactivated.
NOTE
If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking
permits, transponders, sun visors or objects in
the seats or in the cargo area in such a way
that light is prevented from reaching the sensors, then the dimming function of the rearview mirror is reduced.
Control for dimming
Manual dimming
Bright light from behind could be reflected in the
rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use dimming with the dimming control when lights from
behind are distracting:
108
1.
Use dimming by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment.
2.
Return to normal position by moving the control towards the windscreen.
Only rearview mirror with automatic dimming can
be equipped with compass (p. 109).
Related information
•
Door mirrors (p. 106)
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Glass roof*
The glass roof's blind can be operated with the
control in the roof console.
The glass roof is fixed but the power operated
roller blind can be operated in key position I or II
with the control in the roof console. For information on key positions - see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 81).
IMPORTANT
Compass*
•
Avoid touching the blind because it may
then be damaged.
•
Only use the control in the roof console
to operate the blind.
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mirror contains a display that shows the compass
direction in which the front of the car is pointing.
Operation
Rearview mirror with compass.
Automatic opening to end position
Manual opening until the button is released
Manual closing until the button is released
Automatic closing to end position
Eight different directions are shown with English
abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E (east),
SE (south east), S (south), SW (south west), W
(west) and NW (north west).
The compass is activated automatically when the
car is started or when key position II is active, see
Key positions - functions at different levels
(p. 81). To deactivate/activate the compass press in the button on the rear side of the mirror
using a paper clip for example.
The compass is deactivated when the heated
windscreen is activated. When the heated windscreen is deactivated, the compass is reactivated.
}}
* Option/accessory. 109
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
Menu navigation - combined
instrument panel
Calibration
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The
compass is set for the geographic area to which
the car was delivered. The compass should be
calibrated if the car is moved across several magnetic zones. Proceed as follows:
1.
Stop the car in a large open area free from
steel structures and high-voltage power lines.
2.
Start the car.
The menus shown on the information display in
the combined instrument panel (p. 66) are controlled with the left-hand stalk switch. Which
menus are shown depends on the key position
(p. 81).
NOTE
For the best calibration, switch off all electrical equipment (climate control system, wipers,
etc.) and makes sure that all doors are closed.
3.
110
Hold the button on the underside of the rearview mirror depressed approx. 3 seconds.
The number of the current magnetic zone is
shown.
Magnetic zones.
4.
Press the button repeatedly until the
required magnetic zone (1–15) is shown.
See the map of magnetic zones for the compass.
5.
Wait until the display returns to showing the
character C, or hold the button on the bottom of the rearview mirror depressed for
approx. 6 seconds (use e.g. a paper clip) until
the character C is shown.
6.
Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more
than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a compass direction is shown in the display, indicating that
calibration is complete. Then drive a further 2
circles to fine-tune calibration.
7.
Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
Information display (analogue combined instrument
panel) and menu navigation controls.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Information displays (digital combined instrument panel)
and controls for menu navigation.
OK - access the menu, acknowledge messages and confirm menu selections.
Thumbwheel – browse between menu
options.
RESET - reset data in the selected trip computer step and go back in the menu structure.
If there is a message (p. 112) then it must be
acknowledged with OK in order that the menus
shall be shown.
Related information
•
•
•
Messages - handling (p. 113)
Menu overview - analogue
combined instrument panel
Menu overview - digital combined
instrument panel
Which menus are shown in the combined instrument panel's information display depends on the
key position (p. 81).
Which menus are shown in the combined instrument panel's information display depends on the
key position (p. 81).
Some of the following menu options require the
function and hardware to be installed in the car.
Some of the following menu options require the
function and hardware to be installed in the car.
Digital speed
Settings*
Parking heater*
Themes
Additional heater*
Contrast mode/Colour mode
TC options
Service status
Service status
Messages28
Oil
level26
Messages
Oil level29
(##)27
Related information
•
Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel (p. 110)
•
Menu overview - digital combined instrument
panel (p. 111)
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 66)
Parking heater*
Trip computer reset
Related information
•
Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel (p. 110)
•
Menu overview - analogue combined instrument panel (p. 111)
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 66)
Menu overview - analogue combined instrument panel (p. 111)
Menu overview - digital combined instrument
panel (p. 111)
* Option/accessory. 111
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Messages
When a warning, information or indicator symbol
illuminates, a corresponding message appears
on the information display.
Message
Stop
safelyA
Stop engineA
112
Specification
Message
Specification
Time for regular maintenance
Time for regular service contact a workshopB. The
timing is determined by the
number of kilometres driven,
number of months since the
last service, engine running
time and oil grade.
Transmission
hot Reduce
speed
Drive more smoothly or stop
the car in a safe manner.
Disengage the gear and run
the engine at idling speed
until the message clearsC.
Transmission
hot Stop
safely Wait for
cooling
Critical fault. Stop the car
immediately in a safe manner and contact a workshopB.
Temporarily
offA
A function has been temporarily switched off and is
reset automatically while
driving or after starting
again.
Low battery
charge Power
save mode
The audio system is
switched off to save energy.
Charge the battery.
Specification
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of damage - consult a workshopB.
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of damage - consult a workshopB.
Service
urgentA
Contact a workshopB to
check the car immediately.
Service
requiredA
Contact a workshopB to
check the car as soon as
possible.
See manualA
Read the owner's manual.
Book time for
maintenance
Time to book regular service
- contact a workshopB.
26
27
28
29
Message
Certain engines.
The number of messages is indicated in brackets.
The number of messages is indicated in brackets.
Certain engines.
Maintenance
overdue
If the service intervals are
not followed then the warranty does not cover any
damaged parts - contact a
workshopB.
Transmission
Oil change
needed
Contact a workshopB to
check the car as soon as
possible.
Transmission
Reduced performance
Transmission cannot handle
full capacity. Drive with care
until the message clearsC.
If shown repeatedly - contact a workshopB.
A
B
C
Part of message, shown together with information on where the
problem has arisen.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
For more messages concerning automatic gearbox.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Related information
•
•
Messages - handling (p. 113)
Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel (p. 110)
Messages - handling
MY CAR
Use the left-hand stalk switch to acknowledge
and browse among messages (p. 112) that are
shown in the information display of the combined instrument panel.
MY CAR is a menu source that handles many of
the car's functions, e.g. City Safety™, locks and
alarm, automatic fan speed, setting the clock,
etc.
When a warning, information or indicator symbol
illuminates, a corresponding message is shown in
the display. An error message is stored in a memory list until the fault has been rectified.
Certain functions are standard, others are
optional - the range also varies depending on the
market.
Press OK on the left-hand stalk switch to
acknowledge30 a message. Scroll through messages with the thumbwheel (p. 110).
Navigation in the menus is carried out using buttons in the centre console or with the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad*.
Operation
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you are
using the trip computer, the message must be
read (press OK) before the previous activity
can be resumed.
Related information
30
•
Menu overview - analogue combined instrument panel (p. 111)
•
Menu overview - digital combined instrument
panel (p. 111)
A message can also be acknowledged via the thumbwheel or RESET button.
}}
* Option/accessory. 113
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
and layout of the buttons both vary, depending on the
equipment selected and the market.
MY CAR - opens the menu system MY CAR.
TUNE - turn the knob in the centre console
or the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to
scroll up/down through the menu options.
OK/MENU - press the button in the centre
console or the thumbwheel on the steering
wheel to select/tick in the highlighted menu
option or store the selected function in the
memory.
EXIT
EXIT functions
Depending on the function the cursor is on when
EXIT is depressed briefly, and on which menu
level, one of the following may occur:
•
•
•
•
•
phone call is rejected
current function is interrupted
input characters are deleted
most recent selections are undone
leads up in the menu system.
A long press on EXIT leads to the normal view
for MY CAR or if you are in the normal view, to
the highest menu level (main source menu).
Control panel in centre console and steering wheel keypad. The figure is schematic - the number of functions
Menu options and search paths
For a description of the menu options and search
paths in MY CAR, see the Sensus Infotainment
supplement.
114
Trip computer
The car's trip computer records and calculates
vales such as e.g. distance, fuel consumption
and average speed whilst driving.
Trip computer content and appearance varies
depending on whether the combined instrument
panel is analogue or digital:
•
Trip computer - analogue combined instrument panel (p. 116)
•
Trip computer - digital combined instrument
panel (p. 120)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Instantaneous
The information for current fuel consumption is
updated continuously - approximately once per
second. When the car is driven at low speed the
consumption is shown per time unit - at a higher
speed it is shown related to mileage.
Different units (km/miles) can be selected for the
display - see section below."Change unit"
(p. 114)
how fuel consumption can be influenced, see
Environmental philosophy (p. 22).
Digital speed display in another unit32
If the main instrument is graduated in mph, the
equivalent digital speed is shown as km/h.
Change unit
Distance and fuel unit can be changed in the
menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).
Range - distance to empty tank
The information from the trip computer can be shown in
the combined instrument panel's information display31.
Trip meter
The trip computer has two trip meters and one
odometer for the total mileage.
Average
Average fuel consumption is calculated from the
last resetting.
NOTE
There may be a slight deviation if a fuel-driven
heater* has been used.
Average speed
The average speed is calculated for the driving
distance driven since the last reset to zero.
31
32
NOTE
The trip computer shows the approximate distance that can be driven with the fuel quantity
remaining in the tank.
In addition to in the trip computer, these units
are also changed in Volvo's navigation system*.
No guaranteed range remains when the heading
Distance to empty shows "----".
•
In which case, refuel as soon as possible.
The calculation is based on the average fuel consumption over the last 30 km and the remaining
driveable fuel quantity.
NOTE
Related information
•
Trip computer - analogue combined instrument panel (p. 116)
•
Trip computer - digital combined instrument
panel (p. 120)
•
Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 123)
There may be a slight deviation if the driving
style has been changed.
An economic driving style generally results in a
longer driving distance. For more information on
The appearance and showing of the display may vary depending on the instrument variant.
Only digital combined instrument panel and certain markets.
* Option/accessory. 115
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Trip computer - analogue combined
instrument panel
Trip computer alternative
Controls
Choose which trip computer should be shown:
The information from the trip computer can be
shown in the combined instrument panel and
operated with the controls on the left-hand stalk
switch and with the combined instrument panel's
menu.
Checking and settings can be made immediately
after the combined instrument panel is automatically illuminated in connection with unlocking. If
none of the trip computer's controls are actuated
within approx. 30 seconds after the driver's door
has been opened then the instrument extinguishes, after which either key position II or
engine starting is required in order to operate the
trip computer.
2.
Turn the thumbwheel to browse between the
options and stop at the required heading.
Information display and controls.
NOTE
116
To ensure that no control is in the middle of
a sequence - reset them first with
two presses on RESET.
The trip computer display in the combined instrument panel can be shifted to another option at
any time during the journey. One of the options
means that no trip computer is shown.
If a warning message appears when the trip
computer is used then the message must first
be acknowledged before the trip computer
can be reactivated.
•
1.
OK - opens the combined instrument panel's
menu, confirms messages or menu selections.
Thumbwheel - browses between menu
options or trip computer options.
RESET - resets the current trip meter or
goes back out of the menu structure.
Acknowledge the message by briefly
pressing the indicator stalk OK button.
Trip computer heading in combined instrument panel
Information
Trip meter T1 and total dist.
•
Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.
Trip meter T2 and total dist.
•
Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Trip computer heading in combined instrument panel
Information
Distance to empty
For more information - see the section"Range - distance to empty tank" (p. 114).
Fuel consumption
Current consumption.
Average speed
•
No trip computer information.
This option shows a blank display and it also indicates the beginning/end of the loop.
Resetting the trip computer
1.
2.
Turn the thumbwheel and stop at the trip
computer heading to be reset: T1 and total
dist., T2 and total dist. or Average speed.
One long press on RESET resets the value
for the selected heading.
Each heading must be zeroed individually.
Long press on RESET resets Average speed.
Functions in the combined instrument
panel's menu
The combined instrument panel's menu includes
setting options for trip computer. Open the menu
to check/adjust the functions in the table below.
1.
2.
Press OK.
3.
Browse through the functions with the
thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK.
4.
Finish by pressing twice on RESET after
completed checking/adjustment.
To ensure that no control is in the middle of
a sequence - reset them first with
two presses on RESET.
}}
117
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
Functions
Information
Digital speed
Shows the car's speed digitally in the centre of the combined instrument panel.
•
•
•
km/h
mph
No display
Parking heater*
•
•
•
DIRECT START
For a description of programming the timer, see Engine block heater and passenger compartment
heater* - timer (p. 142).
Timer 1
Timer 2
Additional heater*
For more information, see Additional heater* (p. 144).
• Auto On
• Off
TC options
•
•
•
•
•
A
118
Distance to empty tank
Fuel consumption
Here you can activate the options that you want to be available as selectable headings in the trip
computer. The symbols for the options already selected are white with a "tick" - others are grey
and have no "tick".
Average speed
Trip meter T1 and total dist.
Trip meter T2 and total dist.
Service status
Shows the number of months and the distance until the next service.
Oil levelA
For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 343).
Messages (##)
For more information, see Messages (p. 112).
Certain engines.
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Related information
•
•
Trip computer (p. 114)
Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 123)
* Option/accessory. 119
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Trip computer - digital combined
instrument panel
Trip computer alternative
Controls
Choose which trip computer should be shown:
The information from the trip computer can be
shown in the combined instrument panel and
operated with the controls on the left-hand stalk
switch and with the combined instrument panel's
menu.
Checking and settings can be made immediately
after the combined instrument panel is automatically illuminated in connection with unlocking. If
none of the trip computer's controls are actuated
within approx. 30 seconds after the driver's door
has been opened then the instrument extinguishes, after which either key position II or
engine starting is required in order to operate the
trip computer.
NOTE
If a warning message appears when the trip
computer is used then the message must first
be acknowledged before the trip computer
can be reactivated.
•
Three trip computer options can be displayed simultaneously - one in each "window".
To ensure that no control is in the middle of
a sequence - reset them first with
two presses on RESET.
2.
Turn the thumbwheel to browse between the
heading combinations.
3.
Stop at the required combination for the constant display of this trip data in the combined
instrument panel.
The trip computer display in the combined instrument panel can be shifted to another option at
any time during the journey. One of the options
means that no trip computer is shown.
OK - opens the combined instrument panel's
menu, confirms messages or menu selections.
Thumbwheel - browses between menu
options or trip computer options.
RESET - resets the current trip meter or
goes back out of the menu structure.
Acknowledge the message by briefly
pressing the indicator stalk OK button.
Heading combinations
120
1.
Information
Average
Trip meter T1 + Meter reading
Average speed
•
Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.
Instantaneous
Trip meter T2 + Meter reading
Distance to empty tank
•
Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Heading combinations
Instantaneous
Meter reading
Information
km/h<>mphA
No trip computer information.
A
km/h<>mph - "Reverse digital speed display", see Trip computer (p. 114).
This option extinguishes all three trip computer displays and it also indicates the
beginning/end of the loop.
Only certain markets.
Resetting the trip computer
Trip meter
1. Turn the thumbwheel and stop at the heading combination with the trip meter to be
reset.
2.
One long press on RESET resets the value
for the selected heading.
Average speed and average consumption
1. Press OK to open the combined instrument
panel's menu.
2.
3.
Choose to reset average consumption, average speed or to reset both, and confirm your
selection with OK.
1.
To ensure that no control is in the middle of
a sequence - reset them first with
two presses on RESET.
4.
Finish by pressing RESET.
2.
Press OK.
3.
Browse through the functions with the
thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK.
4.
Finish by pressing twice on RESET after
completed checking/adjustment.
Functions in the combined instrument
panel's menu
The combined instrument panel's menu includes
setting options for trip computer. Open the menu
to check/adjust the functions in the table below.
Browse to the Trip computer reset menu
option with the thumbwheel and confirm with
OK.
Functions
Information
Trip computer reset
Reset the value of average fuel consumption and average speed.
•
•
Note that this function does not reset both trip meters T1 and T2.
Average
Average speed
Messages
For more information, see Messages (p. 112).
}}
121
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
Functions
Information
Themes
Select the theme for the appearance of the combined instrument panel, see Digital combined instrument panel overview (p. 67).
Settings*
Select Auto On or Off.
For more information, see Additional heater* (p. 144).
Contrast mode/Colour mode
Adjusting the combined instrument panel's brightness and colour intensity.
Parking heater*
For a description of programming the timer, see Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - timer
(p. 142).
• Direct start
• Timer 1
• Timer 2
Service status
Shows the number of months and the distance until the next service.
Oil levelA
For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 343).
A
Certain engines.
Related information
•
•
122
Trip computer (p. 114)
Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 123)
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Trip computer - trip statistics*
Trip statistics from the trip computer can be
shown in the centre console's screen and provide a graphic overview of fuel consumption.
Function
–
Settings
Different settings can be made in the menu system MY CAR - Trip statistics.
• Reset when vehicle has been off for
minimum 4h - highlight the box by selecting ENTER and go back out of the menu by
selecting EXIT. With this option selected, all
statistics are deleted automatically after finishing driving and the car has been stationary
for more than 4 hours. The journey statistics
start again from zero the next time the
engine is started.
Open the menu system MY CAR (p. 113)
and select Trip statistics in order to see the
bar chart.
• Start new trip - ENTER is used to delete all
previous statistics, back out of the menu by
selecting EXIT. If a new driving cycle shall be
started before 4 hours have elapsed then the
current period must first be deleted manually
with this option.
See also information on Eco guide (p. 70).
Trip statistics33.
Each bar symbolises 1 km or 10 km driven distance, depending on the scale selected - the bar
at the far right shows the value for the current kilometre or 10 km.
The TUNE knob can be used to change the scale
for each bar between 1 km and 10 km - the cursor at the far right changes position between up
and down depending on the scale selected.
33
Related information
•
•
Trip computer (p. 114)
•
Trip computer - digital combined instrument
panel (p. 120)
Trip computer - analogue combined instrument panel (p. 116)
The figure is schematic - layout may vary depending on updated software and market.
* Option/accessory. 123
CLIMATE CONTROL
CLIMATE CONTROL
General information on climate
control
The car is equipped with electronic climate control. The climate control system cools or heats as
well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger
compartment.
•
•
When the engine requires full power, e.g. for
full acceleration, the air conditioning can be
temporarily switched off. There may then be
a temporary increase in temperature in the
passenger compartment.
•
Remove misting on the insides of the windows primarily by using the defroster function (p. 136). To reduce the risk of misting,
keep the windows clean and use window
cleaner.
There are two different climate control systems:
•
Electronic temperature control (ETC)
(p. 132)
•
Electronic climate control (ECC) (p. 131)
NOTE
Air conditioning (AC) (p. 135) can be
switched off, but to ensure the best possible
climate comfort in the passenger compartment, and to prevent the windows from misting, it should always be switched on.
To bear in mind
126
•
To ensure that the air conditioning works
optimally, the side windows must be closed.
•
Global opening (p. 176) opens/closes all
side windows simultaneously and can be
used for example to quickly air the car during
hot weather.
•
Remove ice and snow from the climate control system air intake (the grille between the
bonnet and the windscreen).
In warm weather, condensation from the air
conditioning may drip under the car. This is
normal.
Cars with Start/Stop*
With an auto-stopped (p. 279) engine certain
equipment may have its function temporarily
reduced, e.g. climate control fan speed (p. 134).
Cars with ECO*
Certain equipment may have its function temporarily reduced or deactivated when the ECO
(p. 287) function is activated, e.g. the air conditioning (p. 135).
NOTE
When the ECO function is activated, several
parameters in the climate control system's
settings are changed, and several electricity
consumer functions are reduced. Certain settings can be reset manually, but full functionality is only restored by deactivating the ECO
function.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Actual temperature (p. 127)
Sensors - climate control (p. 127)
Menu settings - climate control (p. 129)
Air distribution in the passenger compartment (p. 129)
Air quality (p. 127)
Heated front seats* (p. 133)
Heated rear seat* (p. 133)
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Actual temperature
Sensors - climate control
Air quality
The temperature you select in the passenger
compartment corresponds to the physical experience with reference to factors such as ambient
temperature, air speed, humidity and solar radiation etc. in and around the car at the time.
The climate control system has a number of sensors to help control the temperature (p. 127) in
the car.
•
The sun sensor is located on the top side of
the dashboard.
The interior in a passenger compartment is
designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even
for people with contact allergies and for asthma
sufferers.
The system includes a sun sensor (p. 127) which
detects on which side the sun is shining into the
passenger compartment. This means1 that the
temperature can differ between the right and lefthand air vents despite the controls being set for
the same temperature on both sides.
•
The temperature sensor for the passenger
compartment is located below the climate
control panel.
•
The outside temperature sensor is located in
the door mirror.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 126)
•
Temperature control in the passenger compartment (p. 135)
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects.
Passenger compartment filter (p. 128)
Material in the passenger compartment
(p. 129)
•
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)
(p. 128)*
•
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) (p. 128)*
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 126)
Related information
•
1
•
•
General information on climate control
(p. 126)
Only applies to ECC.
* Option/accessory. 127
CLIMATE CONTROL
Air quality - passenger
compartment filter
Air quality - Clean Zone Interior
Package (CZIP)*
All air entering the car's passenger compartment
is cleaned with a filter.
CZIP comprises a series of modifications that
keep the passenger compartment even clearer
from allergy and asthma-inducing substances.
The filter must be replaced at regular intervals.
Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the recommended replacement intervals. If the car is
used in a severely contaminated environment, it
may be necessary to replace the filter more often.
The following is included:
•
NOTE
There are different types of passenger compartment filter. Make sure that the correct filter is fitted.
Related information
•
Air quality (p. 127)
•
An enhanced fan function that means that
the fan starts when the car is opened with
the remote control key. The fan fills the passenger compartment with fresh air. The function starts when required and is disengaged
automatically after a time or when one of the
passenger compartment doors is opened.
The amount of time the fan runs is reduced
gradually due to reduced need up until the
car is 4 years old.
The air quality system IAQS (p. 128) is a fully
automatic system that cleans the air in the
passenger compartment from contaminants
such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous
oxides and ground-level ozone.
Related information
•
•
128
General information on climate control
(p. 126)
Air quality (p. 127)
Air quality - IAQS*
The air quality system IAQS separates gases
and particles to reduce the levels of odours and
pollution in the passenger compartment.
If the outside air is contaminated then the air
intake is closed in order to shut out hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone. The
air is recirculated in the passenger compartment.
It is possible to activate/deactivate the function
in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of
the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 113).
NOTE
The air quality sensor must always be enabled
to ensure the best air in the passenger compartment.
In a cold climate, automatic recirculation is
limited so as to prevent misting.
Related information
•
•
•
General information on climate control
(p. 126)
Air quality (p. 127)
Air quality - Clean Zone Interior Package
(CZIP)* (p. 128)
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Air quality - material
Menu settings - climate control
Tested materials have been developed in order
to minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger
compartment and to contribute to making the
passenger compartment easier to keep clean.
It is possible to activate/deactivate or change
the default settings for four of the climate control
system's functions via the centre console.
The carpets in both the passenger compartment
and the cargo area are removable and easy to
remove and clean. Use cleaning agents and car
care products recommended by Volvo to clean
the interior (p. 376).
Related information
•
Air quality (p. 127)
•
•
•
•
Air distribution in the passenger
compartment
The incoming air is divided between a number of
different vents in the passenger compartment.
Fan level during automatic climate control*
(p. 134).
Recirculation timer (p. 137).
Automatic start of rear window defroster
(p. 107).
Interior air quality system* (p. 128).
The climate control system's functions can be
reset to the default settings via the menu system
in MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 113).
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 126)
Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO mode*.
If necessary it can be controlled manually; see
the air distribution table (p. 138).
}}
* Option/accessory. 129
CLIMATE CONTROL
||
Air vents in the dashboard
Open
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Closed
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Lateral airflow
Air distribution - ventilation floor
Vertical airflow
Aim the vents at the side windows to remove
misting.
NOTE
Remember that small children may be sensitive to air flows and draughts.
130
Air distribution
The figure consists of three buttons. When pressing the buttons the corresponding figure is illuminated in the display screen (see figure below)
and an arrow in front of each part of the figure
shows the air distribution that is selected. For
more information, see the air distribution table
(p. 138).
The selected air distribution is shown in the centre console display screen.
Related information
•
•
•
General information on climate control
(p. 126)
Auto-regulation (p. 134)
Air distribution - recirculation (p. 137)
CLIMATE CONTROL
Electronic climate control - ECC*
ECC (Electronic Climate Control) maintains the
temperature selected in the passenger compart-
Fan (p. 134)
AUTO - Automatic climate control (p. 134)
Electrically heated front seat (p. 133), left
side
Heated windscreen* and max. defroster
(p. 136)
Air distribution (p. 129) - ventilation floor
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
ment and can be set separately for the driver's
side and passenger side.
Rear window and door mirror defrosters
(p. 107)
Setting, left/right-hand side for temperature
control (p. 135)
The auto function is used to automatically control temperature, air conditioning, fan speed,
recirculation and air distribution.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 126)
Electrically heated front seat (p. 133), right
side
Temperature control (p. 135)
Recirculation (p. 137)
ECO* (p. 287)
AC - Air conditioning on/off (p. 135)
* Option/accessory. 131
CLIMATE CONTROL
Electronic temperature control ETC
distribution and fan control are handled manually.
With ETC (Electronic Temperature Control) the
temperature is regulated automatically while air
Fan (p. 134)
Electrically heated front seat (p. 133), left
side
AC - Air conditioning on/off (p. 135)
Heated windscreen and max. defroster*
Air distribution (p. 129) - ventilation floor
Rear window and door mirror defrosters
(p. 107)
Recirculation (p. 137)
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 126)
Electrically heated front seat (p. 133), right
side
Temperature control (p. 135)
ECO* (p. 287)
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
132
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Heated front seats*
The front seat heating has three positions for
increasing the comfort for driver and passenger
when it is cold.
There are three heat levels that give different
heating outputs:
•
Highest heat level - three orange fields illuminate in the centre console's screen (see
figure above).
•
Lower heat level - two orange fields illuminate in the screen.
•
Lowest heat level - one orange field illuminates in the screen.
•
Switch off the heat - no field illuminates.
Heated rear seat*
The heating for the rear seat's outer positions
has three positions for increasing the comfort for
passengers when it is cold.
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase in
temperature due to a lack of sensation or who
otherwise have problems operating the controls for the heated seats. Otherwise they may
suffer burn injuries.
Current heat level is shown in the centre console display
screen.
Press the button repeatedly to
change between the different
levels or to deactivate the function.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 126)
•
Heated rear seat* (p. 133)
Current heat level is shown in the pushbutton's lamps:
Press the button repeatedly to change between
the different levels or to deactivate the function.
There are three heat levels that give different
heating outputs:
•
•
•
•
Highest heat level - three lamps illuminate.
Lower heat level - two lamps illuminate.
Lowest heat level - one lamp illuminates.
Switch off the heat - no lamp illuminates.
}}
* Option/accessory. 133
CLIMATE CONTROL
||
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase in
temperature due to a lack of sensation or who
otherwise have problems operating the controls for the heated seats. Otherwise they may
suffer burn injuries.
Fan
Auto-regulation
The fan should always be activated in order to
avoid misting on the windows.
Auto-regulation is only possible in electronic climate control (ECC) (p. 131).
If the fan is fully switched off then the air conditioning is not engaged - which can cause a
risk of misting on the windows.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 126)
•
Heated front seats* (p. 133)
The auto function automatically
regulates temperature (p. 135),
air conditioning (p. 135), fan
speed (p. 134), recirculation
(p. 137) and air distribution
(p. 129).
NOTE
With ECC*
Turn the knob to increase or
decrease fan speed, AUTO is
disengaged. If AUTO is
selected, then the fan speed is
regulated automatically
(p. 134) - the fan speed previously set is disengaged.
With ETC
Turn the knob to increase or
decrease fan speed.
If you select one or more manual functions, the
other functions continue to be controlled automatically. All manual settings are disengaged
when AUTO is pressed. The display screen
shows AUTO CLIMATE.
Fan speed in automatic mode can be set in the
menu system MY CAR. For a description of the
menu system, see MY CAR (p. 113).
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 126)
Related information
•
•
•
134
General information on climate control
(p. 126)
Electronic climate control - ECC* (p. 131)
Electronic temperature control - ETC
(p. 132)
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Temperature control in the
passenger compartment
When the car is started, the most recent temperature setting is resumed.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
selecting a higher or lower temperature than
the actual desired temperature.
The temperatures on the driver
and passenger sides can be
set independently. Repeatedly
press L/R in the button to
select the setting for left, right
or both sides. Set the temperature using the knob - the
selected temperature for either side is displayed
in the centre console display.
With ETC
The temperature in the passenger compartment can be
adjusted with the knob.
With ECC*
Air conditioning
The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies
incoming air as required.
When the lamp in the AC button illuminates, the air conditioning is controlled by the system's automatic function.
When the lamp in the AC button is switched off the air conditioning is disconnected. Other functions are still
controlled automatically. When the max. defroster
function (p. 136) is activated, the air conditioning
is switched on automatically so that the air is
dehumidified at the maximum setting.
Related information
•
•
•
Current temperature for each side is shown in the centre
console's display screen.
•
General information on climate control
(p. 126)
Actual temperature (p. 127)
Electronic temperature control - ETC
(p. 132)
Electronic climate control - ECC* (p. 131)
* Option/accessory. 135
CLIMATE CONTROL
Demisting and defrosting the
windscreen
For cars without heated windscreen there is one
defrost level:
Heated windscreen* and max. defroster are
used to quickly remove misting and ice from the
windscreen and side windows.
•
Air flows to the windows - symbol (2) illuminates in the screen.
•
Switch off the function - no symbol illuminates.
For cars with heated windscreen there are two
defrost levels:
•
Start the heating for the windscreen2 - symbol (1) illuminates in the screen.
•
Start the heating for the windscreen2 and air
flow to the windows - symbols (1) and (2)
illuminate in the screen.
•
The selected setting is shown in the centre console display screen.
Heated windscreen*
Max. defroster
The light in the defroster button illuminates when the function is active.
Press the button repeatedly to
change between the different
levels or to deactivate the func-
NOTE
Electrically heated windscreen is not available
when the engine is auto-stopped (p. 279).
The following also takes place when the function
is active in order to provide maximum dehumidification in the passenger compartment:
•
•
Heated windscreen and IR window (p. 20)
may have an impact on the performance of
transponders and other communication
equipment.
recirculation and the air quality system are
automatically disengaged.
NOTE
The noise level increases as the fan is operating at max.
Switch off the function - no symbol illuminates.
NOTE
the air conditioning is automatically engaged
When the defroster is switched off the climate
control returns to the previous settings.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 126)
NOTE
A triangular area at the end of each side of
the windscreen is not electrically heated,
where de-icing may take longer.
tion.
2
136
The compass goes off when the heated windscreen is active.
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Air distribution - recirculation
Select recirculation to shut out bad air, exhaust
gases etc. from the passenger compartment, i.e.
no outside air is taken into the car when this
function is activated.
When recirculation is engaged
the orange lamp in the button
illuminates.
NOTE
When max. defroster is selected, recirculation
is always deactivated.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 126)
•
Air distribution in the passenger compartment (p. 129)
•
Air distribution - table (p. 138)
IMPORTANT
If the air in the car recirculates for too long,
there is a risk of misting on the insides of the
windows.
Timer
With the timer function activated the system will
exit manually activated recirculation mode
according to a time that depends on the outside
temperature. This reduces the risk of ice, misting
and bad air.
It is possible to activate/deactivate the function
in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of
the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 113).
137
CLIMATE CONTROL
Air distribution - table
Three buttons are used to select the distribution
(p. 129) of the air.
138
Air distribution
Use
A large amount of hot air flows to the windows.
to remove ice and misting quickly.
Air to windscreen, via defroster vent, and side windows. Some air
flows from the air vents.
to avoid misting and icing in a cold and humid climate (to
achieve this the fan level must not be too low).
Airflow to windows and from dashboard air vents.
to ensure good comfort in warm, dry weather.
Airflow to the head and chest from the dashboard air vents.
to ensure efficient cooling in warm weather.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Air distribution
Use
Air to the floor and windows. Some air flows from the dashboard air
vents.
to ensure comfortable conditions and good demisting in cold or
humid weather.
Air to floor and from dashboard air vents.
in sunny weather with cool outside temperatures.
Air to floor. Some air flows to the dashboard air vents and windows.
to direct heat or cold to the floor.
Airflow to windows, from dashboard air vents and to the floor.
to provide cooling along the floor in hot, dry weather or warming
upwards in cold weather.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 126)
•
Air distribution - recirculation (p. 137)
139
CLIMATE CONTROL
Engine block and passenger
compartment heater*
Refuelling
Preconditioning prepares the heater, engine and
passenger compartment before departure so
that both wear and energy needs during the journey are reduced. Warming up your car will also
extend the driving distance.
automatically and a message appears in the display. Acknowledge the message by pressing the
indicator stalk (p. 110) OK button once.
IMPORTANT
Repeated use of the heater in combination
with short driving distances may cause low
charge level in the starter battery, this can
lead to the heater stopping or never starting.
In the worst case, engine starting will not be
possible.
The heater can be started directly (p. 141) or
with a timer (p. 142).
The heater cannot start if the outside temperature exceeds 15 °C. The heater's maximum running time is 50 minutes.
WARNING
Do not use the fuel-driven heater indoors.
Exhaust gases are secreted.
NOTE
When the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is active
there may be smoke from underneath the car,
which is perfectly normal.
The car should be driven for the same time as
the heater is used to ensure that the starter
battery is recharged adequately to replace the
energy consumed by the heater when it is
used on a regular basis. The heater is used
for a maximum of 50 minutes each time.
Warning label on fuel filler flap.
WARNING
Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch
off the fuel-driven auxiliary heater before starting to refuel.
Check in the combined instrument panel that
the heater is switched off. The heat symbol is
shown when it is operating.
Parking on a hill
Related information
•
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - messages (p. 143)
•
Additional heater* (p. 144)
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the
car should point downhill to ensure that there is a
supply of fuel to the fuel-driven heater.
Battery and fuel
If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel
level is too low, the heater will be switched off
140
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater* - direct start
Direct start via the remote control key*
The engine block heater and passenger compartment heater can be started directly.
Direct start can be performed via:
•
•
•
information display
Status is also shown in the trip computer during
heating.
remote control key*
mobile*.
Direct start via a mobile*
Upon direct start of the engine block and passenger compartment heater (p. 140), it will run
for 50 minutes.
Heating of the passenger compartment will begin
as soon as the engine coolant has reached the
correct temperature.
NOTE
The car can be started and driven while the
heater is running.
Direct start via the information display
1.
Press OK to access the menu.
2.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking
heater and select with OK.
3.
Scroll forward in the next menu to Direct
start in order to activate the heater and
select with OK.
4.
Exit the menu with RESET.
If the button for information
is depressed
when the heater is active then the indicator lamp
will show the status for this - at the same time
the car's lock status (p. 165) is shown. While the
status is being investigated the indicator lamp
emits a pair of short flashes followed by a constant glow if the heater is active.
Indicator lamp on remote control key with PCC*.
The engine block heater and passenger compartment heater can be activated via the remote control key:
–
Hold the button for approach lighting
depressed for 2 seconds.
Hazard warning flashers provide information
in accordance with the following:
•
5 short flashes followed by a constant
glow for approx. 3 seconds - the signal
has reached the car and the heater has
been activated.
•
5 short flashes - the signal has reached
the car but the heater has not been activated.
•
Hazard warning flashers remain switched
off - the signal has not reached the car.
Activation and information on selected settings
are available via the Volvo On Call* app.
Related information
•
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - timer (p. 142)
•
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - immediate stop (p. 142)
•
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - messages (p. 143)
* Option/accessory. 141
CLIMATE CONTROL
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater* - immediate
stop
The engine block heater and passenger compartment heater can be deactivated directly via
the information display.
1.
Press OK to access the menu.
2.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking
heater and select with OK.
3.
Scroll forward in the next menu to Stop in
order to deactivate the heater and select with
OK.
4.
Exit the menu with RESET.
Related information
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater* - timer
7.
Select the required minute using the thumbwheel.
The timer of the engine block and passenger
compartment heater (p. 140) is connected to
the car's clock.
8.
Press OK3 to confirm the setting.
9.
Go back in the menu structure using RESET.
Two different times can be selected using the
timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car
is heated and ready. The car's electronic system
calculates when heating should be started based
on the outside temperature.
NOTE
All timer programming will be cleared if the
car's clock is reset.
•
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - direct start (p. 141)
Adjusting
1.
Press OK to access the menu.
•
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - timer (p. 142)
2.
Scroll with the thumbwheel (p. 110) to
Parking heater and select with OK.
•
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - messages (p. 143)
3.
Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
4.
Briefly press OK to move to the lit hours setting.
5.
Select the required hour using the thumbwheel.
6.
3
142
Briefly press OK to move to the lit minutes
setting.
10. Select the other time (continue from step 2)
or exit the menu with RESET.
Starting
1.
Press OK to access the menu.
2.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking
heater and select with OK.
3.
Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and activate with OK.
4.
Exit the menu with RESET.
Switching off
A timer-started heater can be switched off manually before the set time has elapsed. Proceed as
follows:
1.
Press OK to access the menu.
2.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking
heater and select with OK.
> If a timer is set but not activated, a clock
icon is shown next to the set time.
3.
Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
Press OK again to activate the timer.
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
4.
Deactivate the timer as follows:
•
•
5.
long press on OK or
short press on OK to continue in the
menu. Then select to stop the timer and
confirm with OK.
Exit the menu with RESET.
A timer-started heater can be switched off
directly (p. 141).
Related information
•
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - messages (p. 143)
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater* - messages
Symbol
Message
The heater is
switched on and running.
Symbols and messages regarding the engine
block and passenger compartment heater
(p. 140) differ depending on whether the combined instrument panel is analogue (p. 66) or
digital (p. 67).
The heater's timer is
activated after the
remote control key
has been removed
from the ignition
switch and leaving
the car - the engine
and passenger compartment are heated
at the set time.
When the heater has been activated
the heat symbol illuminates in the
information display.
When one of the timers is activated the symbol
for activated timer illuminates in the information
display at the same time as the set time is shown
next to the symbol.
Symbol for activated timer in analogue
combined instrument panel.
Symbol for activated timer in digital
combined instrument panel.
Specification
Fuel
operated
heater
stopped
Battery
saving
mode
The heater has been
stopped by the car's
electronics in order to
facilitate starting the
engine.
The table shows symbols and display texts that
appear.
}}
* Option/accessory. 143
CLIMATE CONTROL
||
Symbol
Message
Fuel
operated
heater
stopped
Low fuel
level
Fuel
operated
heater
Service
required
Specification
Setting the heater is
not possible due to
fuel level being too
low - this is in order
to facilitate starting
the engine as well as
approx. 50 km driving.
Heater not working.
Contact a workshop
for repair. Volvo recommends that you
contact an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Additional heater*
Fuel-driven additional heater*
For cars with diesel engines sold in cold climate
zones4 an additional heater may be required to
obtain the correct operating temperature in the
engine and to obtain sufficient heating in the
passenger compartment.
The car is equipped with either an electric
(p. 145) or a fuel-driven additional heater
(p. 144).
In such instances, the car is equipped with either
The heater is switched off automatically when the
correct temperature is reached or when the
engine is switched off.
•
•
electric additional heater (p. 145) or
fuel-driven additional heater (p. 144)5.
Related information
•
Engine block and passenger compartment
heater* (p. 140)
A display text clears automatically after a time or
after one press on the indicator stalk (p. 110) OK
button.
Related information
•
•
The heater starts automatically when extra heat is
required when the engine is running.
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - direct start (p. 141)
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - timer (p. 142)
NOTE
When the auxiliary heater is active there may
be smoke from underneath the car, which is
perfectly normal.
Auto mode or shutdown
Automatic start of the additional heater can be
deactivated if required.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the fuel-driven additional heater should be switched off for short
distances.
1.
4
5
144
Before starting the engine: Select key position I (p. 81).
An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the geographical areas concerned.
For cars equipped with parking heater (p. 140).
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
2.
Press OK to access the menu.
Electric additional heater*
3.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional
heater6 or Settings7 and select with OK.
The car is equipped with either a fuel-driven
(p. 144) or an electric additional heater (p. 144).
4.
Select one of the options ON or OFF using
the thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
5.
Exit the menu with RESET.
The heater cannot be controlled manually but is
instead activated automatically after the engine
has been started in outside temperatures below
9 °C and is switched off after the set passenger
compartment temperature has been reached.
NOTE
The menu options are only visible in key position I - any adjustments must therefore be
made before starting the engine.
Related information
•
Engine block and passenger compartment
heater* (p. 140)
Related information
•
6
7
Engine block and passenger compartment
heater* (p. 140)
Analogue combined instrument panel.
Digital combined instrument panel.
* Option/accessory. 145
LOADING AND STORAGE
LOADING AND STORAGE
Storage spaces
Overview of storage spaces in the passenger
compartment.
148
LOADING AND STORAGE
Storage compartment1 in door panel
Storage compartment, driver’s side (p. 150)
Ticket clip
Storage compartment
Glovebox (p. 151)
Storage compartment, cup holder (p. 150)
Cup holder* in rear seat
Storage pocket2
Storage compartment, rear seat
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,
cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc.
in the glove compartment or other compartments. Otherwise they may injure people in
the car in the event of sudden braking or a
collision.
1
2
With ice scraper holder on the driver’s side.
Not applicable to textile upholstery.
* Option/accessory. 149
LOADING AND STORAGE
Storage compartment driver’s side
Tunnel console
Tunnel console - armrest
This storage compartment (p. 148) is located on
the driver's side, to the left under the lighting
panel.
The tunnel console is located between the front
seats.
The tunnel console is located between the front
seats.
When closed, the tunnel console's armrest can
be adjusted* longitudinally.
WARNING
Related information
Do not keep any sharp objects in the compartment, or objects which protrude.
•
Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets (p. 152)
Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) and
USB*/AUX input under the armrest.
Includes cup holder for driver and passenger.
Related information
•
•
150
Storage spaces (p. 148)
Tunnel console - armrest (p. 150)
* Option/accessory.
LOADING AND STORAGE
Glovebox
Inlaid mats*
Vanity mirror
The glovebox is located on the passenger side.
Inlay mats collect e.g. rubbish and slush. Volvo
supplies specially manufactured inlay mats.
The vanity mirror is located on the rear of the sun
visor.
The owner's manual and maps can be kept in
here for example. There are also holders for pens
on the inside of the lid. The glovebox can be
locked* (p. 176), using the key blade (p. 167).
WARNING
Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and
check before setting off that the mat by the
driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in
the pins so that it does not get caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
Related information
•
Storage spaces (p. 148)
Related information
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 376)
Vanity mirror with lighting.
The light illuminates automatically when the cover
is lifted.
Related information
•
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting
(p. 354)
* Option/accessory. 151
LOADING AND STORAGE
Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets
NOTE
The electrical sockets (12 V) are located in the
tunnel console's storage compartment and
beside the cup holder.
Optional equipment and accessories - e.g.
display screens, music players and mobile
phones - which are connected to one of the
passenger compartment's 12V electrical
sockets could be activated by the climate
control system, even when the remote control
key has been removed or when the car is
locked, for example, when the engine block
and passenger compartment heater* is activated at a preset time.
For this reason remove the plugs from the
electrical sockets for optional equipment or
accessories when not in use because the battery could be drained in the event of such an
occurrence!
12 V socket in tunnel console, front seat.
The electrical sockets can be used for various
accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. screens,
music players and mobile phones. For the socket
to supply current, the remote control key must be
in at least key position I (p. 81).
IMPORTANT
Max. power takeoff is 10 A (120 W) in either
socket.
NOTE
WARNING
The compressor for emergency puncture
repair (p. 328) has been tested and approved
by Volvo.
Always leave the plug in the socket when the
socket is not in use.
Related information
•
152
12 V socket - cargo area (p. 155)
Loading
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight.
For more detailed information on weights, see
Weights (p. 385).
The tailgate is opened via a button on
the lighting panel or the remote control
key, see Locking/unlocking - tailgate
(p. 176).
WARNING
The car’s driving properties change depending on the weight and positioning of the load.
To bear in mind when loading
•
Position the load firmly against the rear
seat's backrest.
Note that objects must not prevent the function
of the WHIPS system for the front seats if any of
the rear seat's backrests is folded down, see
WHIPS - seating position (p. 41).
•
•
Centre the load.
Heavy objects should be placed as low as
possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on lowered backrests.
* Option/accessory.
LOADING AND STORAGE
•
Cover sharp edges with something soft to
avoid damaging the upholstery.
•
Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets
with straps or web lashings.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg (44 pounds)
can, in a frontal collision at a speed of
50 km/h (30 mph) carry the impact of an
item weighing 1000 kg (2200 pounds).
WARNING
The protection provided by the inflatable curtain in the headlining may be compromised or
eliminated by high loads.
•
Related information
•
•
•
•
Load retaining eyelets (p. 154)
Cargo net* (p. 156)
Loading - long load (p. 153)
Roof load (p. 154)
Loading - long load
To simplify loading in the cargo area, the rear
seat backrest can be folded down. The passenger seat backrest can also be folded for an extra
long load.
Folding the passenger seat
See Seats, front (p. 82).
Lowering the rear seat backrest
See (p. 86).
Related information
•
Loading (p. 152)
Never load cargo above the backrest.
WARNING
Always secure the load. Always secure the
load. During heavy braking the load may otherwise shift, causing personal injury to the
car's occupants.
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
something soft.
Switch off the engine and apply the parking
brake when loading/unloading long items.
Otherwise you may accidentally knock the
gear lever or gear selector with the load into a
drive position - and the car could then move
off.
* Option/accessory. 153
LOADING AND STORAGE
Roof load
Load retaining eyelets
Loading - bag holder
The load carriers recommended for roof loads
are the ones developed by Volvo. This is in order
to avoid damage to the car and in order to
achieve the maximum possible safety during a
journey.
The load retaining eyelets are used to fasten
straps in order to anchor items in the cargo area.
The bag holders keep carrier bags in place and
prevent them from overturning and spreading
their contents around the cargo area. The holder
has a capacity of max. 3 kg.
Carefully follow the installation instructions supplied with the carriers.
•
Check periodically that the load carriers and
load are properly secured. Lash the load
securely with retaining straps.
•
Distribute the load evenly over the load carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.
•
The size of the area exposed to the wind, and
therefore fuel consumption, increase with the
size of the load.
•
Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy
braking and hard cornering.
WARNING
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which protrude may cause injury under violent braking.
WARNING
Always secure large and heavy objects with a
seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
The car's centre of gravity and driving characteristics are altered by roof loads.
For information about the maximum permitted
load on the roof, including load carriers and
any space box, see Weights (p. 385).
Bag holder
Related information
•
•
Loading (p. 152)
Loading - folding bag holder* (p. 155)
Related information
•
Loading (p. 152)
Related information
•
154
Loading (p. 152)
* Option/accessory.
LOADING AND STORAGE
Loading - folding bag holder*
Folding up
12 V socket - cargo area
The electrical socket can be used for various
accessories designed for 12 Volts, e.g. display
screens, music players and mobile phones.
A folding bag holder in the floor keeps bags in
place and prevents them from overturning and
spreading their contents in the cargo area, and
can be opened up in three positions.
Lift the handle* on the upper floor and fold
up the floor.
Move the floor forwards to an appropriate
position and place it in the adjustment
groove.
Folding bag holder
It can be set to two adjustment positions and one
service position, as it is known, where it is fully
unfolded. There are also two floor combination
variants, one with adjustment positions in a tub
under the floor and one with adjustment positions in plastic rails. The raising below shows the
adjustment position in a tub under the floor.
The load on the central holder is max. 3 kg and
max. 10 kg on the outer holder.
3.
In service position, the floor is moved all the
way forwards towards the rear seat back and
placed in the plastic support in the centre.
Related information
•
•
Loading (p. 152)
Lower the cover to access the electrical socket.
•
The socket also provides voltage when the
remote control key is not in the ignition
switch.
IMPORTANT
Max. socket current is 10 A (120 W).
Loading - bag holder (p. 154)
NOTE
Remember that using the electrical socket
with the engine switched off involves the risk
of discharging the car's battery.
}}
* Option/accessory. 155
LOADING AND STORAGE
||
NOTE
The compressor for emergency puncture
repair (p. 328) has been tested and approved
by Volvo.
Cargo net*
A cargo net prevents cargo from being thrown
forward in the passenger compartment in the
event of heavy braking.
Attaching
NOTE
The easiest way to fit the safety net is via one
of the rear doors.
Related information
•
Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets (p. 152)
WARNING
It is necessary to ensure that the upper securing points of the safety net are fitted correctly
and that the puller-straps are secured properly. Damaged nets must not be used.
The cargo net is fitted into four mounting points.
For safety reasons, the cargo net must always be
correctly fastened and secured. The mesh is
made of a strong nylon fabric and secured
behind the front seat backrests.
WARNING
Loads in the luggage compartment must be
anchored well, and also have a correctly fitted
safety net.
156
* Option/accessory.
LOADING AND STORAGE
2.
Depress the button in the anchoring strap's
lock and thread the anchoring strap from
below through the lock.
Tension the cargo net with the anchoring
straps.
1.
Hat shelf
The hat shelf can be removed to provide additional cargo space.
Hat shelf removal
Hook the hooks into the roof mounting with
the anchoring strap locks turned towards
you.
Thread the cargo net's anchoring straps
through the eyes on the rear of the seat slide
rails - it is easier if the backrests are straightened and the seats are moved forward
slightly.
Pay attention to make sure that you do not
press the seat/backrest hard against the net
when the seat/backrest is moved back again
- only adjust until the seat/backrest makes
contact with the net.
IMPORTANT
If a seat/backrest is pushed backwards hard
into the safety net then the net and/or its
roof mounts may be damaged.
Undo the hat shelf lifting eyes on both sides.
Removal and storage
1.
Release the tension in the cargo net by
pressing in the button on the anchoring
strap's lock and feeding out the strap.
2.
Unhook the hooks from the roof mountings.
3.
Fold up the cargo net and place it in the
storage bag in the cargo area.
Unhook the front edge of the hat shelf and
remove it.
Related information
•
•
Loading (p. 152)
Loading - long load (p. 153)
Related information
•
•
Loading (p. 152)
Load retaining eyelets (p. 154)
157
LOCKS AND ALARM
LOCKS AND ALARM
Remote control key
Amongst other things, the remote control key is
used for locking/unlocking and starting the
engine.
There are three variants of key available Remote control key in basic version, Remote control key without PCC* and Remote control key
with PCC*.
Functionality
BasicA
Locking/
unlocking and
detachable key
blade
with
PCCB
•
Remote control key without PCC - with Keyless Drive* (p. 169) and keyless locking
(p. 171) and unlocking (p. 172).
•
Remote control key with PCC - also has an
information button and indicator lamps. Read
more about these unique functions (p. 165).
If you lose a remote control key (p. 160) then a
new one can be ordered at a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
All remote control keys have a detachable key
blade (p. 167) made of metal. The visible section
is available in two versions so that it is possible to
distinguish between the remote control keys.
More remote control keys can be ordered - but
not variants other than the one supplied with the
car. Up to six keys can be programmed and used
for one single car.
•
•
x
Keyless locking/unlocking
x
x
Keyless engine
starting
x
x
If there are children in the car:
x
Remember to switch off the supply to the
power windows by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car.
A
B
Remote control key - losing
The remaining remote control keys must be
taken to the Volvo workshop. The code of the
missing remote control key must be erased from
the system as a theft prevention measure. The
current number of keys registered to the car can
be checked in the menu system MY CAR. For a
description of the menu system, see MY CAR
(p. 113).
x
Information button and indicator lamps
x
without
PCCA
tions (p. 164) for a description of its functions.
Related information
Remote control key - functions (p. 164)
Remote control key - range (p. 165)
The car is supplied with two remote control keys.
WARNING
5-button key
6-button key
More information
•
160
Remote Control Key Basic - is a key in the
basic version, see Remote control key - func-
* Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Remote control key personalisation*
The key memory in the remote control key means
that certain settings in the car can be individually
adapted for different people.
The key memory function is available in combination with, for example, power* driver's seat (p. 84).
Settings for door mirrors (p. 106), driver's seat,
steering force (p. 186) and the combined instrument panel's theme, contrast and colour mode
(p. 67) can be stored in the key memory, depending on the car's equipment level.
The function1 can be activated/deactivated in the
menu system MY CAR. For a description of the
menu system, see MY CAR (p. 113).
When the function is activated, the settings are
automatically linked to the key memory. This
means that a change in a setting will automatically be saved in the specific remote control key's
memory.
1
2
Storing settings
WARNING
Proceed as follows in order to store the settings
and use the key memory in the remote control
key:
1.
Unlock the car with the remote control key in
whose memory the setting2 shall be stored.
2.
Make sure that the key memory function is
activated in the menu system MY CAR.
3.
Make the desired settings for e.g. the seat
and the door mirrors.
4.
The settings are stored in the current remote
control key's memory.
The next time the car is unlocked with the same
remote control key, the positions that are stored
in the key memory will be set automatically - providing that they have been changed since the last
time the current remote control key was used.
Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do
not play with the controls. Check that there
are no objects in front of, behind or under the
seat during adjustment. Make sure that none
of the passengers in the rear seat is in danger
of becoming trapped.
Changing settings
If several people each with a remote control key
approach the car, then the settings for e.g. seat
and door mirrors are implemented for the person
whose remote control key unlocks the driver's
door.
If the driver's door has been opened by person A
with remote control key A, but person B with
remote control key B shall drive, then the settings
can be changed as follows:
Emergency stop
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press one
of the setting buttons for the seat or memory
buttons in order to stop the seat.
•
Standing by the driver's door, or sitting
behind the steering wheel, person B presses
the button for unlocking on his/her remote
control key.
Restarting to reach the seat position stored in
the key memory is performed by pressing the
unlock button on the remote control key. The
driver's door must then be open.
•
Select one of three possible memories for
seat adjustment with seat button 1-3.
•
Adjust the seat and door mirrors manually.
Known as Car key memory in MY CAR.
This setting does not affect settings that have been stored in the power seat's memory function.
}}
* Option/accessory. 161
LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Related information
•
•
Remote control key - functions (p. 164)
Remote control key with PCC* - unique functions (p. 165)
Locking/unlocking - indicator
When the car is locked or unlocked using the
remote control key (p. 160) the direction indicators confirm that locking/unlocking was correctly
performed.
•
Locking - one flash and the door mirrors are
folded3 in.
•
Unlocking - two flashes and the door mirrors
are folded3 out.
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key in the car.
When locking, indication is given only if all locks
have been locked and all doors are closed. Indication is given when the last door has been
closed.
Selecting the function
Different options for indicating locking/unlocking
with light can be set in the menu system MY
CAR. For a description of the menu system, see
MY CAR (p. 113).
Same LED as alarm indicator (p. 182).
NOTE
Cars that are not equipped with alarm also
have this indicator.
Related information
•
•
Keyless drive* (p. 169)
Alarm indicator* (p. 182)
Lock indicator
A flashing LED by the windscreen verifies that
the car is locked.
3
162
Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.
* Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Remote control key - electronic
immobiliser
The electronic immobiliser is a theft protection
system that prevents the vehicle from being
started (p. 270) by an unauthorised person.
Each remote control key (p. 160) has a unique
code. The car can only be started with the correct
remote control key with the correct code.
The following error messages in the combined
instrument panel's information display are related
to the electronic immobiliser:
Message
Specification
Insert car
key
Error when reading the remote
control key during starting Remove the key from the ignition switch, press it in again and
make a new start attempt.
Car key
not
foundA
Error reading the remote control
key during starting - Try to start
again.
If the error persists: Insert the
remote control key into the ignition switch and try to start again.
Immobiliser Try
to start
again
A
Remote-controlled immobiliser with
tracking system*
Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking system4 makes it possible to track and locate the
car, and to remotely activate the immobiliser.
Contact your nearest Volvo dealer for more information and assistance with activating the system.
Related information
•
•
Remote control key (p. 160)
Remote control key - electronic immobiliser
(p. 163)
Error in immobiliser system during starting. If the error persists:
Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Only applies to cars with keyless start and lock system.
Related information
4
•
Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking
system* (p. 163)
•
Keyless drive* (p. 169)
Only certain markets and in combination with Volvo On Call*.
* Option/accessory. 163
LOCKS AND ALARM
Remote control key - functions
Unlocking (p. 174) - Unlocks the doors
and tailgate while the alarm is deactivated.
The remote control key has functions such as
locking and unlocking the doors.
Press and hold to open all windows simultaneously. For more information, see Global opening
(p. 176).
Functions
The function can be changed from unlocking all
doors simultaneously, to unlocking the driver's
door only with one press of the button and, after
a further press of the button - within ten seconds
- unlocking the remaining doors.
Remote control key with PCC* (Personal Car
Communicator).
Information button - see Remote control
key with PCC* - unique functions (p. 165)
for a description of its functionality.
Remote control key in basic version.
Locking
Unlocking
Approach light duration
Tailgate
Panic function
Function buttons
Locking – Locks the doors and tailgate
while the alarm is activated, see Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p. 174).
Press and hold to close all windows simultaneously. For more information, see Global opening
(p. 176).
WARNING
If windows are closed using the remote control key, check that nobody's hands are trapped.
The function can be changed in the menu system
MY CAR. For a description of the menu system,
see MY CAR (p. 113).
Approach light duration (p. 102) - Used
to switch on the car's lighting at a distance.
Tailgate (p. 176) - Unlocks and disarms
the alarm for the tailgate only.
Panic function – Used to attract attention
in an emergency.
Press and hold the button for at least three seconds or press it twice within three seconds to
activate the direction indicators and the horn.
The function can be turned off with the same
button once it has been active for at least five
seconds. Otherwise the function switches off
automatically after approx. three minutes.
Related information
•
164
Remote control key (p. 160)
* Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Remote control key - range
Remote control key functions (in its basic version) have a range of approx. 20 metres from
the car.
If the car does not verify a button being pressed move closer and try again.
Remote control key with PCC* unique functions
A remote control key with PCC* has enhanced
functionality compared with a remote control key
in basic version (p. 160) in the form of an information button and indicator lamps.
The remote control key functions may be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings,
topographical conditions, etc. The car can
always be locked/unlocked with the key blade
(p. 168).
The message extinguishes when the remote control key is returned to the car, followed by a press
of the OK button, or when all doors are closed.
–
Press the information button
.
> All indicator lamps flash for approximately
7 seconds and the light travels around on
the PCC. This indicates that information
from the car has been read.
If any of the other buttons are pressed
during this time then the reading is interrupted.
NOTE
If the remote control key is removed from the car
when the engine is running or key position I or II
(p. 80) is active, and all doors are closed, then a
warning message is shown in the information display in the combined instrument panel and a
short audio reminder signal sounds at the same
time.
Using the information button
NOTE
If none of the indicator lamps illuminates
with repeated use of the information button
and in different locations (as well as after 7
seconds and after the light has travelled
around on the PCC), contact a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Remote control key with PCC.
Information button
Indicator lamps display information in accordance
with the following illustration:
Indicator lamps
Using the information button enables access to
certain information from the car via the indicator
lamps.
Related information
•
•
Remote control key (p. 160)
Remote control key - functions (p. 164)
}}
* Option/accessory. 165
LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Remote control key with PCC* range
NOTE
If none of the indicator lamps illuminates
with repeated use of the information button
and in different locations (as well as after 7
seconds and after the light has travelled
around on the PCC), contact a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
The range of a remote control key with PCC
(Personal Car Communicator) for unlocking the
doors and tailgate is approx. 20 metres from the
car - the other functions are up to approx. 100
metres. If the car does not verify a button being
pressed - move closer and try again.
NOTE
Green continuous light – the car is locked.
Yellow continuous light – the car is unlocked.
Red continuous light – the alarm has been
triggered since the car was locked.
Red light flashing alternately in both indicator
lamps – The alarm was triggered less than 5
minutes ago.
Related information
•
166
Remote control key with PCC* - range
(p. 166)
The information button function may be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings,
topographical conditions, etc.
Related information
•
•
Keyless Drive* - range (p. 170)
Remote control key - range (p. 165)
Out of range
If the remote control key is too far away from the
car for the information to be read then the status
the car was last left in is shown, without the light
travelling around on the remote control key.
If several remote control keys are used for the
car then it is only the remote control key last
used for locking/unlocking that shows the correct status.
* Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Detachable key blade
The remote control key contains a detachable
key blade of metal with which some functions
can be activated and some operations carried
out.
The key blade's unique code is provided by
authorised Volvo workshops, which are recommended when ordering new key blades.
Detachable key blade - detaching/
attaching
Detaching/attaching the detachable key blade
(p. 167) is carried out as follows:
Removing the key blade
Related information
•
Detachable key blade - unlocking doors
(p. 168)
•
Child safety locks - manual activation
(p. 180)
•
Passenger airbag - activating/deactivating*
(p. 36)
Key blade functions
Using the remote control key's detachable key
blade:
•
the left-hand front door can be unlocked
manually (p. 168) if central locking cannot
be activated with the remote control key.
•
the rear doors' mechanical child safety locks
can be activated/deactivated (p. 180).
•
the right-hand front door and the rear doors
can be locked manually, e.g. in the event of
power failure.
•
•
the glovebox lock* can be unlocked.
the airbag for front passenger seat
(PACOS*) can be activated/deactivated.
Related information
•
•
•
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
At the same time pull the key blade straight
out backwards.
Attaching the key blade
Carefully refit the key blade into its location in the
remote control key (p. 160).
1.
Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into its
slot.
2.
Lightly press the key blade. You should hear
a "click" when the key blade is locked in.
Manual locking of the door (p. 174)
Locking/unlocking - glovebox (p. 176)
Passenger airbag - activating/deactivating*
(p. 36)
* Option/accessory. 167
LOCKS AND ALARM
Detachable key blade - unlocking
doors
Remote control key/PCC - replacing
the battery
The detachable key blade can be used if the
central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key - e.g. if the remote control
key's battery (p. 168) has been discharged.
The battery5 in the remote control key may need
to be replaced.
The left-hand front door can be opened as follows:
•
1.
Unlock the left-hand front door with the key
blade in the door handle's lock cylinder. For
more information, see Keyless Drive* unlocking with the key blade (p. 172).
NOTE
The battery for the remote control key should be
replaced if:
the information symbol is illuminated and the
display in the combined instrument panel
shows Car key battery low See manual
and/or
•
the locks repeatedly do not react to signals
from the remote control key within 20 metres
from the car.
When the door has been unlocked using the
key blade and is opened, the alarm is triggered.
2.
Deactivate the alarm by inserting the remote
control key in the ignition switch.
For cars with keyless start and lock system, see
Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the key blade
(p. 172).
Related information
•
•
5
168
Detachable key blade (p. 167)
Opening
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
At the same time pull the key blade
straight out backwards.
Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the hole
behind the spring-loaded catch and gently
prize the remote control key up.
Remote control key (p. 160)
Remote control key with PCC has two batteries.
* Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
NOTE
Turn the remote control key over with the buttons facing up, this is to avoid the batteries
falling out when it is opened.
Remote control key with PCC* with two
batteries
1.
Carefully prize out the batteries.
2.
First install one new one with the (+) side up.
3.
Position the white plastic tab in between and
finally install a second new battery with the
(+) side down.
IMPORTANT
Avoid touching new batteries and their contact surfaces with your fingers as this may
impair their function.
Battery replacement
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the batteries to be
used in the remote control key/PCC fulfil UN
Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, subsection 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory or
replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop
fulfil the above criteria.
Closely study how the battery/batteries are
secured on the inside of the cover, with
regard to their (+) and (–) sides.
Remote control key with one battery
1.
Carefully prize out the battery.
2.
Install a new one with the (+) side down.
6
Battery type
Use batteries with designation CR2430, 3 V.
Assembly
1.
Press the remote control key together.
2.
Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into its
slot.
3.
Lightly press the key blade. You should hear
a "click" when the key blade is locked in.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that exhausted batteries are disposed of in a manner which is kind to the
environment.
Related information
•
•
Keyless drive*
Cars equipped with Keyless Drive have a starting and locking system that can be operated
keylessly.
With the keyless start and lock system the car
can be started, locked and unlocked without the
remote control key (p. 160) inserted in the ignition switch6. It is enough to have the remote control key with you in a pocket. The system makes it
easier and more convenient to e.g. open the car
when your hands are full.
Both of the remote control keys included with the
car have keyless functionality. It is possible to
order more remote control keys.
The car's electrical system can be set to three
different levels - key position 0, I and II (p. 81) with the remote control key.
Related information
•
•
Keyless Drive* - range (p. 170)
•
Keyless Drive* - interference to remote control key function (p. 171)
Keyless Drive* - secure handling of the
remote control key (p. 170)
Remote control key (p. 160)
Remote control key - functions (p. 164)
Does not apply to Remote Control Key Basic.
* Option/accessory. 169
LOCKS AND ALARM
Keyless Drive* - range7
In order to unlock the doors or tailgate automatically without pressing a button on the remote
control key, a remote control key must be within
approx. 1.5 metres from the car's door handle or
tailgate.
The person who wishes to lock or unlock a door
must have the remote control key with him or her.
It is not possible to lock or unlock a door if the
remote control key is on the opposite side of the
car.
opened and then closed, then a warning message is shown in the information display in the
combined instrument panel and an audio
reminder signal sounds at the same time.
When the remote control key has been returned
to the car, the warning message goes off and the
audible reminder ceases once either/or:
•
•
a door has been opened and closed
•
The OK button on the direction indicator
stalk.
the remote control key has been inserted in
the ignition switch
Keyless Drive* - secure handling of
the remote control key
It is important to handle all remote control keys
with great care.
If one of the remote control keys8 has been left
in the car then the keyless functions are deactivated in case the car is e.g. locked with the other
remote control key that belongs to the car. This
prevents unauthorised entry.
The next time the car is unlocked with the other
remote control key the forgotten remote control
key is reactivated again.
Related information
•
•
The red rings in the above figure indicate the
range covered by the system's antennas.
IMPORTANT
Keyless drive* (p. 169)
Avoid leaving the remote control key with
PCC behind in the car. If someone breaks into
your car and takes the remote control key, it
will e.g. be possible to start the car by pressing the remote control key in the ignition
switch and then pressing the START/STOP
ENGINE button.
Keyless Drive* - antenna location (p. 173)
Related information
•
Keyless drive* (p. 169)
If all remote control keys are removed from the
car when the engine is running or key position I
or II (p. 81) is active, and if a door has been
7
8
170
Does not apply to cars with keyless starting
Applies to remote control key with PCC (Personal Car Communicator).
* Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Keyless Drive* - interference to
remote control key function
Electromagnetic fields and screening can interfere with the remote control key's keyless functions (p. 169).
Keyless Drive* - locking
NOTE
Cars equipped with keyless start and lock system have a touch-sensitive area on the outside
handle of the doors and a rubberised button
next to the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate.
In cars with automatic gearbox selectors, the
gear selector must be set to the P position;
otherwise the car can be neither locked nor
alarmed.
NOTE
NOTE
Do not place/store the remote control key
with keyless function near a mobile phone or
metal object - no closer than 10-15 cm.
Be aware that the system may be activated in
connection with car washing if the remote
control key is in range.
If interference is experienced nonetheless, use
the remote control key and the key blade like a
remote control key in basic version (p. 160).
Related information
•
•
Related information
•
Remote control key/PCC - replacing the battery (p. 168)
•
Keyless Drive* - secure handling of the
remote control key (p. 170)
•
Keyless Drive* - range (p. 170)
Keyless drive* (p. 169)
Alarm indicator* (p. 182)
Lock the doors and the tailgate by grasping one
of the door handles or pressing the smaller of the
tailgate's two rubberised buttons - the lock indicator (p. 162) in the windscreen confirms that
locking has been completed by starting to flash.
All doors and the tailgate must be closed before
the car can be locked - otherwise the car is not
locked.
* Option/accessory. 171
LOCKS AND ALARM
Keyless Drive* - unlocking9
Unlocking takes place when a hand grasps a
door handle or the tailgate's rubberised pressure
plate is actuated - open the door or tailgate as
normal.
NOTE
Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the
key blade
If central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are discharged, then the left-hand front door is
unlocked with the remote control key's detachable key blade (p. 167).
The door handles normally register a hand
that takes hold of the handle, but with thick
gloves on or after a very quick hand movement a second attempt may be required, or
with the glove taken off.
1.
Press the key blade approx. 1 cm straight up
into the hole on the underside of the door
handle/cover - do not prize.
> The plastic cover loosens automatically by
means of the torque when the blade is
pushed straight up and into the opening.
2.
Then insert the key blade in the lock cylinder
and unlock the door.
3.
Refit the plastic cover after unlocking.
NOTE
When the left-hand front door is unlocked
using the key blade and is opened, this triggers the alarm (p. 181). It is switched off by
inserting the remote control key in the ignition
switch, see Alarm* - remote control key not
working (p. 183).
Related information
•
•
Keyless drive* (p. 169)
Keyless Drive* - locking (p. 171)
Hole for key blade - to loosen the cover.
To access the lock cylinder, the door handle's
plastic cover must be removed - this is also done
with the key blade:
9
172
Related information
•
•
Keyless drive* (p. 169)
Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching
(p. 167)
Does not apply to remote control keys with keyless starting.
* Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Keyless Drive* - lock settings
Keyless Drive* - antenna location
Lock settings for cars equipped with keyless
start and lock system can be adapted by indicating in the menu system MY CAR which doors
are to be unlocked.
Cars equipped with keyless start and lock system have a number of built-in antennas positioned at different locations in the car.
For a description of the menu system, see MY
CAR (p. 113).
Related information
•
Related information
•
WARNING
People with pacemaker operations should not
come closer than 22 cm to the keyless system's antennae with their pacemaker. This is
to prevent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless system.
Keyless drive* (p. 169)
Keyless drive* (p. 169)
Rear bumper, centre
Door handle, left rear
Cargo area, central and furthest in under the
floor
Door handle, right rear
Centre console, under the rear section
Centre console, under the front section.
* Option/accessory. 173
LOCKS AND ALARM
Locking/unlocking - from the
outside
NOTE
Remember that the alarm is triggered when
the door is opened after being unlocked with
the key blade - the alarm is switched off when
the remote control key is inserted into the
ignition switch.
Locking/unlocking from the outside is carried
out using the remote control key (p. 164). The
remote control key can lock/unlock all doors, the
tailgate and the fuel filler flap. Different sequences for unlocking can be selected.
In order that the lock sequence can be activated,
the driver's door must be closed - if any of the
other doors or the tailgate is open, then it/they
is/are locked and the alarm is activated only
when it/they are closed. For cars equipped with
keyless locking system* all doors and the tailgate
must be closed, see Keyless Drive* - locking
(p. 171) and Keyless Drive* - unlocking (p. 172).
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key in the car.
If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the remote
control key, the battery may be discharged - lock
or unlock the left-hand front door with the
detachable key blade (p. 167).
WARNING
Be aware of the risk of being locked in the
car when it is locked from the outside using
the remote control key - it is then not possible
to open any of the doors from the inside with
the door controls. For more information, see
Deadlocks* (p. 178).
Manual locking of the door
In certain situations the car must be lockable
manually, e.g. in the event of power failure.
The left-hand front door can be locked with its
lock cylinder and the remote control key's
detachable key blade (p. 172).
Other doors have no lock cylinders and instead
have a lock switch on the end of each door which
must be depressed using the key blade - they are
then mechanically locked/blocked to prevent
them being opened from outside. The doors can
still be opened from the inside.
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within two minutes of unlocking, all are locked
again automatically. This function prevents the
car from being left unlocked unintentionally. For
cars with alarm, see Alarm* (p. 181).
Related information
•
•
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 175)
Remote control key - functions (p. 164)
Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up with
child safety locks (p. 180).
–
174
Remove the detachable key blade (p. 167)
from the remote control key. Insert the key
blade in the hole for lock reset and press the
key in until the key bottoms, approx. 12 mm.
* Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside.
The door is blocked against opening from
the outside. To return to position A, the inner
door handle must be opened.
Locking/unlocking - from the inside
Locking/unlocking can be performed using the
driver's door button for central locking. All doors
and tailgate (p. 176) can be locked or unlocked
simultaneously.
The doors can also be unlocked with the unlock
button on the remote control key (p. 160) or with
the central locking button on the driver's door.
A long press also opens all the side windows*
simultaneously (see also section Global opening
(p. 176)).
•
Locking
•
NOTE
•
A door's lock reset only locks that particular door - not all doors simultaneously.
•
A manually locked rear door with activated manual child safety locks (p. 180)
cannot be opened from either the outside
or the inside. A rear door that is locked in
this way can only be unlocked with the
remote control key or central locking button.
Related information
•
Remote control key/PCC - replacing the battery (p. 168)
Pull the door handle and open the door - the
door is unlocked and opened in one operation.
Both front doors must be closed for the central locking to be activated. Press the central
- all doors are locked. If
locking button
any of the rear doors is open, it will lock
when it is closed.
A long press also closes all the side windows
simultaneously (see also section Global opening
(p. 176)).
Automatic locking
Central locking
•
Press one side
the other side
of the button to lock to unlock.
Lamp in lock button
When the lamp in the central locking button for
the driver's door is illuminated it means that all
doors are locked.
Unlocking
A door can be unlocked from the inside in two
different ways:
•
Press the central locking button
The doors and tailgate are locked automatically
when the car starts to move.
The function can be activated/deactivated in the
menu system MY CAR. For a description of the
menu system, see MY CAR (p. 113).
Related information
•
Locking/unlocking - from the outside
(p. 174)
•
Alarm* (p. 181)
.
* Option/accessory. 175
LOCKS AND ALARM
Global opening
Locking/unlocking - glovebox
Locking/unlocking - tailgate
The global opening function opens or closes all
side windows simultaneously and can be used
for example to quickly air the car during hot
weather.
The glovebox (p. 151) can only be locked/
unlocked using the detachable key blade from
the remote control key (p. 160).
The tailgate can be opened, locked and
unlocked in a number of different ways.
For information on the key blade, see Detachable
key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 167).
Manual opening
Rubber plate with electrical contact.
Central locking button
A long press on the
symbol in the central
locking button or on the remote control key
opens all side windows simultaneously. The
button closes all
same procedure on the
side windows simultaneously.
Locking the glovebox:
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock cylinder.
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.
The keyhole is horizontal in the locked position.
Related information
•
•
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 175)
Pull out the key blade.
Power windows (p. 104)
•
Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order.
Related information
•
176
Remote control key - functions (p. 164)
The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock.
To open:
1.
Push down gently on the wider of the two
rubberised pressure plates under the outer
handle - the lock is released.
2.
Lift the outside handle in order to fully open
the tailgate.
LOCKS AND ALARM
IMPORTANT
•
Minimal force is required to release the
rear hatch lock - just gently press the
rubberised panel.
•
Do not place the lift force on the rubber
panel when opening the rear hatch - lift
the handle. Using too much force may
damage the electrical contacts on the
rubber panel.
Unlocking with the remote control key
movement sensors and the sensors for opening
the tailgate are disconnected.
Opening the car from inside
The doors remain locked and armed.
The tailgate can be opened in two different ways
using the remote control key:
One press - The tailgate is unlocked, but
remains closed - press lightly on the rubberised
pressure plate under the outer handle and lift the
tailgate. If the tailgate is not opened within
2 minutes then it is relocked and the alarm is rearmed.
Two presses (within 3 seconds) - The tailgate is
unlocked and the lock is disengaged at which
point the tailgate opens about a centimetre - lift
the outer handle to open. Rain, cold, frost or
snow could however prevent the tailgate from
disengaging from the lock.
Unlocking, tailgate
To open the tailgate:
–
NOTE
•
Using the remote control key (p. 160)
button
the alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed* and
the tailgate unlocked on its own.
The lock indicator (p. 162) on the instrument
panel stops flashing in order to show that not all
of the car is locked and the alarm's* level and
•
When the boot lid/tailgate is unlocked
with 2 presses from the remote control
key or from the car interior, automatic
relocking does not take place because
the boot lid/tailgate is open - it must be
closed manually.
After the boot lid/tailgate has been
closed it is unlocked and the alarm is not
armed - relock it and re-arm the alarm
with the remote control key's lock button
.
Press the button (1) on the headlamp control
panel.
> The lock releases and the tailgate opens
by a few centimetres.
Locking with the remote control key
–
Press the remote control key (p. 164) button
.
for locking
> The lock indicator on the instrument panel
starts flashing, which means that the car
is locked and the alarm* has been activated.
}}
* Option/accessory. 177
LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Related information
•
•
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 175)
Locking/unlocking - from the outside
(p. 174)
Locking/unlocking - fuel filler flap
Deadlocks*
The fuel filler flap is unlocked with the remote
control key (p. 160) button for unlocking (
).
Deadlocks10 means that all door handles are
mechanically disengaged, which prevents doors
being opened from the inside.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked until the car
is locked with the remote control key's button for
). If the car is locked while driving or
locking (
with the interior buttons then the fuel filler flap
remains unlocked.
The fuel filler flap's locking logic also follows the
locking or unlocking of the keyless system and
the central locking system.
Related information
•
•
Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing (p. 295)
Fuel filler flap - manual opening (p. 295)
The deadlocks are activated with the remote control key (p. 160) and are set after an approx. ten
seconds delay after the doors have been locked.
NOTE
If a door is opened within the delay time then
the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is
deactivated.
The car can only be unlocked with the remote
control key when the deadlocks function is activated. The front left door can also be unlocked
with the detachable key blade (p. 167).
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without first deactivating the deadlocks in order to
avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.
10
178
Only in combination with alarm.
* Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Temporary deactivation
switched off when the car is locked, only at
this time. (Note that the alarm's movement
and tilt detectors* are switched off at the
same time.)
During the next time the engine is started, the
system is reset to zero and the combined instrument panel shows the message Locks and
alarm Full guard at which the deadlocks and
the alarm's movement and tilt detectors are reengaged.
• Ask on exit: - Each time the engine is
switched off, the driver must answer the
question Activate Reduced Guard until
engine has started again?.
Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
MY CAR
OK MENU
If the deadlocks function shall be switched
off
TUNE knob control
–
EXIT
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
doors must be locked from the outside, then the
deadlocks function can be temporarily switched
off, which is carried out in the menu system MY
CAR. For a detailed description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 113).
NOTE
•
Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
•
If any of the doors are opened from the
inside then the alarm is triggered.
The above applies if the deadlocks have not
been deactivated temporarily.
Related information
•
Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the key blade
(p. 172)
Press OK/MENU and lock the car. (Note
that the alarm's movement and tilt detectors*
are switched off at the same time.)
> The next time the engine is started, the
system is reset to zero and the combined
instrument panel shows the message
Locks and alarm Full guard at which
the deadlocks function and the alarm's
movement and tilt detectors are reengaged.
In MY CAR one of the following options can be
selected:
If the locking system shall not be changed
• Activate once: - The combined instrument
–
Press EXIT and lock the car.
panel then shows Locks and alarm
Reduced guard and deadlocks are
* Option/accessory. 179
LOCKS AND ALARM
Child safety locks - manual
activation
NOTE
The child safety locks prevent children from
being able to open a rear door from the inside.
The child safety locks are located on the trailing
edge of the rear doors and are only accessible
when the doors are open.
Activate/deactivate child safety locks
•
A door's knob control only blocks that
particular door - not both rear doors
simultaneously.
•
Cars with an electric child safety lock do
not have a manual child lock.
Related information
•
Child safety locks - electrical activation*
(p. 180)
•
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 175)
Child safety locks - electrical
activation*
The child safety locks prevent children from
being able to open a rear door from the inside.
Activation
The electrical child safety locks can be activated/
deactivated in all key positions (p. 80) higher
than 0. Activation/deactivation can be performed
up to 2 minutes after switching off the engine,
provided that no door is opened.
Manual child safety locks. Not to be mixed up with manual door lock (p. 174).
–
Use the remote control key's detachable key
blade (p. 167) to turn the knob.
The door is blocked against opening from
the inside.
Control panel driver's door.
1.
Start the engine or choose a key position
higher than 0.
The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside.
180
* Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
2.
Press the button in the driver's door control
panel.
> The information display shows the message Rear child lock activated and the
button's lamp illuminates - the locks are
active.
When the electric child safety lock is active then
the rear:
•
windows can only be opened with the driver's
door control panel
•
doors cannot be opened from inside.
The current setting is stored when the engine is
switched off - if the child safety locks are activated at engine shutdown, the function will
remain activated the next time the engine is
started.
Related information
•
Child safety locks - manual activation
(p. 180)
•
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 175)
Alarm*
NOTE
The alarm is a device that warns in the event of
e.g. a break-in in the car.
The movement sensors trigger an alarm in
the event of movement in the passenger
compartment - air currents are also registered. For this reason the alarm is triggered if
the car is left with a window open or if the
passenger compartment heater is used.
Activated alarm is triggered if:
•
•
•
•
•
a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened11
a movement is detected in the passenger
compartment (if fitted with a movement
detector*)
To avoid this: Close the window when leaving
the car. If the car's integrated passenger
compartment heater (or a portable electric
heater) shall be used - direct the airflow from
the air vents so that they are not pointing
upwards in the passenger compartment.
Alternatively, reduced alarm level can be used,
Reduced alarm level* (p. 184).
the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with
a tilt detector*)
the starter battery's cable is disconnected
the siren is disconnected.
If there is a fault in the alarm system then the
information display in the combined instrument
panel shows a message. In which case, contact a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or alter components
in the alarm system yourself. Any such
attempts may affect the terms of the insurance.
Arming the alarm
–
Press the remote control key lock button.
Deactivate the alarm
–
11
Applies to certain markets.
Press the remote control key unlock button.
}}
* Option/accessory. 181
LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Deactivating a triggered alarm
–
Press the remote control key unlock button
or insert the remote control key in the ignition switch.
Alarm indicator*
Alarm* - automatic re-arming
The alarm indicator shows alarm system (p. 181)
status.
Automatic re-arming of the alarm (p. 181) prevents the car being left with the alarm disarmed
unintentionally.
Related information
•
•
If the car is unlocked with the remote control key
(p. 160)(and the alarm is disarmed) but none of
the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2
minutes, then the alarm is automatically rearmed. The car is relocked at the same time.
Alarm* - automatic re-arming (p. 182)
Alarm* - remote control key not working
(p. 183)
Related information
•
Alarm* - automatic arming (p. 183)
Same LED as lock indicator (p. 162).
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the
alarm system's status:
182
•
•
LED not lit – Alarm not armed
•
The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the
alarm (and until the remote control key is
inserted in the ignition switch and key position I is selected) – Alarm has been triggered.
The LED flashes once every other second –
Alarm is armed
* Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Alarm* - automatic arming
In certain countries the alarm(p. 181) is activated after a certain delay if the driver's door
was opened and closed but the car was not relocked.
Related information
•
Alarm signals* (p. 183)
Alarm* - remote control key not
working
If the alarm (p. 181) cannot be deactivated with
the remote control key, e.g. if the key's battery
(p. 168) is discharged - the car can be
unlocked, disarmed and the engine started as
follows:
1.
Open the left-hand front door with the
detachable key blade (p. 172).
> The alarm is triggered, the direction indicators flash and the siren sounds.
2.
Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch.
> The alarm is deactivated.
Alarm signals*
When the alarm (p. 181) is triggered a siren
sounds and all direction indicators flash.
•
A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is switched off. The siren has its own
battery and works independently of the car's
starter battery.
•
The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes
or until the alarm is switched off.
* Option/accessory. 183
LOCKS AND ALARM
Reduced alarm level*
Reduced guard means that the movement and
tilt detectors can be temporarily deactivated.
To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm - e.g. if
a dog is left in a locked car or during transport on
a car train or car ferry - temporarily deactivate the
movement and tilt detectors.
The procedure is the same as with the temporary
disengaging of deadlocks, see Deadlocks*
(p. 178).
Type approval - remote control key
system
Type approval for the remote control key system
can be read in the table.
Country/Area
China
Lock system, standard
Country/Area
EU, China
Hong Kong
Related information
•
•
Alarm* (p. 181)
Alarm indicator* (p. 182)
Keyless lock system (Keyless drive)
Country/Area
Related information
•
Remote control key (p. 160)
EU
Korea
184
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
DRIVER SUPPORT
Adjustable steering force*
Speed related power steering causes the steering wheel force to increase with the speed of the
car in order to give the driver enhanced sensitivity.
On motorways the steering feels firmer. Steering
is light and requires no extra effort when parking
and at low speed.
The driver can choose between three different
levels of steering force for road responsiveness
or steering sensitivity in the menu system MY
CAR (p. 113):
•
Related information
•
MY CAR (p. 113)
Electronic stability control (ESC) general
Stability system ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) helps the driver to avoid skidding and
improves the car's traction.
The activation of the ESC system during braking may be noticed as a throbbing sound. The car may accelerate
slower than expected when the accelerator pedal is depressed.
WARNING
Once there, search for Steering force level
and select Low, Medium or High.
•
The stability system ESC is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate
driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
ESC is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgement. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
This menu is not accessible when the car is moving.
NOTE
In certain situations the power steering may
become too hot and then needs to be temporarily cooled - during this time the power
steering operates with reduced power and
turning the steering wheel may then be perceived to be slightly heavier.
In parallel with the temporarily reduced steering assistance the combined instrument panel
shows a message.
186
The ESC system consists of the following functions:
•
•
•
Active Yaw Control
Spin Control
Traction control system
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
•
•
•
•
Engine drag control - EDC
Corner Traction Control - CTC
Corner Traction Control - CTC
CTC (Corner Traction Control) compensates for
understeer and allows higher than normal acceleration in a bend without wheelspin on the inner
wheel, e.g. on an arcing motorway entrance road
to quickly reach the prevailing traffic speed.
Driver Steering Recommendation – DSR
Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA
Active Yaw Control
The function checks the driving and brake force
of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the
car.
Spin Control
The function reduces engine power if the drive
wheels slip against the underlying surface in
order to maintain stability and traction.
Traction control system
The function is active at low speed and transfers
power from the driving wheel that is spinning to
the one that is not.
Engine drag control - EDC
EDC (Engine Drag Control) prevents involuntary
wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or engine
braking when driving in low gears on slippery
road surfaces.
Involuntary wheel locking while driving can,
amongst other things, impair the driver's ability to
steer the car.
Related information
•
Electronic stability control (ESC) - operation
(p. 188)
•
Electronic stability control (ESC) - symbols
and messages (p. 189)
Driver Steering Recommendation –
DSR
DSR (Driver Steering Recommendation) helps
the driver steer the car in the right direction when
there is reduced traction or when the ABS system engages.
The primary role of the DSR function is to help
the driver steer in the right direction when the car
is skidding.
DSR engages by applying slight torque to the
steering wheel in the direction in which the car
should be steered to maintain/achieve maximum
possible traction and stabilise the car.
Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA1
Trailer stability assist (p. 309) function is to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it begins
to snake. For more information, see Driving with a
trailer (p. 302).
NOTE
The function is deactivated if the driver
selects Sport mode.
1 Trailer
Stability Assist is included in the installation of the Volvo genuine towbar.
* Option/accessory. 187
DRIVER SUPPORT
Electronic stability control (ESC) operation
Selection of level - Sport mode
The ESC system is always activated - it cannot be
deactivated.
However, the driver can select
the Sport mode, which allows
for a more active driving experience.
In Sport mode the system
detects whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements and cornering are more active than in normal driving and
then allows controlled skidding with the rear section up to a certain level before it intervenes and
stabilises the car.
If the driver stops a controlled skid by releasing
the accelerator pedal, for example, then the ESC
system intervenes and stabilises the car.
With Sport mode, maximum traction is also
obtained if the car has become stuck, or when
driving on a loose surface - e.g. sand or deep
snow.
Proceed as follows to select Sport mode:
Sport mode is selected in the menu system MY
CAR. For a description of the menu system, see
MY CAR (p. 113).
188
Sport mode is indicated in the combined instrument panel by means of
this symbol illuminating with a constant
glow until the driver deselects the
function or until the engine is switched off - after
the next time the engine is started the ESC system is back in its normal mode once again.
Related information
•
Electronic stability control (ESC) - general
(p. 186)
•
Electronic stability control (ESC) - symbols
and messages (p. 189)
•
MY CAR (p. 113)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Electronic stability control (ESC) symbols and messages
Table
Symbol
Message
Specification
ESC Temporarily OFF
ESC system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake disc temperature - the function is reactivated
automatically when the brakes have cooled.
ESC Service required
ESC system disengaged.
•
•
Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
"Message"
There is a message in the combined instrument panel - read it!
Constant glow for
2 seconds.
System check when the engine is started.
Flashing light.
ESC system is being activated.
Constant glow.
Sport mode is activated.
and
NOTE: The ESC system is not deactivated in this mode - it is partially reduced.
}}
189
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
190
Related information
•
Electronic stability control (ESC) - general
(p. 186)
•
Electronic stability control (ESC) - operation
(p. 188)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Speed limiter*
A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse
cruise control - the driver regulates the speed
using the accelerator pedal but is prevented
from accidentally exceeding a pre-selected/set
speed by the speed limiter.
Steering wheel keypad and combined instrument panel
Digital and Analogue.
Related information
•
•
Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 191)
Speed limiter - temporary deactivation and
standby mode* (p. 193)
•
Speed limiter* - alarm for speed exceeded
(p. 194)
•
Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 194)
Speed limiter* - getting started
A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse
cruise control - the driver regulates the speed
using the accelerator pedal but is prevented
from accidentally exceeding a pre-selected/set
speed by the speed limiter.
Steering wheel keypad and combined instrument panel
Digital and Analogue.
Speed limiter - On/Off.
Speed limiter - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed
is resumed.
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed
is resumed.
Standby mode
Standby mode
Activate and adjust the max. speed.
Activate and adjust the max. speed.
Selected speed
Selected speed
Speed limiter active
Speed limiter active
}}
* Option/accessory. 191
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Switch on and activate
2.
When the speed limiter is active, its symbol (6) is
shown in combination with a mark (5) by the set
maximum speed in the combined instrument
panel.
Selection and storage of the highest possible
speed in the memory can be made both during a
journey and while stationary.
While driving
1.
2.
Scroll with the
button until the combined
instrument panel shows a mark (5) by the
desired maximum speed.
> The speed limiter is then active and the
selected max. speed is stored in the
memory.
Related information
•
Speed limiter* (p. 191)
Speed limiter* - changing speed
Changing the stored speed
Stored max. speed is changed with short or long
presses on the
or
steering wheel button.
To adjust +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph):
•
Use short presses - each press gives
+/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph).
To adjust +/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph):
to switch
Press the steering wheel button
on the speed limiter.
> The symbol (6) for speed limiter illuminates in the combined instrument panel.
When the car is moving at the desired highest possible speed: Press one of the steering
wheel buttons
or
until the combined
instrument panel shows a mark (5) next to
the desired maximum speed.
> The speed limiter is then active and the
selected max. speed is stored in the
memory.
•
Hold down the button and release it at the
required max. speed.
Last press made is stored in the memory.
Related information
•
Speed limiter* (p. 191)
When stationary
1.
192
Press the steering wheel button
on the speed limiter.
to switch
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Speed limiter - temporary
deactivation and standby mode*
A Speed Limiter (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but
is prevented from accidentally exceeding a preselected/set speed by the speed limiter.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
–
To temporarily deactivate the speed limiter and
set it in standby mode:
–
Press
.
> The combined instrument panel's
mark (5) changes colour from GREEN to
WHITE (Digital) or from WHITE to GREY
(Analogue) and the driver can temporarily
exceed the set maximum speed.
The speed limiter is automatically reactivated after the accelerator pedal is
released and the car's speed is slowed
down to below the selected/stored maximum speed - the mark (5) changes colour
from WHITE to GREEN (Digital) or GREY
to WHITE (Analogue) and the car's maximum speed is again limited.
The speed limiter is reactivated with one
. The mark (5) then changes
press on
colour from WHITE to GREEN (Digital) or
GREY to WHITE (Analogue) and the car's
maximum speed is limited again.
Temporary deactivation with the
accelerator pedal
Steering wheel keypad and instrument panel Digital and
Analogue.
The speed limiter can also be set in standby
mode with the accelerator pedal, e.g. for rapidly
accelerating the car out of a situation:
Depress the accelerator pedal fully.
> The combined instrument panel shows
the stored maximum speed with a coloured mark (5) and the driver can temporarily exceed the set maximum speed –
the mark (5) changes colour from GREEN
to WHITE (Digital) or WHITE to GREY
(Analogue) during that time.
Related information
•
Speed limiter* (p. 191)
Speed limiter - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed
is resumed.
Standby mode
Activate and adjust the max. speed.
Selected speed
Speed limiter active
* Option/accessory. 193
DRIVER SUPPORT
Speed limiter* - alarm for speed
exceeded
A Speed Limiter (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but
is prevented from accidentally exceeding a
pre-selected/set speed by the speed limiter.
On steep roads the speed limiter's engine braking effect may be inadequate and the selected
maximum speed is exceeded. The driver is alerted about this with an acoustic signal. The signal
is active until the driver has slowed to below the
selected maximum speed.
Speed limiter* - deactivation
Cruise control*
A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse
cruise control - the driver regulates the speed
using the accelerator pedal but is prevented
from accidentally exceeding a pre-selected/set
speed by the speed limiter.
The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps
the driver maintain an even speed, resulting in
more relaxing driving on motorways and long,
straight roads with regular traffic flows.
To deactivate the speed limiter:
–
NOTE
The alarm is only activated after 5 seconds if
the speed has been exceeded by at least
3 km/h (approx. 2 mph), provided that neither
or
buttons has been depressed
of the
during the last half minute.
Press the steering wheel button
.
> The combined instrument panel's (p. 191)
symbol for the speed limiter and the mark
for the set speed are extinguished. The
selected and stored speed are thus
deleted from the memory and cannot be
button.
resumed with the
The driver can then use the accelerator
pedal to choose a speed without limitation.
Related information
•
Overview
The steering wheel buttons and combined instrument
panel in cars without speed limiter2.
Speed limiter* (p. 191)
Related information
•
2
194
Speed limiter* (p. 191)
A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene
when the cruise control is not maintaining a
suitable speed and/or suitable distance.
Cruise control* - managing speed
It is possible to activate, set and change the
stored speed.
Activating and setting the speed
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility
for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.
Related information
The steering wheel buttons and combined instrument
panel in cars with speed limiter2.
Cruise control - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed
is resumed.
•
•
•
•
•
Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 195)
Cruise control* temporary deactivation and
standby mode (p. 197)
Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 198)
Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 199)
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 203)
Standby mode
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars without
speed limiter3.
Activate and adjust the speed.
Selected speed (GREY = Standby mode).
Cruise control active - WHITE symbol (GREY
= Standby mode).
2
3
A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
}}
* Option/accessory. 195
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WHITE - the car then follows the stored
speed.
NOTE
If any of the Cruise Control buttons are held
depressed for several minutes then it is
blocked and deactivated. To be able to reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be stopped
and the engine restarted.
NOTE
Cruise Control cannot be enabled at speeds
below 30 km/h (20 mph).
Changing the stored speed
Stored speed is changed with short or long
or
steering wheel button.
presses on the
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars with
speed limiter3.
To start the cruise control:
•
Press the steering wheel button for CRUISE
(without speed limiter) or
(with speed
limiter).
>
The cruise control symbol (6) in the combined instrument panel illuminates - Cruise
control is in standby mode.
To activate cruise control:
•
At the required speed - press the steering
or
.
wheel button
>
The current speed is stored in the memory
and the combined instrument panel's
marking (5) illuminates at the selected speed
and the symbol (6) changes from GREY to
3
196
Related information
•
Cruise control* (p. 194)
To adjust +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph):
•
Use short presses - each press gives
+/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph).
To adjust +/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph):
•
Hold down the button and release it at the
required speed.
Last press made is stored in the memory.
If speed is increased using the accelerator pedal
prior to pressing the
/
button, then it is the
car's current speed when the button is pressed
that is stored.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the cruise control setting - the car returns to the
last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.
A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Cruise control* temporary
deactivation and standby mode
The function can be temporarily deactivated and
set in standby mode.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
•
•
the foot brake is used
•
the gear lever/selector is moved to N position
•
the driver maintains speed higher than the
stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
the clutch pedal is depressed for longer than
1 minute5
The driver must then regulate the speed.
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars with
speed limiter4.
To temporarily disengage cruise control and set it
in standby mode:
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars without
speed limiter4.
•
Press
>
The combined instrument panel's
marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour
from WHITE to GREY - Cruise control is temporarily disengaged.
.
Standby mode due to driver
intervention
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set
automatically in standby mode if:
4
5
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Automatic standby mode
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set
in standby mode if:
•
•
•
wheels lose traction
engine speed is too low/high
speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph).
The driver must then regulate the speed.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Cruise control* (p. 194)
Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 195)
Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 198)
Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 199)
A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.
* Option/accessory. 197
DRIVER SUPPORT
Cruise control* - resume set speed
•
The cruise control (p. 194) (CC – Cruise
Control) helps the driver to maintain an even
speed.
Cruise control* temporary deactivation and
standby mode (p. 197)
•
Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 199)
After temporary deactivation and standby
mode (p. 197) it is possible to resume the set
speed.
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars with
speed limiter6.
To reactivate the cruise control from standby
mode:
•
Press the steering wheel button
>
The combined instrument panel's
marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour
from GREY to WHITE - the car then follows
the last stored speed.
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars without
speed limiter6.
.
NOTE
A marked speed increase may occur once the
speed has been resumed by selecting
.
Related information
•
•
6
198
Cruise control* (p. 194)
Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 195)
A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Cruise control* - deactivate
Distance Warning*
How it is deactivated is described here.
The Distance Warning function (Distance Alert)
warns the driver if the time interval to the vehicle
ahead becomes too short.
Distance Warning is active at speeds above
30 km/h (20 mph) and only reacts to vehicles
driving in front of the car, in the same direction.
No distance information is provided for oncoming,
slow or stationary vehicles.
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars with
speed limiter7.
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars without
speed limiter7.
The cruise control is switched off with the steering wheel button (1) or by switching off the
engine - the stored speed is deleted from the
memory and cannot be resumed with the
button.
Related information
•
•
•
•
7
8
Cruise control* (p. 194)
Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 195)
Orange-coloured warning lamp8.
Cruise control* temporary deactivation and
standby mode (p. 197)
An orange-coloured warning lamp in the windscreen illuminates with a constant glow if the distance to the vehicle in front is shorter than the
set time interval.
Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 198)
A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
}}
* Option/accessory. 199
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
NOTE
Distance warning is deactivated during the
time the adaptive cruise control is active.
once there, search for the Distance Alert function.
NOTE
The higher the speed the longer the calculated distance in metres for a given time interval.
Set time interval
The set time interval is also used by the function adaptive cruise control (p. 204).
WARNING
Distance warning only reacts if the distance
to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the preset
value - the speed of the driver's vehicle is not
affected.
Only use the time intervals permitted by local
traffic regulations.
Related information
Operation
•
•
Distance Warning* - limitations (p. 201)
Distance Warning* - symbols and messages
(p. 202)
Controls and symbol for time interval.
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Time interval - On.
Press the button in the centre console to switch
the function on or off. The function is switched on
if one lamp is illuminated in the button.
Some combinations of the selected equipment
leave no vacant space for a button in the centre
console - in which case, the function is operated
in the car's menu system MY CAR (p. 113) -
200
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be selected
and shown in the combined
instrument panel as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the
longer the time interval. One
line corresponds to
approximately 1 second to the vehicle in front,
5 lines approximately 3 seconds.
The same symbol is also shown when adaptive
cruise control (p. 203) is activated.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Distance Warning* - limitations
This function, which uses the same radar sensor
as Adaptive cruise control (p. 203) and Collision
warning with auto brake (p. 228), has certain limitations.
Related information
•
•
Distance Warning* (p. 199)
Distance Warning* - symbols and messages
(p. 202)
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections or strong variations in light intensity, as well as wearing sunglasses, could mean that the warning light in
the windscreen cannot be seen.
Poor weather or winding roads could affect
the radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles
in front.
The size of other vehicles could also affect
detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This
could mean that the warning lamp illuminates
at a shorter distance than the setting or that
the warning is temporarily absent.
Extremely high speeds can also cause the
lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than
that set due to limitations in sensor range.
For further information on radar sensor limitations, see Radar sensor - limitations (p. 216) and
Collision warning system* - operation (p. 232).
* Option/accessory. 201
DRIVER SUPPORT
Distance Warning* - symbols and
messages
panel if the function is reduced due to its limitations (p. 201).
The function has certain symbols and messages
that can be shown in the combined instrument
SymbolA
Message
Specification
Radar blocked See
manual
Distance Warning temporarily disengaged.
Radar sensor (p. 216) is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or
if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
For information, see Radar sensor - limitations (p. 216).
Collision warning
Service required
A
202
Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake (p. 233) fully or partially disengaged.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
The symbols are schematic.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)*
WARNING
The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an
even speed combined with a pre-selected time
interval to the vehicle ahead.
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene
when the adaptive cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed or suitable distance.
The adaptive cruise control provides a more
relaxing driving experience on long journeys on
motorways and long straight main roads in
smooth traffic flows.
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all
traffic, weather and road conditions.
Read all the sections about the adaptive
cruise control in the owner's manual in order
to learn about its limitations, of which the
driver should be aware before it is used.
The driver sets the desired speed (p. 206) and
time interval to the car in front. When the radar
detector detects a slower vehicle in front of the
car, the speed is automatically adapted to that.
When the road is clear again the car returns to
the selected speed.
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the correct distance and speed,
even when the adaptive cruise control is
being used.
If the adaptive cruise control is switched off or
set to standby mode and the car comes too close
to a vehicle in front, then the driver is warned
instead by a Distance Alert (p. 199) about the
short distance.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of adaptive cruise control components must only be performed at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
•
Adaptive cruise control* - managing speed
(p. 206)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - set time interval
(p. 207)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - temporary deactivation, and standby mode (p. 208)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking another
vehicle (p. 209)
•
•
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate (p. 209)
Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue assistance
(p. 210)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise control functionality (p. 212)
•
•
•
Radar sensor (p. 216)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and messages (p. 214)
Radar sensor - limitations (p. 216)
Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing and
action (p. 213)
Automatic gearbox
Cars with automatic gearbox have enhanced
functionality with the adaptive cruise control's
Queue assistance (p. 210) function.
Related information
•
•
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 204)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 205)
* Option/accessory. 203
DRIVER SUPPORT
Adaptive cruise control* - function
Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise control system and a coordinated spacing system.
Function overview
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver must intervene if the
system does not detect a vehicle in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake for
humans or animals, and not for small vehicles
such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for
oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and
objects.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water
or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in
poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip
roads.
Function
overview9.
Warning lamp - braking by driver required
Steering wheel (p. 87) keypad
Radar sensor (p. 216)
Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise control system and a coordinated spacing system.
The distance to the vehicle ahead is mainly
measured by a radar sensor. The cruise control
function regulates the speed with acceleration
and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a
low sound when they are being used by the
adaptive cruise control.
WARNING
The adaptive cruise control aims to control the
speed in a smooth way. In situations that demand
sudden braking the driver must brake himself/
herself. This applies with large differences in
speed, or if the vehicle in front brakes heavily.
Due to limitations in the radar sensor (p. 216)
braking may come unexpectedly or not at all.
The adaptive cruise control can be activated to
follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h10
(20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph). If the
speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph) or if the
engine speed becomes too low, the cruise control is set in standby mode at which automatic
braking ceases - the driver must then take over
himself/herself to maintain a safe distance to the
vehicle in front.
The brake pedal moves when the adaptive
cruise control brakes. Do not rest your foot
beneath the brake pedal - it may then
become trapped.
9 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may differ depending on car model.
10 Queue Assist (p. 210) in cars with automatic gearbox can operate in the range
204
The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the
vehicle ahead in the same lane according to what
the driver set for time interval (p. 207). If the
radar sensor cannot see any vehicle in front then
the car will instead maintain the speed set and
stored by the driver. This also takes place if the
speed of the vehicle in front exceeds the stored
speed.
0-200 km/h (0-125 mph).
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Warning lamp - braking by driver
required
NOTE
The warning lamp may be difficult to see in
strong sunlight or when wearing sunglasses.
Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacity
that is equivalent to approx. 40% of the car's
braking capacity.
WARNING
The adaptive cruise control only warns of
vehicles which the radar sensor has detected.
Hence the warning may not be given, or it
may be given with a certain delay. Do not wait
for a warning without braking when so
required.
Adaptive cruise control* - overview
Operation of the adaptive cruise control (p. 203)
and steering wheel keypad varies depending on
whether or not the car is equipped with speed
limiter (p. 191)12.
Adaptive cruise control with Speed
limiter
Steep roads and/or heavy load
Audio-visual warning signal in the event of a collision
risk11.
If the car needs to be braked more heavily than
the adaptive cruise control capacity and the driver
does not brake, then the warning lamp and warning sound from the Collision warning system
(p. 228) are used in order to alert the driver that
immediate intervention is required.
Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is
primarily intended for use when driving on level
road surfaces. It may have difficulty in keeping
the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when
driving on steep downhill slopes, with a heavy
load or with a trailer - in which case, be extra
attentive and ready to slow down.
Related information
•
•
•
Cruise control - On/Off.
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 203)
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed
is resumed.
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 205)
Standby mode
Cruise control* (p. 194)
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Activate and adjust the speed.
11
12
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
}}
* Option/accessory. 205
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Green marking at stored speed (WHITE =
standby mode).
Time distance
ACC is active at the GREEN symbol (WHITE
= standby mode).
Time distance
ACC is active at the GREEN symbol (WHITE
= standby mode).
Adaptive cruise control without Speed
limiter
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed
is resumed.
Cruise control - On/Off or Standby mode.
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Related information
•
•
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 203)
Adaptive cruise control* - managing
speed
To start the ACC:
•
Adaptive cruise control* - managing speed
(p. 206)
- a simiPress the steering wheel button
lar WHITE symbol illuminates in the combined instrument panel (8) which shows that
the adaptive cruise control is in standby
mode (p. 208).
•
Adaptive cruise control* - set time interval
(p. 207)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - temporary deactivation, and standby mode (p. 208)
•
At the required speed - press the steering
or
.
wheel button
•
Cruise control* (p. 194)
>
The current speed is stored in the memory,
the combined instrument panel shows a
"magnifying glass" (6) around the stored
speed for a second or so and its marking
changes from WHITE to GREEN.
To activate ACC:
When this symbol changes colour from
WHITE to GREEN, ACC is active and
the car maintains the stored speed.
Only when the symbol shows
an image of another vehicle is
the distance to the vehicle in
front controlled by ACC.
Activate and adjust the speed.
(Not used)
Green marking at stored speed (WHITE =
standby mode).
206
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
At the same time a speed
range is marked:
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
NOTE
•
the higher speed with GREEN marking is the
pre-programmed speed
•
the lower speed is the speed of the vehicle
in front.
If any of the adaptive cruise control buttons
are held depressed for several minutes then
the function is blocked and deactivated. To be
able to reactivate it, the car must be stopped
and the engine restarted.
In certain situations it cannot be reactivated in which case, the combined instrument panel
(p. 214) shows Adaptive cruise control
unavailable.
Changing the stored speed
Stored speed is changed with short or long
or
steering wheel button.
presses on the
To adjust +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph):
•
Use short presses - each press gives
+/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph).
To adjust +/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph):
•
Hold down the button and release it at the
required speed.
Last press made is stored in the memory.
If speed is increased using the accelerator pedal
/
button, then it is the
prior to pressing the
car's current speed when the button is pressed
that is stored.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 203)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 205)
Cruise control* (p. 194)
Adaptive cruise control* - set time
interval
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be selected
and shown in the combined
instrument panel as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the
longer the time interval. One
line corresponds to
approximately 1 second to the vehicle in front,
5 lines approximately 3 seconds.
To set/change the time distance:
•
Turn the steering wheel button set's thumbwheel (or use the
/
buttons for cars
without Speed limiters).
At low speed, when the distances are short, the
adaptive cruise control increases the time interval
slightly.
The adaptive cruise control allows the time interval to vary noticeably in certain situations in order
to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front
smoothly and comfortably.
Note that a short time interval only allows the
driver a short time to react and take action if any
unforeseen traffic problem should arise.
The same symbol is also shown when Distance
Alert (p. 199) is activated.
}}
* Option/accessory. 207
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
NOTE
Only use the time intervals permitted by local
traffic regulations.
If the adaptive cruise control does not appear
to react when activated, this may be because
the time distance to the vehicle in front is preventing an increase in speed.
The higher the speed the longer the calculated distance in metres for a given time interval.
Adaptive cruise control* - temporary
deactivation, and standby mode
•
the gear selector is moved to N position
(automatic gearbox)
The adaptive cruise control can be temporarily
deactivated and set in standby mode.
•
the driver maintains speed higher than the
stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
Temporary deactivation/standby mode
- with speed limiter
The driver must then regulate the speed.
To temporarily disengage adaptive cruise control
and set it in standby mode:
•
Press the steering wheel button
This symbol and stored speed marking
then changes colour from GREEN to
WHITE.
Read more how speed is handled (p. 206).
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 203)
Temporary deactivation/standby mode
- without speed limiter
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 205)
To temporarily disengage adaptive cruise control
and set it in standby mode:
Cruise control* (p. 194)
•
Press the steering wheel button
Standby mode due to driver
intervention
The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set automatically in standby mode if:
•
•
13
208
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
For more information, see the sections Managing
speed (p. 206) and Overtaking another vehicle
(p. 209).
Automatic standby mode
The adaptive cruise control is dependent on
other systems, e.g. Stability system ESC (p. 186).
If any of these systems stops working, the adaptive cruise control is deactivated automatically.
In the event of automatic deactivation a signal will
sound and the message Adaptive cruise
control cancelled is shown in the combined
instrument panel. The driver must then intervene
and adapt the speed and distance to the vehicle
ahead.
the foot brake is used
An automatic deactivation can be due to:
the clutch pedal is depressed for longer than
1 minute13
•
•
•
the driver opens the door
the driver takes off his seatbelt
engine speed is too low/high
Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
•
•
•
•
wheels lose traction
Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking
another vehicle
brake temperature is high
ACC can also assist during overtaking.
the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet snow
or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).
When the car is following another vehicle and the
driver indicates an impending overtaking
manoeuvre with the direction indicator15, the
adaptive cruise control helps to briefly accelerate
the car towards the vehicle in front.
speed has fallen below 30 km/h14 (20 mph)
For more information on symbols, messages and
their meaning, see section Symbols and messages in the display (p. 214).
Resume set speed
Adaptive cruise control in standby mode is reactivated with one press on the steering wheel but- the speed is then set to the last stored
ton
speed.
The function is active at speeds above 70 km/h
(43 mph).
Read more about the different time intervals (p. 207) to the vehicle in front.
Read more about how you manage the
speed (p. 206).
NOTE
WARNING
A marked speed increase may occur once the
.
speed has been resumed by selecting
Be aware that this function can be activated
in more situations other than during overtaking, e.g. when a direction indicator is used to
indicate a change of lane or exit to another
road - the car will then accelerate briefly.
Related information
•
•
•
14
15
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 203)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 205)
Cruise control* (p. 194)
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate
Keypad with Speed limiter
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged with a
short press of the steering wheel button
. The
set speed is cleared and cannot be resumed with
button.
the
Keypad without Speed limiter
A short press on the steering wheel button
sets the adaptive cruise control in standby mode.
With a further short press it is deactivated. The
set speed is cleared and cannot be resumed with
button.
the
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 203)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 205)
Cruise control* (p. 194)
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 203)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 205)
Cruise control* (p. 194)
Does not apply to a car with Queue Assist - it can go all the way down to 0 km/h.
On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.
* Option/accessory. 209
DRIVER SUPPORT
Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue
assistance
Extended speed range
NOTE
Queue assistance also provides the adaptive
cruise control with enhanced functionality at
speeds lower than 30 km/h (20 mph).
In cars with automatic gearbox the adaptive
cruise control is supplemented with the queue
assistance function (also referred to as "Queue
Assist").
Queue assistance has the following functions:
•
•
•
In order to activate the cruise control the driver's door must be closed and the driver must
be wearing the seatbelt.
With an automatic gearbox, the adaptive cruise
control can follow another vehicle within the
range 0-200 km/h (0-125 mph).
Extended speed range - also at lower than
30 km/h (20 mph) and at stationary
Change of target
NOTE
Change of target
Learn more about how you manage the speed
(p. 203) and different time intervals to the vehicle
in front (p. 207).
See more information under the heading
"Termination of automatic braking at a standstill".
Activation of the cruise control below
30 km/h (20 mph) requires a vehicle in front
within a reasonable distance.
Automatic braking ceases when stationary
Note that the lowest programmable speed for the
adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) even though the cruise control is capable of following another vehicle down to 0 km/h, a lower
speed cannot be selected.
NOTE
The Queue Assist function can keep the car
stationary for a maximum of 4 minutes - then
the brakes release.
For shorter stops in connection with inching in
slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is automatically resumed if the stops do not exceed
approx. 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the
car in front starts moving again then the cruise
control is set in standby mode (p. 208) with automatic braking. The driver must then reactivate it
in one of the following ways:
•
Press the steering wheel button
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there
may be stationary traffic in front.
When the adaptive cruise control is following
another vehicle at speeds lower than 30 km/h
(20 mph) and the target is changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, the cruise control will brake for the stationary vehicle.
...or...
210
•
Depress the accelerator pedal.
>
The cruise control will then resume following
the vehicle in front.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
When the adaptive cruise control is following
a vehicle in front at speeds in excess of
30 km/h (20 mph) and the target is changed
from a vehicle in front to a stationary vehicle,
the adaptive cruise control will ignore the stationary vehicle and instead select the stored
speed.
•
This means that the brakes are released and the
car will start to roll - the driver must therefore
intervene and brake the car himself in order to
maintain its position.
The driver must intervene him/herself and
brake.
1.
Acoustic alarm (pinging) and text message.
2.
A warning lamp in the windscreen also
starts to flash.
3.
"Stabbing" braking occurs.
For more information on symbols, messages
and their meaning, see the section Symbols
and messages in the display (p. 214).
Queue assistance releases the foot brake and is
set to standby mode in these situations as well:
•
the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
pedal
In the following situations, queue assistance
stops automatic braking at a standstill:
•
the gear selector is moved to P, N or R position
•
•
•
the driver sets the cruise control in standby
mode
•
the parking brake is applied.
Termination of automatic braking at a
standstill
the driver opens the door
the driver takes off his seatbelt.
Cruise control* (p. 194)
The driver's attention is drawn to this over
several stages, with increasing intensity:
when the speed is below 5 km/h (5 mph)
and the cruise control is uncertain whether
the target object is a stationary vehicle or
some other object, e.g. a speed bump.
when the speed is below 5 km/h (5 mph)
and the vehicle in front turns off so the
cruise control no longer has a vehicle to follow.
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 203)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 205)
IMPORTANT
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged and set
in standby mode:
•
•
•
•
Queue Assist can keep the car stationary for
a maximum of 4 minutes - then the brakes
release.
Automatic standby mode with change
of target
•
Related information
* Option/accessory. 211
DRIVER SUPPORT
Adaptive cruise control* - switch
cruise control functionality
Changing from ACC to CC
A symbol for active cruise control is shown in the
combined instrument panel:
CC
ACC
Cruise Control
Adaptive Cruise Control
Cruise control
Adaptive cruise control
Changing back from CC to ACC
Switch off the cruise control (CC) with 1-2
presses on the
button. The next time the system is switched on it is the adaptive cruise control (ACC) that is activated.
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 205)
•
Cruise control* (p. 194)
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 203)
Adaptive cruise control* - temporary deactivation, and standby mode (p. 208)
With one press of the button the adaptive element (spacing system) in the adaptive cruise
control (p. 203) is deactivated, at which point the
car only follows the set/stored speed.
•
Hold down the steering wheel button
the combined instrument panel's symbol
to
.
changes from
>
This activates Cruise Control CC.
WARNING
The car no longer brakes automatically after
switching from ACC to CC - it merely follows
the set speed.
212
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Adaptive cruise control* - fault
tracing and action
If the combined instrument panel shows the message Radar blocked See manual then it
means that the adaptive cruise control's radar
sensor (p. 216) cannot detect other vehicles in
front of the car.
The following table presents examples of possible causes for a message being shown along
with the appropriate action:
This message indicates that neither of the functions for Distance Alert (p. 199) or Collision
Warning with Auto Brake (p. 228) are working.
Cause
Action
The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow.
Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.
Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals.
No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar
signals.
No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy road surface.
The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains.
Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no longer
blocked.
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 203)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 205)
Cruise control* (p. 194)
* Option/accessory. 213
DRIVER SUPPORT
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols
and messages
some examples - follow the recommendation
given if appropriate:
Sometimes the adaptive cruise control may display a symbol and/or text message. Here are
SymbolA
Message
Specification
The symbol is WHITE
Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode (p. 208).
The symbol is GREEN
The car maintains the stored speed.
Standard cruise control is selected manually.
Set ESC to Normal to enable
Cruise
The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated until ESC has been set in Normal mode - Stability system
(p. 186).
Adaptive cruise control cancelled
The adaptive cruise control has been deactivated - the driver has to regulate the speed himself.
Adaptive cruise control
unavailable
The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated.
This could be due to:
•
•
brake temperature is high
the radar sensor is blocked by e.g. wet snow or rain.
For more information about fault tracing, see section Fault tracing and action (p. 213)
214
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
SymbolA
Message
Specification
Radar blocked See manual
The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disengaged.
•
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if
slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
The driver can then choose to switch to normal Cruise control (p. 194) (CC) - a text message provides information on appropriate alternatives.
Read more about radar sensor limitations (p. 216).
Adaptive cruise control Service required
A
B
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged.
•
Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Press brake to hold vehicle +
acoustic alarm + warning light in
windscreen + "pulling" brakesB
The car is at a standstill and the adaptive cruise control will release the foot brake, which is why the car may
start rolling soon.
Below 30 km/h Lead vehicle
requiredB
Shown in the event of attempts to activate the adaptive cruise control at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph)
without a vehicle in front within the activation distance.
•
The driver must brake himself/herself. The message remains and the alarm sounds until the driver
depresses the brake pedal or uses the accelerator pedal.
The symbols are schematic.
Only with Queue Assist.
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 203)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 205)
Cruise control* (p. 194)
* Option/accessory. 215
DRIVER SUPPORT
Radar sensor
The function of the radar sensor is to detect cars
or larger vehicles in the same direction, in the
same lane.
The radar sensor is used by the following functions:
•
•
•
Distance Warning*
Adaptive cruise control*
Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Pedestrian Detection*
IMPORTANT
In the event of visible damage to the car's
grille, or if you suspect that the radar sensor
may be damaged:
•
Contact a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
The function may completely or partially disappear - or malfunction - if the grille, the
radar sensor or its bracket is damaged or has
loosened.
•
•
Collision warning system* (p. 228)
Radar sensor - limitations
Distance Warning* (p. 199)
A radar sensor (p. 216) has certain limitations due to its limited field of vision for example.
The capacity of the adaptive cruise control to
detect a vehicle in front is significantly reduced if:
•
the speed of vehicles in front is significantly
different from your own speed
•
its radar sensor becomes blocked - e.g. in
heavy rain or slush, or if other objects have
collected in front of the radar sensor.
NOTE
Keep the surface in front of the radar sensor
clean.
Field of vision
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In
some situations another vehicle is not detected,
or the detection is made later than expected.
Modification of the radar sensor could result in it
being illegal to use.
Related information
•
•
216
Radar sensor - limitations (p. 216)
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 203)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene
when the adaptive cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed or suitable distance.
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver must intervene if the
system does not detect a vehicle in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake for
humans or animals, and not for small vehicles
such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for
oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and
objects.
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all
traffic, weather and road conditions.
Read all the sections about the adaptive
cruise control in the owner's manual in order
to learn about its limitations, of which the
driver should be aware before it is used.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water
or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in
poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip
roads.
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the correct distance and speed,
even when the adaptive cruise control is
being used.
WARNING
Accessories or other objects such as auxiliary
lamps must not be fitted in front of the grille.
ACC field of vision.
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 203)
Collision warning system* (p. 228)
Distance Warning* (p. 199)
Sometimes the radar sensor is late at detecting vehicles at close distances - e.g. a vehicle
that drives in between the car and vehicles in
front.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehicles not driving in the centre of the lane can
remain undetected.
In bends the radar sensor may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from
view.
* Option/accessory. 217
DRIVER SUPPORT
Type approval - radar system
Type approval for the car's radar units can be
seen in the following table.
Market
ACCA
BLISB
Symbol
Type approval
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra
interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo e não pode causar interferência
a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
✓
Modelo: L2C0038TR
1071-10-3451
Brazil
EAN: 07897843800248
Modelo: L2C0055TR
✓
1500-15-8065
EAN: 07897843840978
Europe
✓
✓
Hereby, Delphi Electronics & Safety declares that L2C0038TR / L2C0055TR are in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive
1999/5/EC.
The Declaration of Conformity may be consulted at Delphi Electronics & Safety / 2151 E.
Lincoln Road / Kokomo, Indiana 46902 USA
TRA
✓
REGISTERED No: 0018923/09
DEALER No: DA37380/15
The United Arab Emirates
TRA
✓
REGISTERED No: ER37357/15
DEALER No: DA37380/15
218
DRIVER SUPPORT
Market
Indonesia
ACCA
BLISB
✓
Symbol
Type approval
14785/POSTEL/2010 1982
✓
38806/SDPPI/2015 4927
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2009/87
✓
Equipment type: Low Power Device (LPD)
Jordan
✓
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2015/3
Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
Certification No.
✓
DPH-L2C0038TR
Korea
✓
Certification No.
MSIP-CMI-DPH-L2C0055TR
AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
✓
Numero d'agrement : MR 4838 ANRT 2009
Date d'agrement : 22/05/2009
Morocco
AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC
✓
NUMÉRO D’AGRÉMENT: MR 9929 ANRT 2014
DATE D’AGRÉMENT: 26/12/2014
Singapore
✓
✓
Complies with IDA Standards DA105753
}}
219
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Market
ACCA
BLISB
APPROVED
South Africa
✓
✓
A
B
ACC = Adaptive Cruise Control
BLIS = Blind Spot Information
Related information
•
220
Radar sensor (p. 216)
Type approval
TA-2009/163
✓
Taiwan
Symbol
TA-2014/2390
APPROVED
CCAB09LP4590T3
✓
CCAB15LP0680T0
DRIVER SUPPORT
City Safety™
IMPORTANT
City Safety™ is a function for helping the driver
to avoid a collision when driving in queues,
amongst other things, when changes in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in attention,
could lead to an incident.
Maintenance and replacement of City
Safety™ components must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
The City Safety™ function is active at speeds
below 50 km/h (30 mph) and it helps the driver
by automatically braking the car in the event of
imminent risk of collision with vehicles in front,
should the driver not react in time by braking
and/or steering away.
City Safety™ does not engage in all driving
situations or traffic, weather or road conditions.
City Safety™ does not react to vehicles driving in a different direction from the car, to
small vehicles and motorcycles or to people
and animals.
City Safety™ can prevent collision at a speed
difference of less than 15 km/h (9 mph) - at
a higher speed difference, it is only possible
to reduce collision speed. In order to obtain
full brake function, the driver must depress
the brake pedal.
City Safety™ is designed to be activated as late
as possible in order to avoid unnecessary intervention.
City Safety™ must not be used as an excuse for
the driver to change his/her driving style. If the
driver solely relies on City Safety™ to do the
braking, there might be a risk of a collision
sooner or later.
If the car is also equipped with Collision Warning
with Auto Brake* (p. 228) these two systems
complement each other.
City Safety™ - symbols and messages
(p. 227)
WARNING
City Safety™ is activated in situations where the
driver should have started braking earlier, which
is why it cannot help the driver in every situation.
The driver or passengers normally only notice City
Safety™ if a situation arises where the car is
extremely close to being in a collision.
•
Never wait for City Safety™ to engage. The
driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the proper distance and speed.
Related information
•
•
•
•
City Safety™ - limitations (p. 223)
City Safety™ - function (p. 222)
City Safety™ - operation (p. 222)
City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 225)
* Option/accessory. 221
DRIVER SUPPORT
City Safety™ - function
City Safety™ detects the traffic in front of the
car with a laser sensor (p. 225) fitted in the top
edge of the windscreen. If there is an imminent
risk of collision, City Safety™ will automatically
brake the car, which may be experienced as
heavy braking.
If the difference in speed between the vehicles is
greater than 15 km/h (9 mph) then City Safety™
may not avoid the collision on its own - to obtain
full brake force, the driver must depress the
brake pedal and this could then make it possible
to avoid a collision, even at speed differences
above 15 km/h (9 mph).
When the function is activated and brakes, the
combined instrument panel shows a message
(p. 227) to the effect that the function is/has
been active.
City Safety™ - operation
City Safety™ is a function for helping the driver
to avoid a collision when driving in queues,
amongst other things, when changes in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in attention,
could lead to an incident.
On and Off
NOTE
The City Safety™ function is activated automatically when the engine is started.
NOTE
When City Safety™ brakes, the brake lights
come on.
Related information
Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window16.
If the speed difference is 4-15 km/h (3-9 mph)
in relation to the vehicle in front then City
Safety™ can completely avoid a collision.
•
•
•
City Safety™ (p. 221)
City Safety™ - operation (p. 222)
City Safety™ - limitations (p. 223)
City Safety™ activates a short, sharp braking and
stops the car in normal circumstances, just
behind the vehicle in front. For most drivers this is
well outside normal driving style and may be
experienced as being uncomfortable.
16
222
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
In certain situations, it may advisable to disable
City Safety™, e.g. where leafy branches could
sweep over the bonnet and/or windscreen.
City Safety™ handled in the menu system MY
CAR (p. 113) and after starting the engine the
function can be deactivated as follows:
•
Search in MY CAR for Driver support
system and select the Off option at City
Safety.
However, the function will be enabled the
next time the engine is started, regardless of
whether the system was enabled or disabled
when the engine was switched off.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
The laser sensor (p. 225) emits laser light
even when City Safety™ is disabled manually.
To enable City Safety™ again:
•
Follow the same procedure as for disabling,
but select the On option.
Related information
•
•
•
City Safety™ (p. 221)
City Safety™ - limitations (p. 223)
City Safety™ - symbols and messages
(p. 227)
City Safety™ - limitations
The sensor in City Safety™ is designed to
detect cars and other large vehicles in front of
the car irrespective of whether it is day or night.
However, the function does have some limitations.
The sensor's limitations mean that City Safety™
has poorer functionality - or none at all - in e.g.
heavy snowfall or rain, dense fog, dust storms or
white-out situations. Misting, dirt, ice or snow on
the windscreen may also disrupt the function.
Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for projecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary
lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bonnet limit the function.
The laser light from the sensor in City Safety™
measures how the light is reflected. The sensor
cannot detect objects with low reflection capacity.
The rear sections of the vehicle generally reflect
the light sufficiently thanks to the number plate
and rear light reflectors.
When your own car is reversing, City Safety™ is
temporarily deactivated.
City Safety™ is not activated at low speeds below 4 km/h (3 mph), which is why the system
does not intervene in situations where a vehicle
in front is being approached very slowly, e.g.
when parking.
Driver commands are always prioritised, which is
why City Safety™ does not intervene in situations
where the driver is steering or accelerating in a
clear manner, even if a collision is unavoidable.
When City Safety™ has prevented a collision
with a stationary object the car remains stationary
for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car is
braked for a vehicle in front that is moving, then
speed is reduced to the same speed as that
maintained by the vehicle in front.
On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops
when City Safety™ has stopped the car, unless
the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal
beforehand.
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is
extended, which may reduce the capacity of City
Safety™ to avoid a collision. In such situations
the ABS17 and ESC18 systems will provide best
possible braking force with maintained stability.
17
18
(Anti-lock Braking System) - Anti-lock braking system.
(Electronic Stability Control) - Stability system.
}}
223
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
NOTE
•
Keep the windscreen surface in front of
the laser sensor (p. 225) free from ice,
snow and dirt. For an illustration of sensor location, see City Safety™ - function
(p. 222).
•
Do not affix or mount anything on the
windscreen in front of the laser sensor
•
Remove ice and snow from the bonnet snow and ice must not exceed a height
of 5 cm.
Fault tracing and action
If the message (p. 227) Windscreen sensors
blocked See manual is shown in the combined
instrument panel it indicates that the laser sensor
is blocked and cannot detect vehicles in front of
the car. This means that City Safety™ is not
operational.
The Windscreen sensors blocked See
manual message is not shown for all situations
in which the laser sensor is blocked. The driver
must therefore be diligent about keeping the
windscreen and area in front of the laser sensor
clean.
The following table presents possible causes for
the message being shown, along with suggestions for appropriate action.
224
Cause
IMPORTANT
Action
The windscreen surface
in front of the laser sensor is dirty or covered
with ice or snow.
Clean the windscreen surface in
front of the sensor
from dirt, ice and
snow.
The laser sensor field of
vision is blocked.
Remove the blocking object.
If there are cracks, scratches or stone chips in
the windscreen in front of either of the laser
sensor's "windows" and they cover a surface
of approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm (or larger), then a
workshop must be contacted for replacement
of the windscreen - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. For an illustration of
sensor location, see City Safety™ - function
(p. 222).
Failure to take action may result in reduced
performance for City Safety™.
To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or
reduced operation for City Safety™, the following also applies:
•
Volvo recommends that you do not repair
cracks, scratches or stone chips in the
area in front of the laser sensor - instead,
the whole windscreen should be
replaced.
•
Before replacing a windscreen, contact
an authorised Volvo workshop to verify
that the correct windscreen is ordered
and fitted.
•
The same type or Volvo-approved windscreen wipers must be fitted during
replacement.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
•
•
•
City Safety™ (p. 221)
City Safety™ - function (p. 222)
City Safety™ - operation (p. 222)
City Safety™ - laser sensor
The City Safety™ function includes a sensor
which transmits laser light. Contact a qualified
workshop in the event of a fault or if the laser
sensor needs servicing - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. It is absolutely
essential to follow the prescribed instructions
when handling the laser sensor.
The following two labels relate to the laser sensor:
•
IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies
with FDA (U.S. Food Administration) standards for laser product design with the exception of deviations in accordance with "Laser
Notice No. 50" from 26 July 2001.
Radiation data for the laser sensor
The following table specifies the laser sensor's
physical data.
Maximum pulse energy
2.64 µJ
Maximum average output
45 mW
Pulse duration
Divergence (horizontal x vertical)
33 ns
28° × 12°
The upper label in the figure describes the laser
beam's classification:
•
Laser radiation - Do not look into the laser
beam with optical instruments - Class 1M
laser product.
The lower label in the figure describes the laser
beam's physical data:
}}
225
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WARNING
If any of these instructions are not followed
then there is a risk of eye injury!
•
226
Never look into the laser sensor (which
emits spreading invisible laser radiation)
at a distance of 100 mm or closer with
magnifying optics such as a magnifying
glass, microscope, lens or similar optical
instruments.
•
Testing, repair, removal, adjustment
and/or replacement of the laser sensor's
spare parts must only be carried out by a
qualified workshop - we recommend an
authorised Volvo workshop.
•
To avoid exposure to harmful radiation, do
not carry out any readjustments or maintenance other than those specified here.
•
The repairer must follow specially drawn
up workshop information for the laser
sensor.
•
Do not remove the laser sensor (this
includes removing the lenses). A removed
laser sensor fulfils laser class 3B as per
standard IEC 60825-1. Laser class 3B is
not eye-safe and therefore entails a risk
of injury.
•
The laser sensor's connector must be
unplugged before removal from the windscreen.
•
The laser sensor must be fitted onto the
windscreen before the sensor's connector is plugged in.
•
The laser sensor transmits a laser light
when the remote control key is in key
position II (p. 81) even if the engine is
switched off.
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 221)
DRIVER SUPPORT
City Safety™ - symbols and
messages
In conjunction with automatic braking by the City
Safety (p. 221)™ system, one or more symbols
SymbolA
(p. 227) may illuminate in the combined instrument panel and a text message may be shown.
A text message can be acknowledged by briefly
pressing the OK button on the direction indicator stalk.
Message
Meaning/Action
Auto braking by City Safety
City Safety™ is braking or has automatically braked.
Windscreen sensors blocked See manual
The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it.
•
Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor.
Read about the laser sensor's(p. 223) limitations.
City Safety Service required
City Safety™ is not operational.
•
A
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
The symbols are schematic.
Related information
•
•
City Safety™ (p. 221)
City Safety™ - function (p. 222)
227
DRIVER SUPPORT
Collision warning system*
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist
and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the
driver when there is a risk of colliding with a
pedestrian, cyclist or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction.
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist
and Pedestrian Detection" is activated in situations where the driver should have started braking earlier, which is why it cannot help the driver
in every situation.
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist
and Pedestrian Detection" is designed to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary intervention.
Pedestrian Detection" function may appear in
two variants:
•
Collision warning system* - limitations
(p. 234)
Level 1
The driver is merely warned19 of occurring obstacles by means of visual and acoustic signals - no
automatic braking intervenes, the driver must
himself brake.
•
Collision warning system* - camera sensor
limitations (p. 235)
•
Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages (p. 236)
Level 2
The driver is warned of occurring obstacles by
means of visual and acoustic signals - the car is
braked automatically if the driver himself does not
act within a reasonable time.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of the internal components of
the "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" must only
be performed at a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist
and Pedestrian Detection" can prevent a collision
or reduce collision speed.
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist
and Pedestrian Detection" must not be used as
an excuse for the driver to change his/her driving
style. If the driver solely relies on Collision Warning with Auto Brake to do the braking, there
might be a risk of a collision sooner or later.
•
•
Collision warning system* - function (p. 229)
Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 231)
Two system levels
•
Depending on how the car is equipped, the "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and
Collision warning system* - detection of
cyclists (p. 230)
•
Collision warning system* - operation
(p. 232)
19
228
Related information
No warning for cyclists with "Level 1".
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Collision warning system* - function
1 - Collision warning
The driver is first warned of a potentially imminent collision.
The collision warning system can detect pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles that are stationary or
moving in the same direction as your car and are
located in front of you.
If there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian,
cyclist or a vehicle then the driver's attention is
attracted with a flashing red warning signal (1)
and an acoustic signal.
If in this situation the driver has not yet started to
take evasive action and the risk of collision is
imminent then the automatic braking function is
deployed - this takes place irrespective of
whether or not the driver brakes. Braking then
takes place with full brake force in order to
reduce collision speed, or with limited brake force
if it is sufficient to avoid a collision. For cyclists,
the warning and full brake intervention may come
very late or simultaneously.
2 - Brake support
Function overview20.
Audio-visual warning signal in the event of a
collision risk.
Radar sensor21
Camera sensor
Collision Warning with Auto Brake executes
three steps in the following order:
1.
Collision warning
2.
Brake support21
3.
Auto Brake21
The collision warning system and City
Safety™ (p. 221) complement each other.
20
21
If the risk of collision has increased further after
the collision warning then the brake support is
activated.
This means that the brake system is prepared for
rapid braking by applying the brakes lightly, which
may feel like a slight jolt.
If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently
quickly then full brake function is implemented.
Brake support also reinforces the driver's braking
if the system considers that the braking is not
sufficient to avoid a collision.
3 - Auto Brake
The automatic brake function is activated last.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
With system Level 2 only.
}}
* Option/accessory. 229
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WARNING
The collision warning system does not
engage in all driving situations or traffic,
weather or road conditions. The collision
warning system does not react to vehicles or
cyclists driving in another direction to the car
or to animals.
Collision warning system* detection of cyclists
If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle are
not visible to the function's camera then the system cannot detect a cyclist.
Warning only activated in the event of a high
risk for collision. This section "Function" and
the section "Limitations" inform about limitations that the driver must be aware of before
using the Collision Warning system with Auto
Brake.
Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle
speeds above 80 km/h (50 mph).
Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians and cyclists do not work in darkness
and tunnels - not even when streetlights are
lit.
Optimal performance of the system requires that
the system function that detects a cyclist
receives as unambiguous information as possible
about the body and bicycle contours - this implies
the opportunity to identify the bicycle, head, arms,
shoulders, legs, upper and lower body combined
with a normal human pattern of movement.
The function only "sees" cyclists from behind, who are
travelling in the same direction.
•
For the function to be able to detect a cyclist,
he/she must be an adult and riding an "adult
bicycle".
•
The function can only detect cyclists directly
from behind and who are travelling in the
same direction - not at an angle from behind,
not from the side.
The auto-brake function can prevent a collision or reduce collision speed. To ensure full
brake performance, the driver should always
depress the brake pedal - even when the car
auto-brakes.
Never wait for a collision warning. The driver is
always responsible that the correct distance
and speed are maintained - even when the
collision warning system with auto-brake is
used.
Related information
•
230
Collision warning system* (p. 228)
Optimal example of what the system interprets as a
cyclist - with clear body and bicycle contours, directly
from behind and in the car's centre line.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
•
The bicycle must be equipped with a highly
visible and approved22 rearward-facing red
reflector, fitted at least 70 cm above the
roadway.
WARNING
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Cyclist
Detection is a means of assistance.
Collision warning system* detection of pedestrians
The function cannot detect:
•
Cyclists travelling on the left or right-hand
edge of the car's imagined/extended side
lines may be detected late or not at all.
•
•
The function's capacity to detect cyclists at
dusk and dawn is limited - just like the
human eye.
all cyclists in all situations and does not
see partially obscured cyclists, for example.
•
•
The function's capacity to detect cyclists is
deactivated when driving in darkness and
tunnels - even when streetlights are lit.
cyclists in clothing that obscures the contours of the body or who are approaching
from the side.
•
bicycles that have no rearward-facing red
reflector.
•
For optimum bicycle detection, the City
Safety™ function must be activated, see City
Safety™ (p. 221).
•
bicycles loaded with large objects.
The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven properly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed.
Related information
•
Collision warning system* (p. 228)
Optimal examples of what the system regards as pedestrians with clear body contours.
Optimal performance of the system requires that
the system function that detects pedestrians
receives as unambiguous information as possible
about the contours of the body - this implies the
opportunity to identify the head, arms, shoulders,
legs, upper and lower body combined with a normal human pattern of movement.
If large parts of the body are not visible to the
function's camera then the system cannot detect
a pedestrian.
22
The reflector must fulfil the recommendations and conditions of the traffic authority in the market in question.
}}
* Option/accessory. 231
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
•
In order for a pedestrian to be detected
he/she must appear full-length and have a
height of at least 80 cm.
Collision warning system* operation
•
The camera sensor's ability to see pedestrians at dusk and dawn is limited - just like
the human eye.
Settings for the collision warning system are
made from MY CAR via the centre console
screen and menu system, see MY CAR (p. 113).
•
The camera sensor's capacity to detect
pedestrians is deactivated when driving in
darkness and tunnels - even when streetlights are lit.
Warning signals On and Off
WARNING
•
partially obscured pedestrians, people in
clothing that hides their body contour or
pedestrians shorter than 80 cm.
pedestrians who are carrying larger
objects.
The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven properly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed.
Related information
•
23
232
Collision warning system* (p. 228)
Settings for the collision warning system are
made via the centre console's screen and the
menu system MY CAR, see (p. 113).
Light and acoustic signals
When the collision warning system's light and
acoustic warnings are activated, the warning lamp
(no. [1] in previous illustration) is tested each
time the engine is started by briefly illuminating
the warning lamp's separate points of light.
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is a means
of assistance. The function cannot detect all
pedestrians in all situations and does not see,
for example:
•
NOTE
The Brake Support and Auto Brake functions
are always activated - they cannot be deactivated.
After starting the engine, both light and acoustic
signals are switched off:
•
1. Acoustic and visual warning signal in the event of a
collision risk23.
It is possible to select whether the collision warning system's acoustic and visual warning signals
should be switched on or off.
When starting the engine, the setting that was
selected when the engine was switched off is
obtained automatically.
Search for Collision warning in Driver
support system in the menu system MY
CAR (p. 113) - and there select to uncheck
the function.
Audible signal
After starting the engine the warning sound can
be activated/deactivated separately:
•
Search for Warning sound in Collision
warning in the menu system MY CAR
(p. 113) - and there select On or Off.
Following which, the collision warning system is
only indicated with a light signal.
The illustration is schematic - car model and details may differ.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Set warning distance
NOTE
The warning distance regulates the distance at
which the visual and acoustic warnings are
deployed.
•
Even if the warning distance has been set to
Long warnings could be perceived as being
late in certain situations, e.g. when there are
large differences in speed or if vehicles in
front brake heavily.
Search for Warning distance in Collision
warning in the menu system MY CAR
(p. 113) - and there select Long, Normal or
Short.
WARNING
The warning distance determines the system's
sensitivity. Warning distance Long provides an
earlier warning. First test with Long and if this
setting produces too many warnings, which could
be perceived as irritating in certain situations,
then change to warning distance Normal.
Only use warning distance Short in exceptional
cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.
NOTE
When the adaptive cruise control is in use the
warning lamp and warning sound will be used
by the cruise control even if the collision
warning system is switched off.
Maintenance
No automatic system can guarantee 100 %
correct function in all situations. Therefore,
never test Collision Warning with Auto Brake
by driving at people or vehicles - this may
cause severe damage and injury and risk lives.
Checking settings
The settings required can be controlled on the
centre console display screen.
•
Camera and radar sensor24.
For the sensors to work correctly, they must be
kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be cleaned
regularly with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Search in the menu system MY CAR (p. 113)
for Collision warning in Driver support
system.
The collision warning system warns the driver
in the event of a risk of a collision, but the
function cannot shorten driver reaction time.
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will
reduce their function and may prevent measurement.
Related information
•
Collision warning system* (p. 228)
In order for the collision warning system to be
effective, always drive with Distance Alert
(p. 199) set at time interval 4–5.
24
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory. 233
DRIVER SUPPORT
Collision warning system* limitations
The function has certain limitations - for example,
it is not active until 4 km/h (3 mph).
The collision warning system's visual warning signal may be difficult to notice in the event of
strong sunlight, reflections, when sunglasses are
being worn or if the driver is not looking straight
ahead. The warning sound should therefore
always be activated.
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is
extended, which may reduce the capacity to avoid
a collision. In such situations the ABS and ESC
(p. 186) systems will provide best possible braking force with maintained stability.
NOTE
The visual warning signal can be temporarily
disengaged in the event of high passenger
compartment temperature caused by strong
sunlight for example. If this occurs then the
warning sound is activated even if it is deactivated in the menu system.
•
25
234
Warnings may not appear if the distance
to the vehicle in front is small or if steering wheel and pedal movements are
large, e.g. a very active driving style.
WARNING
Warnings and brake interventions could be
implemented late or not at all if the traffic situation or external influences mean that the
radar or camera sensor cannot detect a
pedestrian, a vehicle or a cyclist in front correctly.
The sensor system has a limited range for
pedestrians and cyclists25 - the system can
give effective warnings and brake interventions for them at vehicle speeds up to
50 km/h (30 mph). For stationary or slowmoving vehicles, warnings and brake interventions are effective at vehicle speeds up to
70 km/h (43 mph).
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving vehicles could be disengaged due to darkness or
poor visibility.
Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle
speeds exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).
The collision warning system uses the same
radar sensors as the adaptive cruise control
(p. 203).
If warnings are perceived as being too frequent
or disturbing then the warning distance can be
reduced. This then leads to the system providing
a warning at a later stage, which reduces the
total number of warnings; see Collision warning
system - operation (p. 232).
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily
deactivated with reverse gear engaged.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not activated at low speeds - below 4 km/h (3 mph),
which is why the system does not intervene in situations where the car is approaching a vehicle in
front very slowly, e.g. when parking.
In situations where the driver demonstrates
active, aware driving behaviour, a collision warning may be postponed slightly in order to keep
unnecessary warnings to a minimum.
When Auto Brake has prevented a collision with
a stationary object the car remains stationary for
a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car is braked
for a vehicle in front that is moving, then speed is
reduced to the same speed as that maintained by
the vehicle in front.
On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops
when Auto Brake has stopped the car, unless the
driver manages to depress the clutch pedal
beforehand.
Related information
•
Collision warning system* (p. 228)
For cyclists, the warning and full brake intervention may come very late or simultaneously.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Collision warning system* - camera
sensor limitations
The function uses the car's camera sensor,
which has certain limitations.
The car’s camera sensor is also used - as well as
by Collision Warning with Auto Brake - by the
functions:
•
•
•
•
Active main beam (p. 92)
Road sign information (p. 243)
Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 247)
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 250).
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and
dirt.
Do not stick or attach anything to the windscreen in front of the camera sensor as this
may reduce effectiveness or cause one or
more of the systems dependent on the camera to stop working.
The camera sensors have limitations similar to
the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in darkness,
heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog for example. Under such conditions the functions of camera-dependent systems could be significantly
reduced or temporarily disengaged.
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty road
surfaces or unclear lane markings could also significantly reduce camera sensor function when it
is used to scan the carriageway and detect
pedestrians and other vehicles.
The field of vision of the camera sensor is limited,
which is why pedestrians, cyclists and vehicles
cannot be detected in some situations, or they
are detected later than anticipated.
During very high temperatures the camera is
temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes
after the engine is started in order to protect
camera functionality.
Fault tracing and action
If the display shows the message Windscreen
sensors blocked See manual then this means
that the camera sensor is blocked and cannot
detect pedestrians, cyclists, vehicles or road
markings in front of the car.
At the same time, this means that - besides Collision Warning with Auto Brake - the following
functions will not have full functionality either:
•
•
•
•
The following table presents possible causes for
a message being shown along with the appropriate action.
Cause
Action
The windscreen surface in front of the
camera is dirty or covered with ice or snow.
Clean the windscreen
surface in front of the
camera from dirt, ice
and snow.
Thick fog, heavy rain
or snow means that
the camera does not
work sufficiently well.
No action. At times
the camera does not
work during heavy rain
or snowfall.
The windscreen surface in front of the
camera has been
cleaned but the message remains.
Wait. It may take several minutes for the
camera to measure
the visibility.
Dirt has appeared
between the inside of
the windscreen and
the camera.
Visit a workshop to
have the windscreen
inside the camera
cover cleaned - an
authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
Active main beam
Driver Alert Control
Lane Keeping Aid
Road sign information
Related information
•
Collision warning system* (p. 228)
* Option/accessory. 235
DRIVER SUPPORT
Collision warning system* - symbols
and messages
SymbolA
Message
Specification
Collision warning system
OFF
Collision warning system switched off.
Shown when the engine is started.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Collision warning system
Unavailable
The collision warning system cannot be activated.
Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Auto Braking was activated
Auto Brake has been active.
Windscreen sensors
blocked See manual
Camera sensor (p. 235) is temporarily disengaged.
The message clears after one press of the OK button.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
•
A
236
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Radar blocked See manual
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.
Collision warning Service
required
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.
Radar sensor (p. 216) is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if
slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
•
Collision warning system* (p. 228)
* Option/accessory. 237
DRIVER SUPPORT
BLIS
Overview
BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) is a function designed for providing support for the driver
when driving in dense traffic on roads with several lanes in the same direction.
BLIS is a driver's aid intended to provide a warning about:
•
•
vehicles in the car's blind spot
quickly approaching vehicles in the left and
right lanes closest to the car.
WARNING
BLIS is a supplementary aid and does not
work in all situations.
BLIS is no substitute for a safe driving style
and the use of rearview and door mirrors.
BLIS can never replace the driver's responsibility and attention - it is always the driver's
responsibility to change lanes in a safe manner.
Keep this surface clean - also on the left-hand side.
Position of the BLIS lamp26.
Indicator lamp
BLIS symbol
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car
where the system has detected the vehicle. If
the car is overtaken on both sides at the
same time then both lamps illuminate.
•
To ensure optimal functionality, the areas in
front of the sensors must be kept clean.
Related information
•
•
•
BLIS - operation (p. 239)
BLIS and CTA - symbols and messages
(p. 242)
CTA* (p. 240)
Maintenance
The sensors for the BLIS functions are located
inside the rear wing/bumper on each corner of
the car.
26
238
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
BLIS - operation
BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) is a function designed for providing support for the driver
when driving in dense traffic on roads with several lanes in the same direction.
Activate/deactivate BLIS
BLIS is activated when the engine is started. This
is confirmed by the indicator lamps in the door
panels flashing once.
console - in which case the function is handled
by the car's menu system MY CAR27:
•
Select On or Off at Settings
settings BLIS.
When BLIS operates
Car
When BLIS is deactivated/activated the lamp in
the button goes out/illuminates and the combined instrument panel confirms the change with
a text message. The door panel indicator lamps
flash once upon activation.
To extinguish the message:
•
Press the left stalk switch OK button.
or
•
Wait approx. 5 seconds – the message extinguishes.
Principle for BLIS: 1. Zone in blind spot. 2. Zone for
quickly approaching vehicle.
The BLIS function is active at speeds above
10 km/h (6 mph).
The system is designed to react when:
•
•
Button for activating/deactivating.
The BLIS function can be deactivated/activated
by pressing the BLIS button on the centre console.
Some combinations of the selected equipment
leave no vacant space for a button in the centre
27
For information on the menu system - MY CAR (p. 113).
the vehicle is overtaken by other vehicles
another vehicle is quickly approaching the
vehicle.
When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a
quickly approaching vehicle in zone 2, the door
panel BLIS lamp illuminates with a constant glow.
If the driver activates the direction indicator on
the same side as the warning in this situation
then the BLIS lamp will change from a constant
glow to flashing with a more intense light.
}}
239
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WARNING
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is being
reversed.
Limitations
•
Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can
reduce functionality and make it impossible
to provide warnings. BLIS cannot detect hazards if it is covered.
•
Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the
area of the sensors.
•
BLIS is deactivated when a trailer is connected to the car's electrical system.
CTA*
•
The BLIS function CTA (Cross Traffic Alert) is a
driver aid intended to warn about crossing traffic
when the car is reversing. CTA is a supplement
to BLIS (p. 238).
However, the BLIS function remains activated
after the CTA has been deactivated.
Activate/deactivate CTA
CTA is activated when the engine is started. This
is confirmed by the indicator lamps in the door
panels flashing once.
Search for Cross Traffic Alert under BLIS
and uncheck - the CTA function is then
deactivated.
WARNING
CTA is a supplementary aid and does not
work in all situations.
CTA is no substitute for a safe driving style
and the use of rearview and door mirrors.
CTA can never replace the driver's responsibility and attention - it is always the driver's
responsibility to reverse in a safe manner.
When CTA operates
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' components or repainting the bumpers must only
be performed by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
On/Off for parking assistance and CTA sensors.
Related information
•
•
BLIS (p. 238)
BLIS and CTA - symbols and messages
(p. 242)
In cars equipped with Parking assistance
(p. 255), the CTA function can be deactivated/
activated separately with the parking assistance
On/Off button.
In cars without a button for parking assistance,
the CTA function can be operated in the menu
system MY CAR (p. 113), as follows:
240
Principle for CTA.
CTA supplements the BLIS function by being
able to see crossing traffic from the side during
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
reversing, such as when reversing out of a parking space.
cle/object that is blocking, at which the blind
sector rapidly decreases.
CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles. In
favourable conditions, it may also be able to
detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and
pedestrians.
Examples of further limitations:
CTA is only active during reversing and is activated automatically when reverse is selected at
the gearbox.
•
If CTA detects something approaching from
the side, an acoustic warning signal sounds.
The signal comes from either the left or the
right speaker depending on which direction
the approaching object is coming from.
•
CTA also warns by illuminating the BLIS
lamps.
•
An additional warning is provided in the form
of an illuminated icon in the display screen's
PAS graphics (p. 255).
The car is parked deep inside a parking slot.
Blind CTA sector.
Sector where CTA can detect/"see".
•
Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can
reduce functionality and make it impossible
to provide warnings. CTA cannot detect hazards if it is covered.
•
CTA is deactivated when a trailer is connected to the car’s electrical system.
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' components or repainting the bumpers must only
be performed by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Maintenance
The sensors for the BLIS and CTA functions are
located inside the rear wing/bumper on each
corner of the car.
Limitations
CTA does not perform optimally in all situations,
but has a certain limitation - for example, the CTA
sensors cannot "see" through other parked vehicles or obstructing objects.
Here are some examples of when CTA's "field of
vision" may be limited from the beginning and
approaching vehicles cannot therefore be
detected until they are very close:
In an angled parking slot CTA can be completely "blind"
on one side.
However, when the driver is slowly reversing the
car, the angle is changed in relation to the vehi-
}}
241
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
BLIS and CTA - symbols and
messages
In situations where the BLIS (Blind Spot
Information System) (p. 238) and CTA (p. 240)
functions fail or are interrupted, the combined
instrument panel may show a symbol, supplemented by an explanatory message. Follow any
recommendation given.
Related information
•
•
BLIS (p. 238)
CTA* (p. 240)
Message examples:
Keep this surface clean - also on the left-hand side.
•
To ensure optimal functionality, the areas in
front of the sensors must be kept clean.
•
Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the
area of the sensors.
Related information
•
•
BLIS (p. 238)
BLIS and CTA - symbols and messages
(p. 242)
Message
Specification
CTA OFF
CTA has been deactivated
manually. BLIS is active.
BLIS and
CTA OFF
Trailer
attached
BLIS and CTA are temporarily
disabled because a trailer is
connected to the car’s electrical system.
BLIS and
CTA Service
required
BLIS and CTA are not working.
•
Visit a workshop if the
message remains - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be acknowledged by briefly
pressing the OK button on the direction indicator
stalk.
242
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Road Sign Information* (RSI)
(RSI28)
The Road Sign Information function
helps the driver to observe speed-related road
signs and certain prohibition signs as the car
passes them.
•
•
WARNING
Activate RSI as follows:
The Road Sign Information function is
supplementary driver support intended to
facilitate driving and make it safer – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
1.
Search and locate the function in the menu
system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).
2.
Highlight Road sign information by pressing the OK/MENU button once and go back
out with EXIT.
Road Sign Information is not a substitute
for the driver's attention and judgement.
The driver is always responsible for
ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an
appropriate distance to other vehicles,
and in accordance with current traffic
rules and regulations.
Related information
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* - operation
(p. 244)
•
Road Sign Information* (RSI) - limitations
(p. 246)
RSI On/Off
Examples of readable signs29.
The function for Road Sign Information is selectable - the driver can select On or Off.
RSI provides information about such things as
current speed, when a motorway or road is starting/ending, when overtaking is prohibited or
when the direction of travel is one-way.
If both a sign for motorway/road for motorised
traffic and a sign showing the maximum permitted speed are passed, RSI decides to show the
sign symbol for motorway/road for motorised
traffic.
28
29
Road Sign Information
Road signs are market-dependent - illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.
* Option/accessory. 243
DRIVER SUPPORT
Road Sign Information (RSI)* operation
The Road Sign Information function (RSI30) registers and shows road signs in different ways
depending on the sign and the situation.
End of speed limit or motorway
Example of a direct speed
sign31.
When RSI detects an "indirect speed sign" that
means end of current speed limit - e.g. at end of
motorway - a symbol with the corresponding road
sign is shown in the combined instrument panel.
Examples of indirect speed sign31 are:
End of all restrictions.
The symbol in the combined instrument panel
extinguishes after approx. 5 minutes and remains
extinguished until the next speed-related sign is
passed.
Sensus Navigation
End of motorway.
Example31 of detected speed information.
When RSI has recorded a road sign with an
imposed speed, the combined instrument panel
displays the sign as a symbol.
An additional31 sign, such as
"no overtaking", may be shown
together with the speed limit
symbol.
30
31
244
The symbol in the combined instrument panel
extinguishes after 10-30 seconds and remains
extinguished until the next speed-related sign is
passed.
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation,
speed information is read from the navigation
unit in the following cases:
•
On detection of signs that indirectly indicate
a speed limit, such as motorway, dual carriageway and city limit signs.
•
If a previously detected speed sign is
assumed not to apply any longer, but no new
sign has been detected.
Changed speed limit
On passing a direct speed sign when the speed
limit changes, a symbol with the corresponding
road sign is shown in the combined instrument
panel.
Road Sign Information
Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Additional signs
Some speeds are applicable
only after e.g. a specific distance or at a certain time of
day. The driver's attention is
drawn to the situation by
means of a symbol for an additional sign under the symbol
showing speed.
A symbol for additional sign in
the form of an empty frame
under the combined instrument
panel's speed symbol31 means
that RSI has detected an additional sign with supplementary
information for the current
Examples of additional signs31.
Sometimes different speed limits are signposted
for the same road - an additional sign then indicates the circumstances under which the different speeds apply. The road section may be particularly susceptible to accidents in rain and/or
fog, for example.
An additional sign relating to rain is displayed
only if the windscreen wipers are in use.
The speed applicable on an exit
is indicated in certain markets
by means of an additional sign
containing an arrow.
Activate Speed alert as follows:
1.
Search and locate the function in the menu
system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).
2.
Highlight Speed alert by pressing the OK/
MENU button once and go back out with
EXIT.
speed limit.
Speed Alert On/Off
The Speed Limit Warning subfunction for RSI
is selectable - the driver can select On or Off.
The speed warning is given in
the form of the combined
instrument panel's symbol31 for
maximum permitted speed
temporarily flashing when the
speed is exceeded by 5 km/h
(5 mph) or more.
Related information
•
•
•
Road Sign Information* (RSI) (p. 243)
Road Sign Information* (RSI) - limitations
(p. 246)
MY CAR (p. 113)
Speed signs linked to this type
of additional sign are displayed
only if the driver is using the direction indicator.
31
Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples.
* Option/accessory. 245
DRIVER SUPPORT
Road Sign Information* (RSI) limitations
The Road Sign Information (RSI32) function may
have limitations in certain situations.
The camera sensor for RSI has limitations just
like the human eye. Find out more about this in
the section on the camera sensor limitations
(p. 235).
Signs which indirectly provide information on a
prevailing speed limit, e.g. name signs for towns/
districts, are not recorded by RSI.
Examples of factors that can reduce RSI are as
follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
32
33
34
246
Faded signs
Signs positioned on bends
Rotated or damaged signs
Signs positioned high above the roadway
Fully/partially obscured or poorly positioned
signs
signs completely or partly covered with frost,
snow and/or dirt
maps33
digital road
are out-of-date, inaccurate or have no speed information34.
Related information
•
•
Road Sign Information* (RSI) (p. 243)
Road Sign Information (RSI)* - operation
(p. 244)
Driver Alert System*
The Driver Alert System is intended to assist drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or who
are inadvertently leaving the lane they are driving
on.
The Driver Alert System consists of different
functions which can either be switched on at the
same time or individually:
•
•
Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 248).
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 252).
A switched-on function is set in standby mode
and is not activated automatically until speed
exceeds 65 km/h (40 mph).
The function is deactivated again when speed
decreases to below 60 km/h (37 mph).
The functions use a camera which is dependent
on the lane having side markings painted on
each side.
WARNING
Driver Alert System does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility
for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.
Road Sign Information
In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation.
Map data with speed information does not exist for all areas.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
•
•
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 247)
Lane assistance* (p. 250)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)*
DAC is intended to attract the driver's attention
when he or she starts to drive less consistently,
e.g. if the driver becomes distracted or starts to
fall asleep.
irrespective of whether or not DAC issues a
warning.
NOTE
The function must not be used to extend a
period of driving. Always plan breaks at regular intervals, and make sure you are well
rested.
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deteriorating driving ability and it is primarily intended for
major roads.
Limitation
In some cases the system may issue a warning
despite driving ability not deteriorating, for example:
•
•
in strong side winds
on rutted road surfaces.
DAC is not intended for city traffic.
NOTE
A camera detects the side markings painted on
the carriageway and compares the section of the
road with the driver's steering wheel movements.
The driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow
the carriageway evenly.
In some cases driving ability is not affected
despite driver fatigue. In which case there may
not be any warning issued for the driver. For this
reason it is always important to stop and take a
break in the event of any signs of driver fatigue,
The camera sensor has certain limitations,
see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 235).
Related information
•
•
Driver Alert System* (p. 246)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation
(p. 248)
•
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and
messages (p. 249)
•
Lane assistance* (p. 250)
* Option/accessory. 247
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* operation
WARNING
Settings are made from the centre console display screen and its menu system.
An alarm should be taken very seriously, as a
sleepy driver is often not aware of his/her
own condition.
On/Off
The Driver Alert function can be set in standby
mode via the menu system MY CAR (p. 113):
In the event of an alarm or a feeling of tiredness; stop the car in a safe manner as soon
as possible and rest.
•
•
Studies have shown that it is equally as dangerous to drive while tired as it is under the
influence of alcohol.
Checked box - function activated.
Unchecked box - the function is deactivated.
Function
Driver Alert is activated when speed exceeds
65 km/h (40 mph) and remains active as long as
the speed is above 60 km/h (37 mph).
Related information
•
•
Driver Alert System* (p. 246)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 247)
If the vehicle is being driven erratically,
the driver is notified by an acoustic signal plus the text message (p. 249)
Driver Alert Time for a break - the
linked symbol is illuminated in the combined
instrument panel at the same time. The warning
is repeated after a time if driving ability does not
improve.
The warning symbol can go off:
•
248
Press the left stalk switch OK button.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* symbols and messages
instrument panel or in the centre console's
screen in different situations.
Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 247) can show
symbols and text messages in the combined
Here are some examples:
SymbolA
Message
Specification
Driver Alert Time for a
break
The vehicle has been driven inconsistently - the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.
Windscreen sensors
blocked See manual
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
•
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations
(p. 235).
Driver Alert system Service required
A
The system is disengaged.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
The symbols are schematic.
Related information
•
•
•
Driver Alert System* (p. 246)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation
(p. 248)
Lane assistance* (p. 250)
* Option/accessory. 249
DRIVER SUPPORT
Lane assistance*
WARNING
LKA is merely a driver's aid and does not
engage in all driving situations or traffic,
weather or road conditions.
Certain settings can be made for the Lane Keeping Aid (Lane Keeping Aid) function.
The function is intended for use on motorways
and similar major roads in order to reduce the
risk of the vehicle accidentally leaving its own
lane in certain situations.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility
for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely
and that applicable laws and road traffic regulations are followed.
Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed
range 65-200 km/h (40-125 mph) on roads with
clearly visible side lines. The function is temporarily deactivated on narrow roads with less than 2.6
metres between the lane side lines.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
A camera reads the painted side lines of the
road/lane. If the car is about to cross a side line
then Lane Keeping Aid will actively steer the car
back into the lane with a slight steering torque in
the steering wheel.
If the car reaches or crosses a side line then
Lane Keeping Aid will also alert the driver with
vibration in the steering wheel.
250
Lane Keeping Aid - function
Lane Keeping Aid is one of the functions in the
Driver Alert System - sometimes also referred to
as LKA (Lane Keeping Aid).
Off & On
Lane Keeping Aid - function (p. 250)
Lane Keeping Aid - operation (p. 252)
Lane Keeping Aid - limitations (p. 252)
Lane Keeping Aid - symbols and messages
(p. 254)
Driver Alert System* (p. 246)
Press the centre console's button to activate or
deactivate the function. The button's lamp illuminates when the function is switched on.
Some combinations of the selected equipment
leave no vacant space for an On/Off button in
the centre console - in which case, the function
is instead operated in the car's menu system MY
CAR (p. 113). Here, proceed as follows:
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
•
Search for Lane Keeping Aid and then
select On or Off.
In addition, the following selections can be made
in MY CAR:
•
Warning with vibration in the steering wheel:
Vibration only - On or Off.
•
Active steering: Steering assist only- On or
Off.
•
Both Warning with vibration in the steering
wheel and Active steering: Full function On or Off.
If the car approaches the left or right side line of
the lane and the direction indicator is not activated, the car is steered back into the lane.
Dynamic cornering
Warning with vibration in the steering
wheel
Active steering
LKA does not engage in sharp inside curves.
Lane Keeping Aid strives to keep the car within
the side lines for the lane.
LKA steers and alerts with steering wheel vibration35.
If the car crosses a side line then Lane Keeping
Aid will alert the driver with vibration in the steering wheel36. This occurs regardless of whether
the car is actively steered back by applying a
slight steering torque.
In certain cases Lane assistance will allow the
car to cross lane lines without engaging active
steering or activating a warning. Using an adjacent lane for cutting a corner when there is a
clear line of vision is an example of this.
Related information
•
Lane assistance* (p. 250)
LKA intervenes and steers away.
35
36
The figure shows 3 vibrations when the side line is crossed.
Steering wheel vibration varies - the longer the time for which the car has crossed the side line, the more pulses there are.
* Option/accessory. 251
DRIVER SUPPORT
Lane Keeping Aid - operation
Lane Keeping Aid - limitations
Lane Keeping Aid is complemented in the combined instrument panel with intuitive graphics in
different situations. Here are some examples:
Lane Keeping Aid's camera sensor has limitations in a similar way to the human eye.
For more information, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 235) and
(p. 233).
NOTE
LKA is temporarily deactivated for as long as
the direction indicator is switched on.
NOTE
LKA engages on the right side.
Lane Keeping Aid intervenes and steers away
from the side line - this is indicated with:
•
RED line for the side in question.
Related information
•
LKA "sees" the following side lines.
If Lane Keeping Aid is active and detects/"sees"
the side lines, the LKA symbol indicates this with
WHITE lines.
•
GREY side line - Lane Keeping Aid does not
see a line on that side of the car.
Lane assistance* (p. 250)
In certain demanding situations Lane assistance may have difficulty assisting the driver
in the right way - in which case it is recommended to deactivate the function.
Examples of such situations may be:
•
•
•
•
•
roadworks
winter road conditions
poor road surface
very sporty driving style
poor weather with reduced visibility.
Hands on the steering wheel
In order for Lane Keeping Aid to operate, the
driver must have his/her hands on the steering
wheel. LKA continually monitors this. If hands are
not detected on the steering wheel then a text
message is shown, prompting the driver to
actively steer the car.
If the driver does not follow the request to begin
steering then Lane Keeping Aid goes into
252
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
standby mode and will remain in this mode until
the driver begins to steer the car again.
Related information
•
Lane assistance* (p. 250)
* Option/accessory. 253
DRIVER SUPPORT
Lane Keeping Aid - symbols and
messages
In situations where there is no Lane assistance
function, a symbol may be shown in the comSymbol
bined instrument panel in combination with an
explanatory message - follow the recommendation given if appropriate.
Message
Specification
Windscreen sensors
blocked See manual
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Message examples:
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
•
Clean the windscreen in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations
(p. 235) and (p. 233).
Lane Keeping Aid Service
required
The system is disengaged.
Lane Keeping Aid Interrupted
LKA has been set to standby mode. The lines of the LKA symbol indicate when the function is active again.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
254
Lane assistance* (p. 250)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park Assist*
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the
centre console's display screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.
Parking assistance sound level can be adjusted
during the ongoing acoustic signal using the centre console's VOL knob or in the car's menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 113).
Parking assistance is available in two variants:
•
•
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 258)
Park assist syst* - function (p. 255)
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 257)
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 258)
Park assist syst* - function
The parking assistance system is automatically
activated when the engine is started - the
switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If parking
assistance is switched off with the button, the
lamp goes out.
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 256)
Park assist camera (p. 259)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 263)
Rear only
Both front and rear.
NOTE
Since a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, towbar protrusion is
included when the function measures the distance to an object behind the car.
WARNING
37
•
Parking assistance does not relinquish
the driver's own responsibility during
parking.
•
The sensors have blind spots where
obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Be aware of e.g. people and animals near
the car.
Side warning, CTA (Cross Traffic Alert) (p. 240)
On/Off for the sensors for parking assistance and
CTA37.
The centre console's display screen shows an
overview of the relationship between the car and
detected obstacle.
}}
* Option/accessory. 255
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
IMPORTANT
Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or low
barriers may be in the "signal shadow" and
are then temporarily not detected by the sensors - the pulsating tone may then unexpectedly stop instead of changing over to the
expected constant tone.
Park assist syst* - backward
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the
centre console's display screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.
The sensors cannot detect high objects, such
as projecting loading docks.
•
Display screen view - showing an obstacle left front and
right rear.
Marked sectors show which of the four sensor(s)
detected an obstacle. The closer to the car symbol a selected sector box is, the shorter the distance between the car and a detected obstacle.
256
In such situations, pay extra attention and
manoeuvre/reposition the car particularly
slowly or stop the current parking
manoeuvre - there may be a high risk of
damage to vehicles or other objects since
information from the sensors is not
always reliable in such situations.
The frequency of the signal increases the shorter
the distance to an obstacle, in front of or behind
the car. Other sound from the audio system is
muted automatically.
Related information
When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is
constant and the active sensor's field nearest the
car is filled in. If the detected obstacle is within
the distance for the constant tone both behind
and in front of the car, then the tone sounds
alternately from the loudspeakers.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Park Assist* (p. 255)
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 258)
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 257)
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 258)
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 256)
Park assist camera (p. 259)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 263)
The distance covered to the rear of the car is
about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for obstacles behind comes from one of the rear loudspeakers.
Rear parking assistance is activated when
reverse gear is engaged.
When reversing with e.g. a trailer on the towbar,
rear parking assistance is switched off automatically - otherwise the sensors would react to the
trailer.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
NOTE
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike carrier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine
trailer wiring - parking assistance may need to
be switched off manually in order that the
sensors do not react to them.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Park Assist* (p. 255)
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 258)
Park assist syst* - forward
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the
centre console's screen indicate distance to
detected obstacles.
The parking assistance system is automatically
activated when the engine is started - the
switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If parking
assistance is switched off with the button, the
lamp goes out.
Park assist syst* - function (p. 255)
tion is reactivated when the speed falls below 10
km/h (6 mph).
IMPORTANT
When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember
that these must not obscure the sensors - the
auxiliary lamps may then be perceived as an
obstacle.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 257)
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 258)
Park assist camera (p. 259)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 263)
Park Assist* (p. 255)
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 258)
Park assist syst* - function (p. 255)
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 258)
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 256)
Park assist camera (p. 259)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 263)
The distance covered in front of the car is about
0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for obstacles in
front comes from one of the front loudspeakers.
Forward parking assistance is active up to
10 km/h (6 mph). If the Parking Assistance System is deactivated because the car is moving too
quickly - 11 km/h (7 mph) or above - the func-
* Option/accessory. 257
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park assist syst* - fault indication
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the
centre console's display screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.
If the combined instrument panel's
information symbol illuminates with
constant glow and the text message
Park Assist System Service required is
shown then parking assistance is disengaged.
•
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 263)
Park assist syst* - cleaning the
sensors
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the
centre console's display screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.
The sensors for parking assistance must be
cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly. Clean them with water and car shampoo.
IMPORTANT
Under some circumstances, the parking sensors can give false warning signals due to
external sound sources which emit the same
ultrasound frequencies as those with which
the system works.
Examples of such sources include horns, wet
tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and
exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
258
Sensor location, front.
Park Assist* (p. 255)
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 258)
Park assist syst* - function (p. 255)
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 257)
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 256)
Park assist camera (p. 259)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park assist camera
Function and operation
The parking camera is an auxiliary system and is
activated when the reverse gear is selected.
The camera image is shown on the centre console's screen.
NOTE
Since a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, towbar protrusion is
included when the function measures the distance to an object behind the car.
Sensor location, rear.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will
reduce their function and may prevent measurement.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Park Assist* (p. 255)
Park assist syst* - function (p. 255)
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 257)
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 258)
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 256)
Park assist camera (p. 259)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 263)
WARNING
•
The parking camera is an aid and can
never replace the responsibilities of the
driver when reversing.
•
The camera has blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Be aware of people and animals near the
car.
Camera location next to the opening handle.
The camera shows what is behind the car and if
something appears from the sides.
The camera shows a wide area behind the car
and part of the bumper and any towbar.
Objects on the screen may appear to tilt slightly this is normal.
NOTE
Objects on the display screen may be closer
to the car than they appear to be on the
screen.
If another view is active then the parking camera
system takes over automatically and its camera
image is displayed on the screen.
}}
* Option/accessory. 259
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
When reverse gear is selected, two unbroken
lines are shown graphically which illustrate where
the car's rear wheels will roll with the current
steering wheel angle - this facilitates parallel
parking, reversing into tight spaces and for hitching a trailer. The car's approximate external
dimensions are illustrated by means of dashed
lines. The park assist lines can be deactivated see section Settings (p. 262).
If the car is also equipped with Parking assistance sensors * (p. 255) then their information is
shown graphically as coloured areas in order to
illustrate the distance to detected obstacles, see
heading "Cars with reversing sensors" later in the
text.
The camera is active approx. 5 seconds after
reverse gear has been disengaged or until the
car's speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph) forward or
35 km/h (22 mph) backward.
Park assist lines
Examples of how the park assist lines can be displayed
for the driver.
The lines on the screen are projected as if they
were at ground level behind the car and are
directly related to steering wheel movement,
which shows the driver the path the car will then
take - also when the car is turning.
NOTE
•
When reversing with a trailer which is not
connected electrically to the car, the lines
on the display show the route the car will
take - not the trailer.
•
The screen shows no lines when a trailer
is connected electrically to the car's electrical system.
•
The parking camera is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if a Volvo
genuine trailer cable is used.
IMPORTANT
Remember that the display only shows the
area behind the car - so pay attention to the
sides and front of the car when turning the
steering while reversing.
Light conditions
The camera image is adjusted automatically
according to prevailing light conditions. Because
of this, the image may vary slightly in brightness
and quality. Poor light conditions can result in a
slightly reduced image quality.
NOTE
Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow and
ice to ensure optimum function. This is particularly important in poor light.
260
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Boundary lines
Different lines in the system.
Boundary line, free reversing zone
"Wheel tracks"
The dashed line (1) frames in a zone up to
about 1.5 m back from the bumper. It is also the
limit of the car's most protruding parts, such as
door mirrors and corners - also when the car is
turning.
The wide "wheel tracks" (2) between the side
lines indicate where the wheels will roll and can
extend about 3.2 m back from the bumper if no
obstacle is in the way.
Cars with reversing sensors*
Related information
•
•
•
•
Park assist camera - settings (p. 262)
Park assist camera - limitations (p. 263)
Park Assist* (p. 255)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 263)
Coloured areas (x 4 - one per sensor) show distance.
If the car is also equipped with Parking assistance (p. 255) the distance is shown with coloured fields for each sensor that registers an
obstacle.
The colour of the areas changes with decreasing
distance to the obstacle - from light yellow to yellow, via orange to red.
Colour / paint
Distance (metres)
Light yellow
0,7–1,5
Yellow
0,5–0,7
Orange
0,3–0,5
Red
0–0,3
* Option/accessory. 261
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park assist camera - settings
Activate switched-off camera
If the camera function is switched off when
reverse gear is selected, it is activated in the following way:
Options*
Cars with the front camera option have a CAM
button on the climate panel.
1.
Press OK/MENU when a camera view is
shown - the screenchanges to a menu with
various options.
2.
Turn to reach the desired option with TUNE.
3.
Highlight the option by pressing OK/MENU
once and go back out with EXIT.
Towbar
The camera can be used to advantage when
hitching a trailer. A park assist line for the towbar's intended "trajectory" toward the trailer can
be shown on the screen - exactly as for the
"wheel tracks".
Button location may vary depending on options for other
equipment.
Main source menu38.
Press CAM to activate the camera
- the screenshows the current camera view.
1.
Give one or two long presses on EXIT to
access the main source menu.
To change view between the reversing camera
and front camera:
2.
Turn to the "Camera" option with TUNE and
press OK/MENU.
•
3.
In the following menu: - Turn to the desired
camera view with TUNE and press OK/
MENU - the screen shows the current camera view.
The default setting is that the camera is activated
when reverse gear is selected.
38
262
•
Press CAM or turn TUNE.
A choice can be made between showing the
"wheel tracks" or the towbar's trajectory - both
options cannot be shown simultaneously.
1.
Press OK/MENU when a camera view is
shown.
2.
Turn to reach the Tow bar trajectory guide
line option with TUNE.
3.
Highlight the option by pressing OK/MENU
once and go back out with EXIT.
Change setting
The settings for the parking camera can be
changed when the screen shows a camera view:
See the Sensus Infotainment supplement for more information about the menu system.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Zoom
If precise manoeuvring is required then the camera view can be zoomed in:
•
NOTE
Press CAM or turn TUNE - repeated press/
turn changes back to the normal view.
If more options are available, they are in a loop
- press/turn until the desired camera view is
shown.
Bicycle racks or other accessories mounted
on the back of the car may obscure the line of
sight of the camera.
To bear in mind
Park Assist* (p. 255)
Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it only
looks like a relatively small part of the image is
obscured, it could be a relatively large sector that
is hidden from view. Obstacles could thereby go
undetected until they are very close to the car.
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 263)
•
Keep the camera lens free from dirt, ice and
snow.
•
Clean the camera lens regularly with lukewarm water and car shampoo - take care not
to scratch the lens.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Park assist camera - limitations
Park assist camera (p. 259)
Park assist camera - limitations (p. 263)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)*
The Park Assist Pilot (PAP – Park Assist Pilot)
helps the driver to park by first checking whether
a space is sufficiently large and then turning the
steering wheel and steering the car into the
space.
The combined instrument panel uses symbols,
graphics and text when elements are to be executed.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Park assist camera (p. 259)
Park assist camera - settings (p. 262)
Park Assist* (p. 255)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 263)
The On/Off button is on the centre console.
NOTE
Since a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, towbar protrusion is
included when the function measures the distance to an object behind the car.
}}
* Option/accessory. 263
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WARNING
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function
•
The PAP function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and
make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
The combined instrument panel uses symbols,
graphics and text when elements are to be executed.
•
Be particularly aware of people and animals near the car.
•
PAP is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgement. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function (p. 264)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation (p. 265)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations
(p. 267)
NOTE
The PAP function measures the space and
steers the car - the driver's task is to:
•
•
•
•
•
264
follow the instructions in the combined
instrument panel
change gear (reverse/forward)
control and maintain a safe speed
Principle for PAP.
The PAP function parks the car using the following steps:
1.
PAP can be activated if the following criteria are
met once the engine has been started:
The function searches for a parking space
and measures it - during measurement,
speed must not exceed 30 km/h (20 mph).
2.
•
The car is steered into the space during
reversing.
3.
The car is positioned in the space by means
of driving forward/backward.
Active Park Assist (PAP)* - symbols and
messages (p. 268)
Park assist camera (p. 259)
•
•
39
40
keep a close watch around the car
brake and stop.
ABS39
ESC40
The functions
or
must not
intervene when the PAP function is activated
- these can be activated in the event of e.g.
steep and slippery surfaces, see the sections
on Foot brake (p. 289) and Stability system
ESC (p. 186) for more information.
Trailers must not be connected to the car.
Related information
•
•
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 263)
Park assist camera (p. 259)
Speed must be lower than 50 km/h
(30 mph).
(Anti-lock Braking System) - Anti-lock braking system.
(Electronic Stability Control) - Stability system.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation
The driver is instructed about how PAP works by
means of simple, clear instructions in the combined instrument panel - using both graphics and
text graphics and text message (p. 268).
NOTE
Remember that certain steering wheel positions may obstruct the combined instrument
panel's instructions when you turn it during
the parking manoeuvre.
1 - Searching and checking
measurements
NOTE
The PAP function measures the space and
steers the car - the driver's task is to:
•
•
•
•
•
keep a close watch around the car
2.
Keep an eye on the combined instrument
panel and be prepared to stop the car when
the graphics and text message so request.
3.
Stop the car when the graphics and text so
request.
follow the instructions in the combined
instrument panel
change gear (reverse/forward)
control and maintain a safe speed
brake and stop.
NOTE
PAP searches the area for parking, displays
instructions and guides the car in on its passenger side. But if required the car can also
be parked on the driver's side of the street:
•
NOTE
The distance between the car and parking
spaces should be 0.5-1.5 metres (1.6-5.0 ft)
while PAP is searching for a parking space.
Activate the direction indicator to the
driver's side - then the system searches
for a parking space on that side of the
car instead.
2 - Reversing in
The PAP function searches for a parking space
and checks whether it is big enough. Proceed as
follows:
1. Activate PAP by pressing
this button and do not drive
faster than 30 km/h (20 mph).
}}
* Option/accessory. 265
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
During the Reversing step, PAP will steer the car
into the parking space. Proceed as follows:
1.
Check that the area behind the car is clear,
then engage reverse gear.
2.
Reverse slowly and carefully without touching
the steering wheel - and no faster than
7 km/h (4 mph).
3.
3 - Positioning
IMPORTANT
The warning distance is shorter when the
sensors are used by PAP compared with
when Park Assist uses the sensors.
Related information
•
•
Keep an eye on the combined instrument
panel and be prepared to stop the car when
the graphics and text message so request.
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 263)
Park assist camera (p. 259)
NOTE
•
Keep your hands away from the steering
wheel when the PAP function is activated.
•
Make sure that the steering wheel is not
hindered in any way and can rotate freely.
•
To achieve optimum results - wait until
the steering wheel is fully turned before
starting to drive backward/forward.
When the car has reversed into the parking
space, it must be straightened up and stopped.
1.
Engage first gear or D position, wait until the
steering wheel has been turned, then drive
slowly forwards.
2.
Stop the car when the graphics and text
message so request.
3.
Engage reverse gear and drive backwards
slowly until the graphics and text message
tell you to stop.
The function is deactivated automatically and the
graphics and message show that parking is complete. It may be necessary for the driver to correct
the positioning. Only the driver can determine
whether the car is properly parked.
266
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
•
It is not always possible to find parking
spaces on narrow streets since there is not
enough space for manoeuvring. In such parking situations, it helps the system to drive as
close to the side of the road as possible
where you intend to park.
•
Bear in mind that the front of the car may
swing out towards oncoming traffic while
being parked.
•
The driver should bear in mind that the Park
Assist Pilot is an aid – not an infallible, fully-automatic function. The driver must therefore be prepared to intervene. There are also a few details to
bear in mind while parking, e.g.:
Objects situated higher than the detection
areas of the sensors are not included when
calculations are made for the parking
manoeuvre. This may cause PAP to swing
into the parking space too early, and hence
such parking spaces should be avoided.
•
The driver is responsible for determining
whether the space selected by PAP is suitable for parking.
•
PAP starts out from the current location of
the parked vehicles - if they are inappropriately parked then the car's tyres and wheel
rims may be damaged against kerbs.
•
Use approved tyres43 with the correct tyre
pressure - this affects the ability of PAP to
park the car.
•
PAP is designed for parking on straight
streets - not sharp curves or bends. For this
reason, make sure the car is parallel to the
parking space when PAP measures the
space.
•
Heavy rain or snow may cause the system to
measure the parking space incorrectly.
•
Do not use PAP if snow chains or a spare
wheel are fitted.
•
Do not use PAP if loaded objects are protruding from the car.
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations
IMPORTANT
Under certain circumstances, PAP is unable
to find parking spaces - one reason for this
may be the fact that there is interference with
the sensors from external sound sources
which emit the same ultrasound frequencies
as those with which the system works.
The PAP sequence is stopped:
•
if the car is driven too quickly - above 7 km/h
(4 mph)
•
•
if the driver touches the steering wheel
if the ABS41 or ESC42 function is engaged e.g. if a wheel loses grip on a slippery road
surface.
Examples of such sources include horns, wet
tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and
exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
A text message indicates where the PAP
sequence was stopped.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will
reduce their function and may prevent measurement.
41
42
43
To bear in mind
(Anti-lock Braking System) - Anti-lock braking system.
(Electronic Stability Control) - Stability and traction control system.
"Approved tyres" refers to tyres of the same type and make as those fitted new on delivery from the factory.
}}
* Option/accessory. 267
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
IMPORTANT
Changing to another approved wheel rim
and/or tyre dimension may involve a changed
tyre circumference, which means that the
PAP system's parameters may then need to
be updated. Consult a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
•
•
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 263)
Park assist camera (p. 259)
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 258)
Maintenance
Active Park Assist (PAP)* - symbols
and messages
The combined instrument panel can show different combinations of symbols and text with varying
content - sometimes with a self-explanatory
piece of advice on appropriate action.
If a message says that the Park Assist Pilot is
disengaged, contact with an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
•
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 263)
Park assist camera (p. 259)
The PAP sensors are located in the bumpers44 - 6 front
and 4 rear.
For the PAP function to work correctly, its sensors must be cleaned(p. 258) regularly with water
and car shampoo.
44
268
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting the engine
The engine is started and switched off using the
remote control key and the START/STOP
ENGINE button.
2.
3.
Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed1. (For
cars with automatic gearbox - Depress the
brake pedal.)
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
than normal for certain engine types during
cold starting. This is done in order that the
emissions system can reach normal operating
temperature as quickly as possible, which
minimises exhaust emissions and protects the
environment.
Press the START/STOP ENGINE button
and then release it.
The starter motor works until the engine is
started or until its overheating protection triggers.
IMPORTANT
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts wait for 3 minutes before making a further
attempt. Starting capacity increases if the battery is allowed to recover.
Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/
inserted. and START/STOP ENGINE button.
IMPORTANT
Do not press in the remote control key incorrectly turned - Hold the end with the detachable key blade; see Detachable key blade detaching/attaching (p. 167)
1.
1
270
Keyless starting (Keyless drive)*
Follow steps 2–3 for keyless (p. 169) starting of
petrol and diesel engines.
NOTE
A prerequisite for the engine to start is that
one of the car's remote control keys with the
keyless start and lock function is in the passenger compartment or cargo area.
WARNING
Always remove the remote control key from
the ignition switch when leaving the car, and
make sure that the key position is 0 - in particular if there are children in the car. For
information on how this works, see Key positions (p. 80).
Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch and press it in to its end position.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
the car while driving or during towing.
Related information
•
Key positions (p. 80)
If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the car.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Switching off the engine
Steering lock
Jump starting
The engine is switched off using the START/
STOP ENGINE button.
The steering lock makes steering difficult if the
car is e.g. taken unlawfully. A mechanical noise
may be noticed when the steering lock unlocks
or locks.
If the starter battery (p. 358) is discharged then
the car can be started with current from another
battery.
To switch off the engine:
•
Press the START/STOP ENGINE button the engine stops.
•
If the car has an automatic gearbox and the
gear selector is not in a position P or if the
car is moving - Press twice or hold the
START/STOP ENGINE button depressed
until the engine stops.
Function
•
The steering lock is activated when the driver's door is opened after the engine has
been switched off.
•
The steering lock is deactivated when the
remote control key is in the ignition switch2
and the START/STOP ENGINE button is
depressed.
Related information
•
Key positions (p. 80)
Related information
•
•
•
2
Starting the engine (p. 270)
Key positions (p. 80)
Steering wheel (p. 87)
In cars with keyless start and lock system it is enough to have a remote control key inside the passenger compartment.
When jump starting the car, the following steps
are recommended to avoid short circuits or other
damage:
1.
Set the car's electrical system in key position
0, see Key positions (p. 80).
2.
Check that the donor battery has a voltage of
12 V.
3.
If the donor battery is installed in another car
- switch off the donor car's engine and make
sure that the two cars do not touch each
other.
}}
271
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
4.
Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps
to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).
11. Start the engine in the car with the discharged battery.
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.
5.
Open the clips on the front cover of the battery in your car and remove the cover.
6.
Connect the red jump lead's other clamp
onto the car's positive terminal (2).
7.
Connect one of the black jump lead's clamps
to the donor battery's negative terminal (3).
8.
Connect the other clamp to a grounding
point, e.g. right-hand engine mounting at the
top, the outer screw head (4).
9.
12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order first the black and then the red.
> Make sure that none of the black jump
lead's clamps comes into contact with the
battery's positive terminal or the clamp
connected to the red jump lead.
WARNING
•
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can
be formed if a jump lead is connected
incorrectly, and this can be enough for
the battery to explode.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid, which
can cause serious burns.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact with
eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large
quantities of water. If acid splashes into
the eyes - seek medical attention immediately.
Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed
securely so that there are no sparks during
the starting attempt.
10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and allow
it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly
higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.
272
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the connections between cable
and car during the starting attempt - this
would involve a risk of sparks.
Related information
•
Starting the engine (p. 270)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Gearboxes
Manual gearbox
Reverse gear inhibitor
There are two main types of gearbox - Manual
and Automatic.
The function of the gearbox is to change the
gear ratio depending on speed and power
requirements.
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibility
of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse gear
during normal forward travel.
•
•
Manual gearbox (p. 273)
Automatic gearbox, Geartronic (p. 274)
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to any drive system components, the working temperature of the
gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of overheating, a warning symbol in the combined
instrument panel lights up and a text message is shown. Follow the recommendation
given in the text message.
•
Follow the gearing pattern printed on the
gear lever and start from neutral position, N
before moving it to R position.
•
Engage reverse gear only when the car is
stationary.
Related information
•
Transmission fluid - grade and volume
(p. 393)
•
Gearboxes (p. 273)
Gearing pattern.
The manual gearbox has 6 gears, the shifting
pattern is imprinted on the gear lever.
•
Depress the clutch pedal fully during each
gear change.
•
Take your foot off the clutch pedal between
gear changes.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when parking
on a slope - leaving the car in gear is not sufficient to hold the car in all situations.
273
STARTING AND DRIVING
Gear shift indicator*
Automatic gearbox
The gear shift indicator notifies the driver when it
is appropriate to engage the next higher or lower
gear in order to obtain the lowest possible fuel
consumption.
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic*
The automatic gearbox Geartronic has a
hydraulic torque converter that transfers power
from engine to gearbox. It has two different gear
modes - Automatic and Manual.
An essential detail in connection with environmental driving is to drive in the right gear and to
change gear in plenty of time.
An indicator is available as an aid on some variants - GSI (Gear Shift Indicator) - which notifies
the driver when it is appropriate to engage the
next higher or lower gear in order to obtain the
lowest possible fuel consumption. However, taking into consideration characteristics such as
performance and vibration-free running, it may be
advantageous to change gear at a higher engine
speed.
Combined instrument panel "Digital" with gear
shift indicator.
The framed number indicates the current gear.
With "Analogue" combined
instrument panel, the gear
positions and indicator arrows
are displayed in its centre.
Manual gearbox
Gear shift indicator for manual
gearbox. Only one marker is
illuminated at a time - it is illuminated in the centre only during normal driving.
At the recommended upshift
the cursor illuminates "+", and at the recommended downshift the cursor illuminates "-"
(marked red in the illustration).
3
274
Related information
•
•
Manual gearbox (p. 273)
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 274)
D: Automatic gear positions. +/–: Manual gear positions.
S: Sport mode*.3
The combined instrument panel shows the position of the gear selector using the following indications: P, R, N, D, S*, 1, 2, 3 etc.
Gear positions
Automatic gear positions are
indicated on the right of the
combined instrument panel.
(Only one marker is illuminated
at a time - the one showing the
current gear selector position.)
The gear lever's gearshift pattern varies depending on engine option.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Symbol "S" for Sport mode is ORANGE when the
mode is active.
P – Parking position
Select P when starting the engine or when the
car is parked.
To be able to move the gear selector from the P
position, the brake pedal must be depressed and
the key position (p. 81) must be II.
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P
position is engaged. Also apply the parking brake
when the car is parked, see Parking brake
(p. 291).
NOTE
The gear selector must be in P position to
allow the car to be locked and alarmed.
IMPORTANT
The car must be stationary when position P is
selected.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when parking
on a slope - the automatic transmission in P
is not sufficient to hold the car in all situations.
R – Reverse
The car must be stationary when position R is
selected.
in a box which corresponds to the gear that has
just been selected.
•
Move the lever forwards towards + (plus) to
change up a gear and release the lever,
which returns to its neutral position between
"+" and "–".
N – Neutral
No gear is engaged and the engine can be
started. Apply the parking brake if the car is stationary with the gear selector in position N.
In order to be able to move the gear selector
from the N position to another gear position, the
brake pedal must be depressed and the key position (p. 81) must be II.
D – Drive
D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and
down takes place automatically based on the
level of acceleration and speed. The car must be
stationary when the gear selector is moved to
position D from position R.
Geartronic – Manual gear positions
(+/-)
The driver can also change gear manually using
the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The car
engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal is
released.
The manual gear position is reached by moving
the lever to the side from position D to the end
position at "+/-". The combined instrument panel's symbol "+/-" changes colour from WHITE to
ORANGE and the digits 1, 2, 3 etc. are displayed
or
•
Pull the lever back towards "–" (minus) to
change down a gear and release it.
The manual gearshift mode "+/-" can be
selected at any time while driving.
Geartronic automatically shifts down if the driver
allows the speed to decrease lower than a level
suitable for the selected gear, in order to avoid
jerking and stalling.
To return to automatic driving mode:
•
Move the lever to the side to the end position
at D.
NOTE
f the gearbox has a Sport programme then
the gearbox will only become manual after the
lever has been moved forwards or backwards
in its "+/-" position. The combined instrument
panel then shifts the indication from S to
show which of the gears 1, 2, 3 etc. is
engaged.
}}
275
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Paddles*
As a supplement to manual gear changing with
the gear selector there are also controls located
on the steering wheel, so-called "paddles".
To be able to change gear with the steering
wheel paddles they must first be activated. This is
by means of pulling one of the paddles toward
the steering wheel - the combined instrument
panel then changes indication from "D" to a figure, which indicates the current gear.
To then change gear one step:
•
Pull one of the paddles backwards - towards
the steering wheel - and release.
A gear change occurs at each pull of the paddle
provided that the engine speed does not leave
the permitted range.
After each gear change the combined instrument
panel changes figure to show the current gear.
NOTE
Automatic deactivation
If the steering wheel paddles are not used
then they are deactivated after a short time this is indicated when the combined instrument panel switches indication, from the figure for the current gear back to "D".
The exception is during engine braking - then
the paddles are activated as long as engine
braking is in progress.
Manual deactivation
The steering wheel paddle shifters can also
be deactivated manually:
•
Both steering wheel "paddles".
"-": Selects the next lower gear.
"+": Selects the next higher gear.
4
276
Pull both paddles toward the steering
wheel and hold until the combined instrument panel changes character from the
figure for the current gear to "D".
The paddles can also be used with the gear
selector in Sport mode* - then the paddles are
constantly activated without being deactivated.
Geartronic - Sport mode (S)
The Sport programme provides sportier
characteristics and allows higher
engine speed for the gears. At the
same time it responds more quickly to
acceleration. During active driving, the use of a
lower gear is prioritised, leading to a delayed
upshift.
To activate Sport mode:
•
Move the gear selector to the side from D
position to the end position at "+S–" - the
combined instrument panel changes indication from D to S.
Sport mode can be selected at any time while
driving.
Geartronic - Winter mode
It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads if
3rd gear is engaged manually.
1.
Depress the brake pedal and move the gear
selector from D position to the end position
at "+/–" - the combined instrument panel
shifts the indication from D to the figure 14.
2.
Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever forward towards "+" (plus) twice - the combined
instrument panel shifts the indication from 1
to 3.
3.
Release the brake and accelerate carefully.
If the car has Sport mode* then "S" is shown first.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
The gearbox "winter mode" means that the car
moves off with a lower engine speed and
reduced engine power on the drive wheels.
Kick-down
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
way to the floor (beyond the position normally
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is
immediately engaged. This is known as kickdown.
Towing
Gear selector inhibitor
If the car has to be towed - see important information in the section Towing (p. 310).
There are two different types of gear selector
inhibitor - mechanical and automatic.
Related information
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
•
Transmission fluid - grade and volume
(p. 393)
•
Gearboxes (p. 273)
If the accelerator is released from the kick-down
position, the gearbox automatically changes up.
G021351
Kick-down is used when maximum acceleration
is needed, such as for overtaking.
Safety function
To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox
control program has a protective downshift inhibitor which prevents the kick-down function.
Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kickdown which would result in an engine speed high
enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens
if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at
high engine speed – the original gear remains
engaged.
When kick-down is activated the car can change
one or more gears at a time depending on
engine speed. The car changes up when the
engine reaches its maximum speed in order to
prevent damage to the engine.
The gear selector can be moved forward and
back freely between N and D. Other positions are
locked with a latch that is released with the inhibitor button on the gear selector.
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever can
be moved forwards or backwards between P, R,
N and D.
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
The automatic gearbox has special safety systems:
Parking position (P)
Stationary car with engine running:
}}
277
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
•
Keep your foot on the brake pedal when
moving the gear selector to another position.
Deactivate automatic gear selector
inhibitor
Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock
Parking position (P)
In order to be able to move the gear selector
from P to other gear positions, the brake pedal
must be depressed and the key position (p. 81)
must be II.
The foot brake can be released before setting
off or reversing uphill - the HSA (Hill Start
Assist) function means that the car does not roll
backwards.
The function means that the pedal pressure in
the brake system remains for several seconds
while the driver's foot is moved from brake pedal
to accelerator pedal.
Shiftlock – Neutral (N)
The temporary braking effect releases after several seconds or when the driver accelerates.
If the gear selector is in the N position and the
car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds
(irrespective of whether the engine is running)
then the gear selector is locked.
In order to be able to move the gear selector
from the N position to another gear position, the
brake pedal must be depressed and the key position (p. 81) must be II.
Hill start assist (HSA)*
Related information
If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat battery, the gear selector must be moved from the P
position so that the car can be moved.
•
Starting the engine (p. 270)
Lift out the contoured insert in the compartment behind the centre console and locate a
spring-loaded button in the bottom of the
compartment.
Press and hold the button.
Move the gear selector from the P position
and release the button.
4.
Refit the storage compartment insert.
Related information
•
278
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 274)
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Start/Stop*
Some engine and gearbox combinations come
fitted with a Start/Stop function which engages
in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at
traffic lights - the engine is then switched off
temporarily and restarts automatically when the
journey is due to continue.
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corporation's core values and it influences all of our
operations. This target orientation has resulted in
several separate energy-saving functions of
which Start/Stop is one, all with the collective
task of reducing fuel consumption, which in turn
helps to reduce exhaust emissions.
General information on Start/Stop
conscious way of driving the car by means of
being able to allow the engine to stop automatically, whenever appropriate.
The car's menu system MY CAR (p. 113) under
heading Drive-E contains information on Volvo's
Start/Stop system, as well as recommendations
for energy-saving driving techniques.
Manual or automatic gearbox
Note that there are differences in the Start/Stop
function depending on whether the gearbox is
manual or automatic.
Related information
•
•
•
Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 279)
Starting the engine (p. 270)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start
(p. 283)
Start/Stop* - function and operation
The Start/Stop function is activated automatically when the engine is started with the key.
The Start/Stop function is activated automatically when the
engine is started with the key.
The driver is made aware of the
function by the function's
On/Off button symbol lighting
up in the combined instrument
panel and the On/Off button
lamp illuminating.
All of the car's normal systems
such as lighting, radio, etc. work as normal even
with an engine that has stopped automatically,
except that some equipment may have the function temporarily reduced, e.g. the climate control
system's fan speed or extremely high volume on
the audio system.
•
•
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 282)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
(p. 281)
Auto-stopping the engine
•
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gearbox (p. 284)
The following is required for the engine to autostop:
•
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages
(p. 285)
•
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 361)
The engine is switched off - it becomes quieter and
cleaner...
The Start/Stop function gives the driver the
opportunity for a more active environmentally
}}
* Option/accessory. 279
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Conditions
A
M/AA
Declutch, set the gear lever in neutral
position and release the clutch pedal the engine stops automatically.
M
Stop the car with the foot brake and
then keep your foot on the pedal - the
engine stops automatically.
A
Auto-starting the engine
Conditions
M/A
A
With the gear lever in neutral position:
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
If the ECO function is activated
then the engine may auto-stop
before the car is completely
stationary.
For certain engine variants the engine may autostop before the car is stationary regardless of
whether the ECO function is activated.
1.
Depress the clutch pedal or press
the accelerator pedal - the engine
starts.
2.
Engage a suitable gear and drive.
A
Maintain foot pressure on the foot
brake and depress the accelerator
pedal - the engine auto-starts.
A
•
A
M
Release the foot pressure on the foot
brake - the engine starts automatically
and the journey can continue.
The following option is also available on
a downhill gradient:
When the engine is auto-stopped, the
combined instrument panel's symbol
for the Start/Stop function illuminates.
280
Deactivating the Start/Stop function
Release the foot brake and let the
car move off - the engine starts
automatically when the speed
exceeds normal walking pace.
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
M+
A
In certain situations, it may
advisable to temporarily switch
off the automatic Start/Stop
function - this is carried out
with a push of this button.
Disengaged function is indicated by
the combined instrument panel's
Start/Stop symbols and the button's
lamp extinguishing.
The Start/Stop function is disengaged until it is
reactivated with the button or until the next time
the engine is started with the key.
Start assistance HSA
The foot brake can also be released on an uphill
slope to auto-start the engine - the HSA (p. 278)
(Hill Start Assist) function prevents the car from
rolling backwards.
HSA means that the pressure in the brake system remains temporarily available while the driver's foot is moved from the brake pedal to the
accelerator pedal for driving off with the engine
having stopped automatically. The temporary
braking effect releases after a couple of seconds
or when the driver accelerates.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Related information
•
•
•
Start/Stop* (p. 279)
Starting the engine (p. 270)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start
(p. 283)
•
•
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 282)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine does not
stop
Conditions
M/AA
Although the Start/Stop function is activated, the
engine does not always stop automatically.
the starter battery's temperature is
below freezing point or too high.
M+
A
The engine does not auto-stop if:
the driver makes greater steering
wheel movements.
M+
A
the exhaust system's particulate filter
is full - the temporarily disengaged
Start/Stop function is reactivated as
soon as an automatic cleaning cycle
has been performed (see Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 300)).
M+
A
the road is very steep.
M+
A
a trailer is connected electrically to the
car’s electrical system.
M+
A
the bonnet has been openedC.
M+
A
Conditions
M/AA
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gearbox (p. 284)
the car has not first achieved
approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) after a key
start or the last auto-stop.
M+
A
•
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages
(p. 285)
•
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 361)
the driver has opened the seatbelt's
buckle.
M+
A
the capacity of the starter battery is
below the minimum permissible level.
M+
A
the engine does not have normal
operating temperature.
M+
A
ambient temperature is around freezing point or above approx. 30 °C.
M+
A
the windscreen's electric heating is
activated.
M+
A
the environment in the passenger
compartment differs from the preset
valuesB - indicated by the ventilation
fan running at a high speed.
M+
A
the car is reversed.
M+
A
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
(p. 281)
the gearbox does not have normal
operating temperature.
A
the atmospheric air pressure is less
than equivalent to 1500-2500 metres
above sea level - the current air pressure varies with the prevailing weather
conditions.
A
}}
* Option/accessory. 281
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
M/AA
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts
Conditions
adaptive cruise control Queue Assist
is activated.
A
An auto-stopped engine may restart in certain
cases without the driver having decided that the
journey should continue.
Steering wheel movementsC.
A
the gear selector is moved out of the
D position to R, S positionD or "+/-".
A
The gear selector is moved out of the
D position to S positionD, R or "+/-".
A
The driver's door is opened with the
gear selector in D position - a "ping"
sound and text message inform that
the Start/Stop function is active.
A
Conditions
A
B
C
D
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
Car with ECC.
With certain engines only.
Sport mode.
Conditions
M/AA
Start/Stop* (p. 279)
Misting forms on the windows.
M+A
Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 279)
The environment in the passenger
compartment deviates from the preset
valuesB.
M+A
There is a temporarily high current
take-off or battery capacity drops
below the lowest permissible level.
M+A
Repeated pumping of the brake
pedal.
M+A
The bonnet is openedC.
M+A
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
In the following cases the engine also starts
automatically if the driver has not depressed the
clutch pedal (manual gearbox) or takes his/her
foot off the brake pedal (automatic gearbox):
Starting the engine (p. 270)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start
(p. 283)
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 282)
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gearbox (p. 284)
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages
(p. 285)
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 361)
The car starts to roll, or there is a
small increase in speed if the car
auto-stopped without being completely stationary.
The driver's seatbelt buckle is opened
with the gear selector in D or N position.
282
A
B
C
D
M/AA
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
Car with ECC.
With certain engines only.
Sport mode.
WARNING
M+A
A
Do not open the bonnet when the engine has
stopped automatically - the engine may suddenly start automatically. First switch off the
engine as normal using the START/STOP
ENGINE button before opening the bonnet.
Related information
•
•
•
Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 279)
Starting the engine (p. 270)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start
(p. 283)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
(p. 281)
•
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gearbox (p. 284)
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
•
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages
(p. 285)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not
auto-start
•
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gearbox (p. 284)
•
•
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 361)
The engine does not always auto-start after having auto-stopped.
•
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages
(p. 285)
•
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 361)
Start/Stop* (p. 279)
In the following cases the engine does not autostart after having auto-stopped:
Conditions
M/A
A
A gear is engaged without declutching
- a display text prompts the driver to
set the gear lever in neutral position in
order to enable automatic starting.
M
The driver is unrestrained.
M
The driver is unrestrained, the gear
selector is in P position and the driver’s
door is open - a normal engine start
must take place.
A
A
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Start/Stop* (p. 279)
Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 279)
Starting the engine (p. 270)
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 282)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
(p. 281)
* Option/accessory. 283
STARTING AND DRIVING
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop
manual gearbox
If a start-up fails and the engine stops, proceed
in accordance with the below:
1.
Check that the driver side's seatbelt is locked
in the seatbelt buckle.
2.
Depress the clutch pedal again - the engine
starts automatically.
3.
In certain cases the gear lever must be set in
neutral position. The combined instrument
panel then shows the text Put gear in
neutral.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
284
Start/Stop* (p. 279)
Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 279)
Starting the engine (p. 270)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start
(p. 283)
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 282)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
(p. 281)
•
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages
(p. 285)
•
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 361)
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Start/Stop* - symbols and
messages
The Start/Stop function can show text messages
in the combined instrument panel.
Symbol
Text message
In combination with this indicator lamp
the Start/Stop function may display
text messages in the combined instrument panel for certain situations. For some of
them there is a recommended action that should
be performed. The following table shows some
examples.
Message
Info/Action
M/AA
Auto Start/Stop Service
required
Start/Stop is not operational. Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
M+A
Autostart Engine running +
acoustic signal
Activated if the driver's door is opened with auto-stopped engine and the gear selector in D position.
Press start button
The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE
button.
Depress clutch pedal to start
The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the clutch pedal to be depressed.
M
Depress brake and clutch
pedals to start
The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the brake or clutch pedal to be depressed.
M
Put gear in neutral to start
Gear is engaged without declutching - disengage and set the gear lever in neutral position.
M
A
M+A
}}
* Option/accessory. 285
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Symbol
A
Message
Info/Action
Select P or N to start
Start/Stop has been deactivated - move the gear selector to N or P position and start the engine
as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button.
A
Press start button
The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE
button and the gear selector in P or N.
A
M/AA
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
If a message does not go out following completion of the action then a workshop should be
contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
286
Start/Stop* (p. 279)
Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 279)
Starting the engine (p. 270)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start
(p. 283)
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 282)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
(p. 281)
•
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gearbox (p. 284)
•
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 361)
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Drive mode ECO*
ECO5
is an innovative Volvo function for automatic-gearbox cars, capable of reducing fuel
consumption by up to 5%, depending on the
driver's driving style. The function gives the driver
the option of a more active environmentally conscious way of driving.
General
The following are changed
upon activation of the ECO
function:
•
•
When the ECO function is activated, several
parameters in the climate control system's
settings are changed, and several electricity
consumer functions are reduced. Certain settings can be reset manually, but full functionality is only restored by deactivating the ECO
function.
ECO - Operation
Engine management and response from the
accelerator pedal.
Start/Stop function - the engine can also
auto-stop before the car has stopped down
to being completely stationary.
•
The Eco Coast function is activated - engine
braking ceases.
•
Climate control system settings - some electricity consumers are deactivated or operate
at reduced power.
Not possible on the V40 CROSS COUNTRY with AWD.
easily verified by means of both the combined
instrument panel's ECO symbol and the ECObutton's lamp illuminating when the function is
activated.
ECO function On or Off
Disengaged ECO function is
indicated by the combined
instrument panel ECO symbol
and the ECO button lamp extinguishing. The function is then
switched off until it is reactivated with the ECO button.
Eco Coast - Function
Gearbox gearshift points.
•
5
NOTE
ECO On/Off
ECO symbol
The ECO function is deactivated when the engine
is switched off, and must therefore be activated
after each time the engine is started. There are
exceptions for certain engines. However, it is
The Eco Coast subfunction means in practice
that engine braking is deactivated, meaning in
turn that the car's kinetic energy is used to coast
for longer distances. When the driver releases
the accelerator pedal the gearbox is automatically
disengaged from the engine whose speed is
reduced to idling speed with minimum consumption.
This function is intended for use in the event of
an anticipated reduction in speed, e.g. to coast
into a zone with a lower speed limit.
Eco Coast enables proactive driving where the
driver can use the so-called "Pulse & Glide"
technique and a minimum of braking.
}}
* Option/accessory. 287
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
A combination of Eco Coast and temporarily
deactivated ECO function can also collectively
contribute to reduced consumption. Accordingly:
•
Active Eco Coast: Long coasting without
engine braking = Low consumption
and
•
Deactivated ECO function: Short coasting
with engine braking = Minimum consumption.
NOTE
However, to achieve optimal low fuel consumption, Eco Coast in combination with
short coasting distances should generally be
avoided.
Activating Eco Coast
The function is activated when the accelerator
pedal is fully released, in combination with the
following parameters:
•
•
•
•
288
Deactivate Eco Coast
In certain situations it may be desirable to deactivate the Eco Coast function. Examples of such
situations include:
•
on steep downhill gradients - to be able to
use engine braking.
•
before an imminent overtaking manoeuvre in order to be able to complete it in the safest possible way.
speed is outside the range of
approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph).
More information and settings
Deactivating Eco Coast and returning to engine
braking can be performed as follows:
•
•
Press the ECO button.
Move the gear lever to manual "S+/-" position.
•
Change gear with the steering wheel paddle
shifters.
•
Actuate the accelerator or brake pedal.
Eco Coast - Limitations
The function is not available if:
•
•
cruise control is activated
Gear selector in D position
Speed within the range of
approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph)
•
The road's downhill gradient is not steeper
than approx. 6%.
manual gear changing is performed with the
steering wheel paddle shifters*
•
engine and/or gearbox are not at normal
operating temperature
•
the gear selector is moved from D- to "S+/-"
position
ECO button activated
•
the road's downhill gradient is steeper than
approx. 6%
The car's menu system MY CAR contains further
information on the ECO concept - see the section MY CAR (p. 113).
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 126)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Foot brake
Braking on wet roads
The foot brake is part of the brake system.
When driving for a long time in heavy rain without
braking, the braking effect may be delayed
slightly when next using the brakes. This may
also be the case after a car wash. It is then necessary to depress the brake harder. For this reason, maintain a greater distance to the traffic
ahead.
The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If a
brake circuit is damaged then the brake pedal will
engage deeper and a higher pressure on the
pedal is needed to produce the normal braking
effect.
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted by a
brake servo.
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the engine
is running.
If the brake is used when the engine is switched
off then the pedal will feel stiff and more force
must be used to brake the car.
For cars with the Hill start assist (HSA)* (p. 278)*
function, the pedal returns more slowly than
usual to normal position if the car is parked on a
gradient or on an uneven surface.
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy
load the brakes can be relieved by using engine
braking. Engine braking is most efficiently used if
the same gear is used downhill as up.
For more general information on heavy loads on
the car, Engine oil - adverse driving conditions
(p. 389).
Brake the car firmly after driving on wet roads
and after a car wash. The brake discs are then
warmed up, dry more quickly and are protected
against corrosion. Take the prevailing traffic situation into account when braking.
Braking on salted roads
When driving on salted roads a layer of salt may
form on the brake discs and brake linings. This
may extend braking distance. For this reason,
keep an extra-large safety distance to the vehicle
ahead. Also make sure of the following:
•
Brake occasionally to remove any layer of
salt. Make sure that other road users are not
put at risk by the braking.
•
Gently depress the brake pedal when driving
is finished and before the next journey starts.
Maintenance
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible,
follow the Volvo service intervals as specified in
the Service and Warranty Booklet.
New and replaced brake linings and brake discs
do not provide optimal braking effect until they
have been "worn in" a few hundred kilometres.
Compensate for the reduced braking effect by
depressing the brake pedal harder. Volvo recommends only fitting brake linings that are approved
for your Volvo.
IMPORTANT
The wear on the brake system's components
must be checked regularly.
Contact a workshop for information about the
procedure or engage a workshop to carry out
the inspection - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Symbols in the combined instrument
panel
Symbol
Specification
Constant glow – Check the brake
fluid level. If the level is low, fill with
brake fluid and check for the cause
of the brake fluid loss.
Constant glow for 2 seconds when
the engine is started – automatic
function check.
}}
* Option/accessory. 289
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
WARNING
If
and
illuminate at the same
time, there may be a fault in the brake system.
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is normal at this stage, drive carefully to the nearest
workshop and have the brake system checked
- an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be
investigated.
Related information
•
•
•
•
290
Parking brake (p. 291)
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 290)
Foot brake - anti-lock braking
system
The anti-lock braking system, ABS (Anti-lock
Braking System), prevents the wheels from locking up during braking.
The function allows the steering ability to be
maintained, and it is easier to swerve to avoid a
hazard for example. Vibration may be felt in the
brake pedal when this is engaged and this is normal.
A short test of the ABS system is made automatically after the engine has been started when the
driver releases the brake pedal. A further automatic test of the ABS system may be made at
low speed. The test may be experienced as pulses in the brake pedal.
Related information
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
(p. 291)
•
•
•
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system
(p. 290)
•
Foot brake (p. 289)
Parking brake (p. 291)
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 290)
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
(p. 291)
Foot brake - emergency brake lights
and automatic hazard warning
flashers
Emergency brake lights are activated to alert
vehicles behind about heavy braking. The function means that the brake light flashes instead of
- as in normal braking - shining with a constant
glow.
Emergency brake lights are activated at speeds
above 50 km/h (31 mph) if the ABS system is
working and/or in the event of heavy braking.
After the car's speed has been slowed below
10 km/h (6 mph) the brake light returns from
flashing to the normal constant glow - while at
the same time the hazard warning flashers(p. 99)
are activated, and they flash until the driver accelerates the car to at least 20 km/h (12 mph) or
they are deactivated with their button.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Foot brake (p. 289)
Parking brake (p. 291)
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
(p. 291)
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system
(p. 290)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Foot brake - emergency brake
assistance
Emergency brake assistance EBA (Emergency
Brake Assist) helps to increase the braking force
and so reduce the braking distance.
EBA detects the driver's braking style and increases the braking force when necessary. The brake
force can be reinforced up to the level when the
ABS system is engaged. The EBA function is
interrupted when the pressure on the brake pedal
is reduced.
Parking brake
Release the foot brake pedal and make sure
that the car is at a standstill position.
4.
If the vehicle moves then the parking brake
lever must be applied at least a little more
firmly.
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked facing uphill:
•
Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill:
Related information
•
Foot brake (p. 289)
Parking brake (p. 291)
Combined instrument panel warning symbol.
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 290)
Applying the parking brake
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system
(p. 290)
3.
When parking the vehicle, always engage 1st
gear (for manual gearbox) or put the gear selector in position P (for automatic gearbox).
When EBA is activated the brake pedal lowers slightly more than usual, depress (hold)
the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the
brake pedal is released then all braking
ceases.
•
Pull the lever firmly.
>
The combined instrument panel
warning symbol comes on. The warning
symbol illuminates regardless of whether
the parking brake is applied gently or
firmly.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when parking
on a slope - leaving the car in gear, or in P if it
has automatic transmission, is not sufficient
to hold the car in all situations.
NOTE
•
•
•
2.
The parking brake prevents the car from rolling
away from stationary by means of mechanically
locking/blocking two wheels.
1.
Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
Disengaging the parking brake
1.
Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
2.
Pull the lever up slightly, press the button,
release the lever and release the button.
> The combined instrument panel warning
symbol goes off.
If the driver forgets to release the parking brake –
in addition to the illuminated warning lamp – a
pinging sound combined with a message in the
}}
291
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
combined instrument panel alerts the driver of
this when the car's speed exceeds 10 km/h
(6 mph).
Related information
•
Foot brake (p. 289)
Driving in water
IMPORTANT
Driving in water means that the car is driven
through deep water on a water-covered roadway. Fording must be carried out with great caution.
Engine damage can occur if water enters the
air filter.
In depths greater than 25 cm, water could
enter the transmission. This reduces the lubricating ability of the oils and shortens the
service life of these systems.
The car can be driven through water at a maximum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of
walking pace. Extra caution must be exercised
when passing through flowing water.
Damage to any component, engine, transmission, turbocharger, differential or its internal
components caused by flooding, hydrostatic
locking or oil shortage, is not covered by the
warranty.
During driving in water, maintain a low speed and
do not stop the car. When the water has been
passed, depress the brake pedal lightly and
check that full brake function is achieved. Water
and mud for example can make the brake linings
wet resulting in delayed brake function.
292
•
If necessary, clean the contacts for the electric heater and trailer coupling after driving in
water and mud.
•
Do not let the car stand with water over the
sills for any long period of time - this could
cause electrical malfunctions.
In the event of the engine stalling in water, do
not try restart - tow the car from the water to
a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended. Risk of engine breakdown.
Related information
•
•
Recovery (p. 311)
Towing (p. 310)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Overheating
Under special conditions, for example hard driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk
that the engine and drive system may overheat in particular with a heavy load.
at idling speed for a few minutes in order to
allow the gearbox to cool down.
•
If the car overheats, the air conditioning may
be switched off temporarily.
•
Do not turn the engine off immediately you
stop after a hard drive.
For information about overheating when driving
with a trailer, see Driving with a trailer (p. 302).
•
Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of
the grille when driving in hot climates.
•
If the temperature in the engine's cooling
system is too high then a warning symbol is
illuminated and a text message High engine
temperature Stop safely is shown in the
combined instrument panel's information display - stop the car in a safe way and allow
the engine to run at idling speed for several
minutes in order to cool down.
•
If the text message High engine
temperature Turn off engine or Engine
coolant level low Stop safely is shown
then the engine must be switched off after
stopping the car.
•
In the event of overheating in the gearbox a
built-in protection function is activated, which
is indicated in the combined instrument
panel with a warning symbol and the text
message Transmission hot Reduce
speed or Transmission hot Stop safely
Wait for cooling - follow the recommendation given and lower the speed and stop the
car in a safe way and allow the engine to run
Driving with open tailgate
When driving with the tailgate open, toxic
exhaust fumes can be sucked into the car
through the cargo area.
WARNING
Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic
exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car
through the cargo area.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to
operate for a time after the engine has been
switched off.
Related information
•
Loading (p. 152)
Related information
•
Driving with a trailer - manual gearbox
(p. 303)
•
Driving with a trailer - automatic gearbox
(p. 304)
293
STARTING AND DRIVING
Overload - starter battery
Before a long journey
Winter driving
The electrical functions in the car load the starter
battery to varying degrees. Avoid using the key
position II when the engine is switched off.
Instead use the I mode - which uses less power,
see Key positions - functions at different levels
(p. 81).
Before a long journey, it makes good sense to
go through the following points:
For winter driving it is important to perform certain checks in order to ensure that the car can
be driven safely.
Also, be aware of different accessories that load
the electrical system. Do not use functions which
use a lot of power when the engine is switched
off. Examples of such functions are:
•
•
•
•
headlamps
windscreen wiper
audio system (high volume).
In which case, charge the starter battery by
starting the engine and then running it for at
least 15 minutes - battery charging is more
effective during driving than running the
engine at idling speed while stationary.
Related information
•
294
Check that the engine is working normally
and that fuel consumption (p. 398) is normal.
•
Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil or
other fluid).
•
•
Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths.
ventilation fan
If the battery voltage is low the information display shows the text Low battery charge Power
save mode. The energy-saving function then
shuts down certain functions or reduces certain
functions such as the ventilation fan and/or
audio system.
–
•
Check the following in particular before the cold
season:
•
The engine coolant (p. 392) must contain
50% glycol. This mixture protects the engine
against frost erosion down to
approximately –35 °C. To avoid health risks,
different types of glycol must not be mixed.
•
The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent
condensation.
•
Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting
in cold weather and also reduce fuel consumption while the engine is cold. For more
information on suitable oils, see Engine oil adverse driving conditions (p. 389).
Carrying a warning triangle (p. 325) is a
legal requirement in certain countries.
Related information
•
•
•
To bear in mind:
Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 343)
Spare wheel* (p. 320)
Lamp replacement - general (p. 347)
IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard
driving or in hot weather.
•
The condition of the battery and charge level
must be inspected. Cold weather places
Starter battery - general (p. 358)
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
great demands on the battery and its
capacity is reduced by the cold.
•
Use washer fluid (p. 357) to avoid ice forming in the washer fluid reservoir.
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recommends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is
a risk of snow or ice.
Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing
Fuel filler flap - manual opening
The fuel filler flap can be opened/closed as follows:
The fuel filler flap can be opened manually when
it cannot be opened from outside.
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement
in certain countries. Studded tyres are not
permitted in all countries.
Slippery driving conditions
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under controlled conditions to learn how the car reacts.
Open/remove the side hatch in the cargo
area (same side as fuel filler flap).
Open the fuel filler flap by slightly pressing in
the rear part of the hatch.
Carefully pull the line back in a straight line.
The flap can now be opened from outside.
Take out the flap.
Close the flap after fuelling.
For a description of locking and unlocking the
fuel filler flap, see Locking/unlocking - fuel filler
flap (p. 178). The fuel filler flap's lock logic also
follows the locking or unlocking of the keyless
system and the central locking system.
Related information
•
Filling up with fuel (p. 296)
IMPORTANT
Pull the wire gently - minimal force is required
to disengage the hatch lock.
Related information
•
•
Locking/unlocking - fuel filler flap (p. 178)
Filling up with fuel (p. 296)
295
STARTING AND DRIVING
Filling up with fuel
3.
The fuel tank is fitted with a capless fuel filler
system. Filling is carried out as follows:
4.
Insert the pump nozzle in the fuel filler opening. Take care to insert the nozzle properly
into the filler pipe. The filler pipe consists of
two opening caps. The nozzle must be
pushed past both caps before refuelling is
started.
Do not overfill the tank but stop refuelling
when the pump nozzle cuts out the first time.
NOTE
Overfilled fuel in the tank can overflow in hot
weather.
NOTE
1.
Open the fuel filler door.
2.
Choose fuel that is approved for use in the
car in accordance with the identifier6 on the
inside of the fuel filler flap.
See information on approved fuels in the
respective section on petrol (p. 297) and
diesel (p. 298).
Avoid spilling by waiting approximately
5-8 seconds before carefully removing the
nozzle once refuelling is complete.
Related information
•
•
Filling with fuel - with a fuel can (p. 300)
Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing (p. 295)
Fuel - handling
Fuel of a lower quality than that recommended
by Volvo must not be used as engine power and
fuel consumption is negatively affected.
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and fuel
splashing in the eyes.
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of
water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol and
diesel are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek
medical attention immediately if fuel has been
swallowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone when
refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark
build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to
fire and injury.
6
296
The identifier in accordance with the CEN standard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout Europe at the
latest by the end of 2018.
STARTING AND DRIVING
IMPORTANT
Mixtures of various fuel types or use of fuels
which are not recommended will invalidate
Volvo's guarantees and any supplementary
service agreements; this is applicable to all
engines.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel grade are factors that could
affect the car's performance.
Related information
•
Economical driving (p. 301)
Fuel - petrol
IMPORTANT
Petrol is a type of engine fuel that is intended for
cars with a petrol engine.
•
Fuel that contains up to 10 percent by
volume ethanol is permitted.
Only use petrol from well-known producers.
Never use fuel of dubious quality. The petrol must
fulfil the EN 228 standard.
•
EN 228 E10 petrol (max
10 percent by volume ethanol) is
approved for use.
Identifier for petrol
•
Ethanol higher than E10 (max.
10 percent by volume ethanol) is not permitted, e.g. E85 is not permitted.
The identifier in accordance with the CEN standard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel
filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel
pumps and their nozzles at filling stations
throughout Europe at the latest by the end of
2018.
These are the identifiers that apply for current
standard fuels in Europe. Petrol with the following
identifiers may be used in cars with petrol engine:
E5 is a petrol with maximum
2.7 % oxygen and maximum
5 volume % ethanol.
Octane rating
•
•
95 RON can be used for normal driving.
98 RON is recommended for optimum performance and minimum fuel consumption.
When driving in temperatures above +38 °C, fuel
with the highest possible octane rating is recommended for optimum performance and fuel economy.
IMPORTANT
E10 is a petrol with maximum
3.7 % oxygen and maximum
10 volume % ethanol.
•
Use only unleaded petrol to avoid damaging the catalytic converter.
•
Fuel containing metallic additives must
not be used.
•
Do not use any additives which have not
been recommended by Volvo.
}}
297
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Related information
•
•
•
Economical driving (p. 301)
Fuel - handling (p. 296)
Filling up with fuel (p. 296)
Fuel - diesel
Diesel is a type of engine fuel that is intended for
cars with a diesel engine.
Only use diesel fuel from well-known producers.
Never use fuel of dubious quality. Diesel fuel
must fulfil the EN 590 or SS 155435 standard.
Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants in
the fuel, such as excessively high volumes of sulphur and metals.
Identifier
The identifier in accordance with the CEN standard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel
filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel
pumps and their nozzles at filling stations
throughout Europe at the latest by the end of
2018.
This is the identifier that applies for current
standard fuel in Europe. Diesel with the following
identifiers may be used in cars with diesel
engine:
B7 is diesel with maximum
7 volume % fatty acid methyl
ester (FAME).
7
298
Fatty Acid Methyl Ester
At low temperatures (lower than 0 °C) a paraffin
precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which may
lead to ignition problems. The fuel qualities that
are sold must be adapted for season and climate
zone, but in the event of extreme weather conditions, old fuel or moving between climate zones,
paraffin precipitate may occur.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When refuelling, check that the area around the fuel filler
pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the paintwork. Wash off any spillage with detergent and
water.
IMPORTANT
Diesel fuel must:
•
fulfil the EN 590 and/or SS 155435
standards
•
have a sulphur content not exceeding
10 mg/kg
•
have a maximum of 7 vol % FAME7 (B7).
STARTING AND DRIVING
IMPORTANT
NOTE
Diesel type fuels that must not be used:
•
•
•
•
Special additives
•
Marine diesel fuel
Heating oil
FAME8
Stop the car on as flat/level ground as
possible - if the car is tilting there is a risk
of air pockets in the fuel supply.
and vegetable oil.
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in
accordance with Volvo recommendations and
generate increased wear and engine damage
that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.
Empty tank
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel starvation, the fuel system needs a few moments to
carry out a check. Before starting the engine
after the fuel tank has been filled with diesel proceed as follows:
1.
Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch and push it in to the end position, see
Key positions (p. 80).
2.
Press the START button without depressing
the brake and/or clutch pedal.
3.
Wait approx. one minute.
4.
To start the engine: Depress the brake
and/or clutch pedal and then press the
START button again.
8
Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel
shortage:
Diesel fuel with maximum 7 vol % FAME (B7) is permitted.
Service intervals for fuel filter
For optimum performance, it is important to follow the service intervals for fuel filter change as
well as to use genuine parts developed specifically for this purpose.
Related information
•
•
•
Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 300)
Fuel - handling (p. 296)
Economical driving (p. 301)
Catalytic converters
The purpose of the catalytic converters is to
purify exhaust gases. They are located close to
the engine so that operating temperature is
reached quickly.
The catalytic converters consist of a monolith
(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel
walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/
rhodium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate a
chemical reaction without being used up themselves.
Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor
The Lambda-sond is part of a control system
intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel
economy. For more information, see Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 398).
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content
of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This
value is fed into an electronic system that continuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel to
air directed to the engine is continuously
adjusted. These adjustments create optimal conditions for efficient combustion, and together with
the three-way catalytic converter reduce harmful
emissions (hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide and
nitrous oxides).
}}
299
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Related information
•
•
•
Economical driving (p. 301)
Fuel - petrol (p. 297)
Fuel - diesel (p. 298)
Filling with fuel - with a fuel can
Diesel particle filter (DPF)
When filling with fuel (p. 296) from a fuel can,
use the funnel located under the floor hatch in
the cargo area.
Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter,
which results in more efficient emission control.
IMPORTANT
Statutory provisions relating to storage of
reserve fuel cans in cars vary from country to
country. Check what does apply.
Take care to insert the funnel properly into the
filler pipe. The filler pipe consists of two opening
flaps. The funnel must be pushed past both flaps
before filling is started.
Related information
•
•
Locking/unlocking - fuel filler flap (p. 178)
Fuel filler flap - manual opening (p. 295)
The particles in the exhaust gases are collected
in the filter during normal driving. So-called
"regeneration" is started in order to burn away
the particles and empty the filter. This requires
the engine to have reached normal operating
temperature.
Filter regeneration takes place automatically and
normally takes 10-20 minutes. It may take a little
longer at a low average speed. Fuel consumption
may increase slightly during regeneration.
Regeneration in cold weather
If the car is frequently driven short distances in
cold weather then the engine does not reach
normal operating temperature. This means that
regeneration of the diesel particle filter does not
take place and the filter is not emptied.
When the filter has become approximately 80%
full of particles, a yellow warning triangle is
shown in the combined instrument panel, and the
message Soot filter full See manual is shown
in the information display.
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car
until the engine reaches normal operating temperature, preferably on a main road or motorway.
The car should then be driven for approximately
20 minutes more.
300
STARTING AND DRIVING
NOTE
•
a smaller reduction of engine power may
be noticed temporarily
•
fuel consumption may increase temporarily
•
•
a smell of burning may arise.
Use the ECO Guide* (p. 70) which indicates
how fuel-efficiently the car is being driven.
•
For lower fuel consumption, activate Drive
mode ECO9 which can further reduce fuel
consumption.
The following may arise during regeneration:
When regeneration is complete the warning text
is cleared automatically.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that
the engine reaches normal operating temperature more quickly.
IMPORTANT
If the filter is completely filled with particles, it
may be difficult to start the engine and the filter is non-functional. Then there is a risk that
the filter will need to be replaced.
Related information
•
•
Economical driving
Drive economically and eco-consciously by driving smoothly, thinking ahead, and adjusting your
driving style and speed to the prevailing conditions.
Fuel - diesel (p. 298)
•
•
Drive with the correct air pressure in the
tyres and check this regularly - select ECO
tyre pressure for best results, see Tyres approved tyre pressures (p. 405).
•
Choice of tyres can affect fuel consumption seek advice on suitable tyres from a dealer.
•
Remove unnecessary items from the car the greater the load the higher the fuel consumption.
•
Use engine braking to slow down, when it
can take place without risk to other road
users.
•
Drive in the highest gear possible, adapted to
the current traffic situation and road - lower
engine speeds result in lower fuel consumption. Use the gear shift indicator (p. 274)11.
•
A roof load and space box increase air resistance, leading to higher fuel consumption remove the load carriers when not in use.
•
•
Avoid driving with open windows.
Drive at a steady speed and keep a good distance to other vehicles and objects to minimise braking.
•
For more information, see Environmental philosophy (p. 22) and Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 398).
High speed results in increased fuel consumption - the wind resistance increases
with speed.
•
Do not run the engine to operating temperature at idling speed, but rather drive with a
Economical driving (p. 301)
9 Applies to automatic gearbox.
10 See "Drive mode ECO".
11 Applies to manual gearbox.
Use the Eco Coast10 freewheel function engine braking will cease and the car's
kinetic energy can be used to freewheel for
longer distances.
normal load right after starting - a cold
engine consumes more fuel than a warm
one.
}}
* Option/accessory. 301
STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while moving,
such as downhill, this deactivates important
systems such as the power steering and
brake servo.
Driving with a trailer
When driving with a trailer there are a number of
important points to think about regarding e.g. the
towing bracket, the trailer and how the load is
positioned in the trailer.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight. For more
detailed information, see Weights (p. 385).
If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo, then
the car is delivered with the necessary equipment
for driving with a trailer.
•
The car's towing bracket must be of an
approved type.
•
If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your
Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped for
driving with a trailer.
•
Distribute the load on the trailer so that the
weight on the towing bracket complies with
the specified maximum towball load.
•
Increase the tyre pressure to the recommended pressure for a full load. For information on the tyre pressure, see Tyres approved tyre pressures (p. 405).
•
302
The engine is loaded more heavily than usual
when driving with a trailer.
•
Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
brand new. Wait until it has been driven at
least 1000 km.
•
The brakes are loaded much more than usual
on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift
to a lower gear and adjust your speed.
•
For safety reasons, the maximum permitted
speed for the car when coupled with a trailer
should not be exceeded. Follow the regulations in force for the permitted speeds and
weights.
•
Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep ascents.
•
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more
than 12%.
Trailer cable
An adapter is required if the car's towing bracket
has a 13 pin connector and the trailer has a 7 pin
connector. Use an adapter cable approved by
Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on the
ground.
Direction indicators and brake lights on
the trailer
If any of the trailer's lamps for direction indicators
are broken, the symbol for direction indicators in
the combined instrument panel flashes faster
than normal and the information display shows
the text Trailer indicator malfunction.
STARTING AND DRIVING
If any of the trailer's lamps for the brake light are
broken then the Trailer brake light
malfunction text is shown.
Level control*
The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant
height irrespective of the car's load (up to the
maximum permissible weight). When the car is
stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly,
which is normal.
Trailer weights
For information on Volvo's permitted trailer
weights, see Towing capacity and towball load
(p. 386).
Related information
•
•
Towing bracket (p. 304)
Lamp replacement - general (p. 347)
Driving with a trailer - manual
gearbox
When driving with a trailer (p. 302) in hilly terrain
in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.
•
Do not run the engine at higher revolutions
than 4500 rpm (diesel engines: 3500 rpm) otherwise the oil temperature may become
too high.
Related information
•
Manual gearbox (p. 273)
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer weights
are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle
regulations can further limit trailer weights
and speeds. Towbars can be certified for
higher towing weights than the car can
actually tow.
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for trailer
weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be
difficult to control in the event of sudden
movement and braking.
* Option/accessory. 303
STARTING AND DRIVING
Driving with a trailer - automatic
gearbox
Starting on a hill
Towing bracket
1.
Depress the foot brake.
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot
climate there may be a risk of overheating.
2.
Move the gear selector to driving position D.
A towing bracket means that it is possible to e.g.
tow a trailer behind the car.
3.
Release the parking brake.
4.
Release the foot brake and start driving off.
•
An automatic gearbox selects the optimum
gear related to load and engine speed.
•
In the event of overheating, a warning symbol
is illuminated in the combined instrument
panel and a text message is shown in the
information display - follow the recommendation given.
Related information
•
If the car is equipped with a removable towbar,
the installation instructions for the loose section
must be followed carefully, see Detachable towbar* - attachment/removal (p. 306).
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 274)
WARNING
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable
towbar:
Steep inclines
•
Do not lock the automatic transmission in a
higher gear than the engine "can cope with"
- it is not always a good idea to drive at a
high gear with low engine revolutions.
Parking on a hill
304
1.
Depress the foot brake.
2.
Activate the parking brake.
3.
Move the gear selector to position P.
4.
Release the foot brake.
•
Move the gear selector to park position P
when parking an automatic car with a hitched
trailer. Always use the parking brake.
•
Block the wheels with chocks when parking
a car with hitched trailer on a hill.
•
Follow the installation instructions carefully.
•
The detachable section must be locked
with the key before setting off.
•
Check that the indicator window shows
green.
Important checks
•
The towbar's towball must be cleaned and
greased regularly.
WARNING
The moving parts of the detachable towbar
must not be lubricated/oiled. This may reduce
safety.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
NOTE
When a hitch with a vibration damper is used,
the towball must not be lubricated.
Detachable towbar* - storage
Detachable towbar* - specifications
Store the detachable towbar in the cargo area.
Specifications for detachable towbar.
This also applies when fitting a bicycle rack
that is clamped in around the towball.
Related information
Driving with a trailer (p. 302)
Detachable towbar* - specifications (p. 305)
Detachable towbar* - storage (p. 305)
G021485
•
•
•
The detachable towbar must be stored in the foam
block12 under the cargo area floor when not in use.
IMPORTANT
Always remove the detachable towbar after
use and store it in the designated location in
the car.
Related information
•
•
•
12
Detachable towbar* - specifications (p. 305)
Detachable towbar* - attachment/removal
(p. 306)
Driving with a trailer (p. 302)
The figure is schematic, the foam block may have different appearances depending on the car's equipment.
}}
* Option/accessory. 305
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 302)
Detachable towbar* - attachment/
removal
The attachment/removal of the detachable towbar is performed in the following way:
Attaching
Dimensions, mounting points (mm)
887
79
C
881
D
441
E
109
F
306
G
Side member
H
Ball centre
Remove the protective cover by first pressing
and then pulling the cover
in the catch
.
straight back
G021487
A
B
Related information
306
•
Detachable towbar* - attachment/removal
(p. 306)
•
Detachable towbar* - storage (p. 305)
Ensure that the mechanism is in the
unlocked position by turning the key clockwise.
* Option/accessory.
The indicator window must show red.
The indicator window must show green.
G021494
G021490
G021488
STARTING AND DRIVING
Check that the towball section is secure by
pulling it up, down and back.
WARNING
Insert the towball section until you hear a
click.
G000000
G021489
If the towball is not fitted correctly then it
must be detached and reattached in accordance with the previous instructions.
Turn the key anticlockwise to locked position.
Remove the key from the lock.
IMPORTANT
Only grease in the ball for the towball hitch,
the remainder of the towbar must be clean
and dry.
NOTE
When a hitch with a vibration damper is used,
the towball must not be lubricated.
}}
307
STARTING AND DRIVING
G021495
||
Safety cable.
Push in the locking wheel
and turn it
anticlockwise
until you hear a click.
WARNING
Push the protective cover until it snaps tight.
Related information
•
•
•
Take care to secure the trailer's safety cable
in the intended bracket.
Detachable towbar* - storage (p. 305)
Detachable towbar* - specifications (p. 305)
Driving with a trailer (p. 302)
Removal of removable towbar
Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it
comes to a stop. Hold it in this position while
pulling the towball rearward and upward.
WARNING
Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the
unlocked position.
308
Secure the detachable towbar safely if it is
stored in the car, see Detachable towbar* storage (p. 305).
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Trailer Stability Assist - TSA13
The trailer stability assist TSA (Trailer Stability
Assist) function is designed to stabilise the car
and trailer combination if it begins to snake.
TSA- the function is included in the stability system (p. 186) ESC14.
Function
The snaking phenomenon can occur with any
car/trailer combination. Snaking normally occurs
at high speeds. But, there is a risk of it occurring
at lower speeds if the trailer is overloaded or the
load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a
triggering factor, e.g.:
•
Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and
powerful side wind.
•
Car with trailer drives on an uneven road surface or in a pothole.
•
Sweeping steering wheel movements.
Operation
If snaking has started, it could be difficult or even
impossible to suppress. This makes the car/
trailer combination difficult to control and there is
a risk that you could, for example, end up in the
wrong lane or leave the carriageway.
13
14
The trailer stability assist function continually
monitors car movements, particularly lateral
movements. If snaking is detected, the front
wheels are individually braked. This serves to stabilise the car/trailer combination. This is often
enough to help the driver regain control of the
car.
tem cannot determine whether it is the trailer or
the driver that is causing the snaking.
If snaking is not eliminated the first time the TSA
system comes into action, the car/trailer combination is braked with all wheels and engine
power is reduced. Once snaking has been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer combination is
once again stable, the TSA system stops regulating and the driver once again has full control of
the car. For more information, see Electronic stability control (ESC) - general (p. 186).
•
The ESC14 symbol in the combined
instrument panel flashes when the TSA
system is working.
Related information
Electronic stability control (ESC) - general
(p. 186)
Miscellaneous
Engagement of the TSA system may take place
at higher speeds.
NOTE
TSA function is switched off if the driver
selects Sport mode, see Electronic stability
control (ESC) - general (p. 186).
TSA may fail to engage if the driver uses severe
steering wheel movements to try to rectify the
snaking because in such a situation the TSA sys-
Included in the installation of Volvo genuine towbar.
(Electronic Stability Control) - Electronic stability control.
309
STARTING AND DRIVING
Towing
WARNING
During towing, one vehicle is towed by another
vehicle using a tow rope.
•
Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for
towing before the towing begins.
1.
Activate the car's hazard warning flashers.
2.
Attach the tow rope in the towing eye.
3.
Unlock the steering lock (p. 271) by inserting
the remote control key in the ignition switch
and giving a long press on the START/
STOP ENGINE button - key position II
(p. 81) is activated.
4.
The remote control key must remain in the
ignition switch while the car is being towed.
5.
Keep the towline taut when the towing vehicle reduces speed by holding your foot gently pressed on the brake pedal - thereby
avoiding unnecessary jerking.
6.
Be prepared to brake to stop.
Check that the steering lock is unlocked
before towing.
•
The remote control key must be in key
position II - in position I all airbags are
deactivated.
•
Never remove the remote control key
from the ignition switch when the car is
being towed.
WARNING
The brake servo and power steering do not
work when the engine is switched off - the
brake pedal needs to be depressed
about 5 times more heavily and the steering is
considerably heavier than normal.
Manual gearbox
Prior to towing:
–
Automatic gearbox Geartronic
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be towed with
the wheels rolling forward.
•
Do not tow cars with automatic transmission at speeds higher than 80 km/h
(50 mph) or for distances in excess of 80
km.
Prior to towing:
–
Move the gear selector to position N and
release the parking brake.
Jump starting
Do not tow the car to bump start the engine. Use
a donor battery if the starter battery is discharged
and the engine does not start, see Jump starting
(p. 271).
Move gear lever into neutral and release the
parking brake.
IMPORTANT
The catalytic converter may be damaged during attempts to tow-start the engine.
Related information
•
•
310
Hazard warning flashers (p. 99)
Towing eye (p. 311)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Towing eye
3.
Use the towing eye for towing a vehicle. The
towing eye is screwed into a threaded socket
behind a cover on the right-hand side of the
bumper, front or rear.
Screw the towing eye right in up to its flange.
Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g. using the
wheel wrench*.
IMPORTANT
Recovery
Recovery means that the vehicle is transported
away by means of another vehicle.
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing on
roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out
of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery
assistance.
Attaching the towing eye
Removal
1.
Unscrew and remove the towing eye after
use. Place the towing eye back in its position
in the foam block.
2.
Refit the cover on the bumper.
Note that the car must always be transported
with the wheels rolling forward.
Related information
•
Towing (p. 310)
Related information
1.
Take out the towing eye that is stored in the
foam block under the cargo area floor.
2.
The cover for the towing eye's attachment
point is opened as follows:
•
•
•
Towing (p. 310)
Recovery (p. 311)
The cover has a marking along one side
or in a corner: Press the marking with a
finger and fold out the opposite side/
corner at the same time - the cover turns
around its axis and can then be removed.
* Option/accessory. 311
WHEELS AND TYRES
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyres - maintenance
New tyres
Amongst other things, the function of the tyres is
to carry load, provide grip on the road surface,
dampen vibration and protect the wheel from
wear.
Driving characteristics
Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure
and speed rating are important for how the car
performs.
Tyre age
All tyres older than 6 years old should be
checked by an expert even if they seem undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even if they are
hardly ever or never used. The function can
therefore be affected. This applies to all tyres that
are stored for future use. Examples of external
signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for
use are cracks or discoloration.
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin
to harden at the same time as the friction
capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For
this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible
when you replace them. This is especially important with regard to winter tyres. The last four digits in the sequence mean the week and year of
manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking
(Department of Transportation), and this is stated
with four digits, for example 1510. The tyre in the
figure was manufactured in week 15 of 2010.
Summer and winter wheels
When summer and winter wheels are changed
the wheels should be marked with which side of
the car they were mounted on, for example L for
left and R for right.
314
Wear and maintenance
Correct tyre pressure (p. 316) results in more
even wear. Driving style, tyre pressure, climate
and road condition affect how quickly your tyres
age and wear. To avoid differences in tread depth
and to prevent wear patterns (p. 316) arising, the
front and rear wheels can be switched with each
other. A suitable distance for the first change is
approx. 5000 km and then at 10000 km intervals. Volvo recommends the an authorised Volvo
workshop is contacted for checking if you are
uncertain about tread depth. If significant differences in wear (> 1 mm difference in tread depth)
between tyres have already occurred, then the
least worn tyres must always be fitted on the rear.
Understeer is normally easier to correct than
oversteer, and leads to the car continuing forwards in a straight line rather than having the
rear end skidding to one side, resulting in possible complete loss of control over the car. This is
why it is important for the rear wheels never to
lose grip before the front wheels.
Wheels with tyres fitted must be stored lying
down or hanging up - never standing up.
WARNING
A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control
over the car.
WHEELS AND TYRES
•
•
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 317)
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 318)
Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 315)
Tyres - direction of rotation
NOTE
Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to
only turn in one direction have the direction of
rotation marked with an arrow.
Make sure that both pairs of wheels have the
same type and dimension, and also the same
make.
Follow the recommended tyre pressure (p. 316)
specified in the tyre pressure table.
Related information
G021778
Related information
•
•
•
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 317)
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 318)
Tyres - maintenance (p. 314)
Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 316)
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
The tyre must always rotate in the same direction
throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only be
switched between front and rear positions, never
between left and right-hand sides, or vice versa. If
the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's braking
characteristics and capacity to force rain and
slush out of the way are adversely affected. Tyres
with the greatest tread depth should always be
fitted to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk
of skidding).
315
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyres - tread wear indicators
Tyres - air pressure
Tread wear indicators show the status of the
tyre's tread depth.
Tyres can have different air pressures which are
measured in bar.
Tyre pressure label
Check the air pressure in the tyres
G021829
Tread wear indicators.
A tread wear indicators is a narrow elevation
across the longitudinal grooves of the tyre's tread
pattern. On the side of the tyre are the letters
TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread
depth is down to 1.6 mm, the tread will be level in
height with the tread wear indicators. Change to
new tyres as soon as possible. Remember that
tyres with little tread depth provide very poor grip
in rain and snow.
Related information
•
•
•
316
Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel consumption, shortens tyre lifespan and impairs the
car's driving characteristics. Driving on tyres with
tyre pressure that is too low could result in the
tyres overheating and being damaged. Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, road noise and
driving characteristics.
NOTE
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a
natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature.
G021830
The air pressure for the tyres should be checked
every month and should be checked on cold
tyres. "Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same
temperature as the ambient temperature. After
several few kilometres of driving, the tyres warm
up and the pressure increases.
The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door
pillar (between frame and rear door) shows which
pressure the tyres should have at different loads
and speed conditions. This is also specified in the
tyre pressure table.
Tyre pressure for the car's recommended tyre
dimension and information about ECO pressure
that results in improved fuel economy can be
found in the printed owner's manual.
NOTE
Temperature differences change the
tyre pressure.
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 318)
Tyres - air pressure (p. 316)
Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 315)
Fuel economy, ECO pressure
When carrying a light load (max. 3 people) and at
speeds of up to 160 km/h (100 mph), the ECO
WHEELS AND TYRES
pressure can be selected to give the best possible fuel economy. If the best possible noise and
travelling comfort conditions are sought, the
lower comfort pressures are recommended
instead.
(See approved tyre pressures(p. 405).)
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 318)
Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 315)
Tyres - maintenance (p. 314)
Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 316)
Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 405)
Wheel and wheel rim dimensions
Tyres - dimensions
Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in
accordance with the examples in the table
below.
The car's tyres have a certain dimension, see the
examples in the table below.
The car has an approval for the complete vehicle.
This means that there are certain combinations
of wheels and tyres that are approved.
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres. Example of designation:215/55R16 97W.
205
Tyre width (mm)
50
Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre
width (%)
R
Radial ply
17
Rim diameter in inches (")
93
Codes for the maximum permitted tyre
load, load index (p. 318) (LI)
W
Speed rating for maximum permitted
speed, speed rating (p. 318) (SS). (In
this case 270 km/h (168 mph)).
For information about approved dimensions, see
Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions
(p. 402).
Wheels (rims) have a designation of dimensions,
for example: 7Jx16x50.
7
Rim width in inches
J
Rim flange profile
16
Rim diameter in inches
50
Off-set in mm (distance from wheel centre to wheel contact surface against the
hub)
Related information
•
Wheel nuts (p. 319)
The car has an approval for the complete vehicle
with certain combinations of wheel rims and
tyres.
For information about approved dimensions, see
Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions
(p. 402).
Related information
•
•
Tyres - air pressure (p. 316)
Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 315)
}}
317
WHEELS AND TYRES
•
•
Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 316)
Tyres - load index
Tyres - speed ratings
Load index and speed rating (p. 404)
Load index indicates a tyre's ability to carry a
certain load.
Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum
speed and therefore belongs to a particular
speed rating (SS - Speed Symbol).
Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load, a
load index (LI). The car's weight determines the
load capacity required of the tyres.
Minimum permitted index is specified in the load
index table, see Load index and speed rating
(p. 404).
Related information
•
•
•
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 317)
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 318)
Tyres - air pressure (p. 316)
Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 316)
Tyre speed class must at least correspond with
the car's top speed. The table below indicates the
maximum permitted speed that applies for each
speed rating (SS). The only exception to these
conditions is winter tyres (p. 320) (both those
with metal studs and those without), where a
lower speed rating may be used. If such a tyre is
chosen, the car must not be driven faster than
the speed rating of the tyre (for example, class Q
can be driven at a maximum of 160 km/h
(100 mph)). Traffic regulations determine how
fast a car can be driven, not the speed rating of
the tyres.
NOTE
The maximum permitted speed is specified in
the table.
318
Q
160 km/h (100 mph) (only used on winter tyres)
T
190 km/h (118 mph)
H
210 km/h (130 mph)
V
240 km/h (149 mph)
WHEELS AND TYRES
W
Y
270 km/h (168 mph)
Wheel nuts
Locking wheel nuts*
300 km/h (186 mph)
Wheel nuts are used to fasten the wheels at the
hubs and are available in different versions.
Locking wheel nuts can be used on both aluminium and steel rims. Under the cargo area floor
there is space for the sleeve for the lockable
wheel nuts.
WARNING
Related information
The car must be fitted with tyres which have
the same or a higher load index (p. 318) (LI)
and speed rating (SS) than specified. If a tyre
with too low a load index or speed rating is
used, it may overheat.
•
Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 317)
Related information
•
•
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 317)
Tyres - air pressure (p. 316)
Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 315)
Standard wheel nuts
Bulge acorn wheel nuts
Locking wheel nuts
Tightening torque
•
Type 1 wheel nut (steel wheel rim): 110
Nm
•
Type 2 wheel nut (aluminium wheel rim):
130 Nm
•
Type 3 Lockable wheel nut (steel/aluminium wheel rim): 110 Nm
Only use rims that are tested and approved by
Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories.
Check the torque with a torque wrench.
* Option/accessory. 319
WHEELS AND TYRES
Winter tyres
Winter tyres are tyres that are adapted for winter
road conditions.
Winter tyres
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular
dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on
engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, the
correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four
wheels.
mends not to drive on winter tyres that have a
tread depth of less than 4 mm.
Using snow chains
Snow chains may only be used on the front
wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).
Never drive faster than 50 km/h (30 mph) with
snow chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
WARNING
NOTE
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent
chains designed for the car model, and tyre
and rim dimensions. In the event of uncertainty Volvo recommends that you consult an
authorised Volvo workshop. The wrong snow
chains may cause serious damage to your car
and lead to an accident.
Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo
dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types
are most suitable.
Studded tyres
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for
500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into
the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the
studs, a longer service life.
Spare wheel*
A spare wheel (Temporary spare) is used to temporarily replace a punctured normal wheel.
A spare wheel is only intended for use temporarily and must be replaced by a normal wheel as
soon as possible. The car's handling may be
altered by the use of a spare wheel. The spare
wheel is smaller than the normal wheel. The car's
ground clearance is affected accordingly. Pay
attention to high kerbs and do not machine wash
the car. If the spare wheel is fitted on the front
axle, you cannot use snow chains at the same
time. On all-wheel drive cars the drive on the rear
axle can be disconnected. The spare wheel must
not be repaired. The correct tyre pressure for the
spare wheel is stated in the tyre pressure table,
Tyres - air pressure (p. 316).
IMPORTANT
Related information
•
Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 322)
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded
tyres vary from country to country.
Tread depth
Road conditions with ice, slush and low temperatures place considerably higher demands on tyres
than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recom-
320
•
Never drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph) with a spare wheel on the car.
•
The car must never be driven fitted with
more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.
Related information
•
•
•
Changing wheels - fitting (p. 324)
•
Jack* (p. 326)
Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 322)
Changing wheels - taking out the spare
wheel* (p. 321)
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
•
•
Warning triangle (p. 325)
Wheel nuts (p. 319)
Changing wheels - taking out the
spare wheel*
5.
The spare wheel* plus jack* and wheel wrench*
are stored under the floor in the cargo area.
Take hold of the far end of the spare wheel,
then lift. Push the spare wheel forwards
slightly and lift it out of the storage compartment.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
1.
Lift the rear edge of the luggage compartment floor (or on models with a jointed luggage compartment floor, take hold of the
luggage compartment floor handle, lift and
move the rear part of the floor forwards).
2.
Lift out the storage compartment* (only models with a jointed cargo area floor).
3.
Lift out the lower floor (models with a jointed
luggage compartment floor only).
4.
Undo the attaching screw and lift out the
foam block containing the jack and tools.
Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 322)
Changing wheels - fitting (p. 324)
Jack* (p. 326)
Spare wheel* (p. 320)
Warning triangle (p. 325)
Wheel nuts (p. 319)
* Option/accessory. 321
WHEELS AND TYRES
Changing wheels - removing wheels
3.
Place chocks in front of and behind the
wheels which will remain on the ground to
prevent them from rolling. Use heavy wooden
blocks or large stones for example.
4.
Cars with steel rims have removable wheel
covers. Use the removal tool to hook in and
pull off any full-wheel wheel covers. Alternatively, the wheel covers can be pulled away by
hand.
The car's wheels can be changed, e.g. to winter
wheels or a spare wheel.
Set up the warning triangle (p. 325) if a wheel
must be changed in a trafficked location. The car
and jack(p. 326)* must be on a firm horizontal
surface.
1.
Apply the parking brake, (p. 291) and
engage reverse gear, or position P if the car
has an automatic gearbox.
5.
Screw together the towing eye with the
wheel wrench* to the stop position.
WARNING
Check that the jack is not damaged, that the
threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is
free from dirt.
Wheel wrench and towing eye.
IMPORTANT
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack* that
belongs to the car model in question, which is
indicated on the jack's label.
The towing eye must be screwed into all
threads in the wheel wrench*.
The decal also indicates the jack's maximum
lift capacity at a specified lifting height.
2.
322
Take out the wheel to be fitted as well as the
tools. If it is a spare wheel being fitted then
there is a package in its location containing
gloves and a plastic bag for the punctured
wheel.
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
6.
Remove the plastic caps from the wheel nuts
with the intended tool.
WARNING
8.
7.
WARNING
Never position anything between the ground
and the jack, nor between the jack and the
car's jacking point.
There are two jacking points on each side of
the car. Wind up the jack* so that the flange
in the bodywork ends up in the notch in the
head of the jack.
Never crawl under the car when it is raised on
the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack. If a wheel must be
changed in a trafficked environment, passengers must stand in a safe place.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Loosen the wheel nuts ½-1 turn anticlockwise with the wheel wrench*.
Changing wheels - fitting (p. 324)
Changing wheels - taking out the spare
wheel* (p. 321)
Spare wheel* (p. 320)
Warning triangle (p. 325)
Wheel nuts (p. 319)
IMPORTANT
The ground under the jack must be firm,
smooth and level.
9.
Lift the car so that the wheel is free. Remove
the wheel nuts and lift off the wheel.
* Option/accessory. 323
WHEELS AND TYRES
Changing wheels - fitting
3.
Lower the car so that the wheels cannot
rotate.
4.
Tighten the wheel nuts crosswise. It is important that the wheel nuts are tightened with
the correct tightening torque. Check the torque with a torque wrench.
It is important that the procedure for fitting the
wheel is carried out correctly.
6.
Installation
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised on
the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack. If a wheel must be
changed in a trafficked environment, passengers must stand in a safe place.
1.
Clean the contact surfaces between wheel
and hub.
2.
Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel nuts
thoroughly.
Refit any full wheel covers.
5.
Refit the plastic caps on the wheel nuts.
NOTE
The wheel cover outlet for the valve must be
positioned over the valve on the wheel rim
during fitting.
Returning the tools to their places
After using the tools they must be returned to
their correct places in the foam block.
If the spare wheel has been used then the punctured wheel can be placed in the plastic bag contained in the package with the gloves. Return the
foam block to its place and press the retaining
screw down into the floor of the storage compartment.
324
WHEELS AND TYRES
IMPORTANT
The tools and jack* must be stored in the
intended location in the car's cargo area
when not in use.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is used to warn other road
users of a stationary vehicle.
Storage and folding up
NOTE
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
Lift the floor hatch (or push the rear part of
the luggage compartment floor forwards in
models with a jointed floor and then lift the
lower floor) and remove the warning triangle.
Take the warning triangle from the case, fold
out and assemble the two loose sides.
When changing to another tyre
dimension
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop to update
the software each time the tyre dimension is
changed. A software download may be necessary
both when changing to larger and smaller dimensions, and also when switching between summer
and winter wheels.
Related information
•
Changing wheels - taking out the spare
wheel* (p. 321)
•
•
•
•
Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 322)
Fold out the warning triangle's support legs.
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning
triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suitable place with regard to traffic.
Ensure the warning triangle and its case are
properly secured in the cargo area after use.
Related information
•
Spare wheel* (p. 320)
Spare wheel* (p. 320)
Warning triangle (p. 325)
Wheel nuts (p. 319)
* Option/accessory. 325
WHEELS AND TYRES
Jack*
First aid kit*
Tyre monitoring (TM)*1
Use the jack to raise the car when changing a
wheel.
The first aid box contains first aid equipment.
The TM (Tyre Monitor) system senses the rotation speed of the tyres in order to determine
whether they have the correct tyre pressure.
Only use the original jack when fitting a spare
wheel or when changing between summer and
winter wheels. The jack's thread must always be
well greased.
System description
If the tyre pressure is too low, the tyre's diameter
is changed and, as a result, so is its rotation
speed. By comparing the tyres with each other
the system can determine whether one or more
tyres have pressure that is too low.
IMPORTANT
The tools and jack* must be stored in the
intended location in the car's cargo area
when not in use.
NOTE
The normal car jack is only designed for occasional, short-term use, such as when changing a wheel after a puncture, changing to winter/summer wheels, etc. Only the jack for the
specific car model may be used to raise the
car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or
for a longer time than is required just to
change a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the
instructions for use that come with the equipment.
The system does not replace normal tyre maintenance.
Messages
A case containing first aid equipment is located
on the left-hand side of the cargo area.
If the tyre pressure is too low then an indicator
symbol ( ) illuminates in the combined instrument panel and one of the following messages is
shown:
• Tyre pressure low Check, adjust and
calibrate
• Tyre pressure system Service required
• Tyre pressure system Currently
unavailable
Related information
•
•
326
Warning triangle (p. 325)
Emergency puncture repair* (p. 328)
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
WARNING
3.
Start the engine and let the car stand still.
•
Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre
failure, which could result in the driver
losing control of the car.
4.
Open the menu system MY CAR and select
the menu Tyre monitor.
5.
Select Start calibration and press OK.
•
The system cannot indicate sudden tyre
damage in advance.
6.
Press OK after all tyres have been checked
and adjusted in order to start calibration.
7.
Drive the car.
> Calibration is performed when the car is
driven at a speed above 35 km/h
(22 mph). Calibration is interrupted temporarily if the engine is switched off, but is
resumed automatically in the background
when the car is driven again. The system
provides no confirmation when the calibration is complete.
IMPORTANT
If a fault occurs in the TM system the indicator symbol
in the combined instrument
panel will flash for approx. 1 minute and then
illuminate with a constant glow. A message is
also shown in the combined instrument panel.
Deleting the messages
1. Check the tyre pressure in all tyres with a
tyre pressure gauge.
2.
Inflate the tyre/tyres to the correct pressure
in accordance with the tyre pressure label on
the driver's side door pillar (between front
and rear doors).
3.
Recalibrate the TM system in MY CAR.
NOTE
To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure
should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres"
means the tyres are the same temperature as
the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours
after the car has been driven). After a few kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the
pressure increases.
TM calibration
In order for TM system to work correctly, a reference value for the tyre pressure must be determined. This must be done each time the tyres are
changed or the tyre pressure is adjusted by recalibrating the system in MY CAR.
For example, the tyre pressure should be
adjusted when driving with a heavy load or for
high-speed driving (above 160 km/h (100 mph)).
Following which, the system must be recalibrated.
Recalibration
Settings are made using the centre console's
controls, see MY CAR (p. 113).
1.
Stop the engine.
2.
Inflate all tyres to the desired pressure in
accordance with the tyre pressure label on
the driver's side door pillar (between front
and rear doors).
The new reference value applies until steps 1-7
are repeated.
NOTE
Remember that the TM system must be recalibrated at each tyre change or if the tyre
pressure is adjusted. If new reference values
are not stored then the system cannot function properly.
Or see the tyre pressure table.
1
Standard in certain markets.
}}
327
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
System and tyre status
The current status of the system and the tyres
can be checked in the centre console's screen.
1.
Open the menu system MY CAR.
2.
Select the Tyre monitor menu.
> Status for tyre pressures is shown with a
colour code.
The status is colour-coded for each tyre in
accordance with the following:
•
328
for a short time above 35 km/h (22 mph)
before the system becomes active again.
NOTE
All-green: the system is operating normally
and the tyre pressure in all tyres is slightly
above the recommended level.
•
Yellow wheel: corresponding tyre's pressure
is too low.
•
All wheels yellow: two or more tyres have
pressure that is too low.
•
All wheels grey and the message Tyre
pressure system Currently unavailable:
the tyre pressure system is temporarily deactivated. It may be necessary to drive the car
•
All wheels grey and the message Tyre
pressure system Service required: an
error has occurred in the system. Contact a
Volvo dealer or workshop.
Related information
•
Tyres - air pressure (p. 316)
Emergency puncture repair*
The emergency puncture repair kit, Temporary
Mobility Kit (TMK), is used to seal a puncture
and check and adjust the air pressure.
The emergency puncture repair kit consists of a
compressor and a bottle of sealant. The sealing
works as a temporary repair. The sealing fluid
effectively seals tyres punctured in the tread.
The emergency puncture repair kit has limited
capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in the
wall. Do not use the puncture repair kit on tyres
that have larger slits, cracks or similar damage.
NOTE
The emergency puncture repair kit is only
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in
the tread.
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo.
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Location
The puncture repair kit is located in the foam
block2 under the floor in the cargo area.
Related information
Emergency puncture repair kit* overview
•
Emergency puncture repair* - operation
(p. 330)
•
Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking
(p. 332)
Overview of the component parts of the emergency puncture repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit
(TMK).
•
Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview
(p. 329)
The parts are stored under the floor in the cargo
area.
Version 1.
Label, maximum permitted speed
Switch
Electrical cable
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Protective cap
Version 2.
2
The foam block may have different appearances depending on the car's equipment.
Pressure reducing valve
}}
* Option/accessory. 329
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
Air hose
WARNING
Sealing fluid bottle
•
In the event of skin contact with the sealing fluid, it must be washed off immediately with soap and plenty of water.
•
Sealing fluid that makes contact with an
eye must be rinsed away immediately with
eye wash fluid or with plenty of water. If
the discomfort persists then the eye
should be examined by a doctor.
Pressure gauge
Sealing fluid bottle
Replace the sealing fluid bottle before the expiration date has passed. Treat the old bottle as environmentally hazardous waste.
The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced after
use. Volvo recommends that the replacement is
performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
Emergency puncture repair* operation
Sealing a puncture with the emergency puncture
repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK).
Emergency puncture repair
Related information
•
Emergency puncture repair* (p. 328)
WARNING
The bottle with sealing fluid contains 1.2Ethanol and natural rubber-latex.
Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic
reaction in the event of skin contact.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
Store out of the reach of children.
For information on the function of the parts, see Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview (p. 329).
330
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
1.
Set up the warning triangle and activate the
hazard warning lights if a tyre is being sealed
in a trafficked location.
5.
If the puncture was caused by a nail or similar, allow this to remain in the tyre. It helps to
seal the hole.
2.
Detach the label for maximum permitted
speed (which is fitted on one side of the
compressor) and affix it to the steering
wheel. You should not drive faster than
80 km/h (50 mph) after the emergency tyre
repair kit has been used.
3.
Check that the switch is in position 0 (Off),
and locate the electrical cable and the air
hose.
4.
Unscrew the orange-coloured cap from the
compressor, and unscrew the cork from the
sealing fluid bottle.
Screw in the bottle to the bottom of the bottle holder.
> The bottle and the bottle holder are
equipped with a reverse catch to prevent
sealant leakage. When the bottle is
screwed in it cannot be unscrewed from
the bottle holder again. Bottle removal
must be performed at a workshop, Volvo
recommends an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
•
In the event of skin contact with the sealing fluid, it must be washed off immediately
with soap and plenty of water.
•
Sealing fluid that makes contact with an
eye must be rinsed away immediately with
eye wash fluid or with plenty of water. If the
discomfort persists then the eye should be
examined by a doctor.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The
seal is broken automatically when the bottle is
screwed in.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with
a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
6.
Unscrew the tyre's dust cap.
Check that the pressure reducing valve on
the air hose is fully screwed on, and screw in
the air hose's valve connection to the bottom
of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
7.
Plug the electrical cable into the closest
12 V socket and start the car.
NOTE
Make sure that none of the other 12 V sockets is in use when the compressor is operating.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
8.
Start the compressor by flicking the switch to
position I (On).
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the compressor is running. If cracks or unevenness
arise then the compressor must be switched
off immediately. The journey should not be
continued. Call roadside assistance for recovery to a tyre centre. Volvo recommends an
authorised tyre centre.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure
can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure
drops after approximately 30 seconds.
}}
331
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
9.
Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
IMPORTANT
The compressor must not be operated for
longer than 10 minutes - risk of overheating.
14. As soon as possible, drive at least 3 km at a
maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) so
that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre and
then perform a follow-up check.
NOTE
Sealant will spurt out of the puncture during
the first few rotations of the tyre.
10. Switch off the compressor to check the pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum 3.5 bar.
(Release air with the pressure reducing valve
if the tyre pressure is too high.)
WARNING
13. Fit the protective cap on the air hose in order
to avoid leakage of the remaining sealing
fluid.
332
Check tyre pressure
Take out the tyre sealing equipment. The compressor must be switched off.
1.
Connect the air hose on the tyre's air valve
again and check the tyre pressure with the
pressure gauge, see Emergency puncture
repair* - rechecking (p. 332).
Related information
•
•
•
Unscrew the tyre's dust cap.
Take out the air hose and screw in the
valve connection to the bottom of the thread
on the tyre's air valve.
2.
15. Follow-up inspection:
11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the
electrical cable.
12. Unscrew the air hose from the tyre's air valve
and refit the dust cap on the tyre.
When a tyre has been sealed with the emergency puncture repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit
(TMK), a subsequent check must be made after
approx. 3 kilometres of driving.
Make sure that nobody is standing near the
car and gets the sealing fluid splashed onto
them when the car is driven away. The distance should be at least 2 metres (7 feet).
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar (22 psi) then
the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey
should not be continued. Call roadside assistance for recovery to a tyre centre. Volvo recommends an authorised tyre centre.
Emergency puncture repair* rechecking
Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge.
•
If the tyre pressure is below 1.3 bar then
the tyre is insufficiently sealed. The journey should not be continued. Call roadside assistance for recovery.
•
If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar,
the tyre must be inflated to the pressure
specified in accordance with the tyre
pressure label on the driver side door pillar (1 bar = 100 kPa).
•
Release air using the pressure reducing
valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
Emergency puncture repair* (p. 328)
Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking
(p. 332)
Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview
(p. 329)
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
3.
If the tyre needs to be inflated:
NOTE
1. Plug the electrical cable into the closest
12 V socket and start the car.
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be
replaced after use. Volvo recommends that
this replacement is performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
2. Start the compressor and inflate the tyre
to the pressure specified on the tyre pressure label on the driver side door pillar.
3. Switch off the compressor.
4.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends that the car is driven to the
nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the
replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise
the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with
a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
5.
•
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair kit
has been used. Volvo recommends a visit to
an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection
of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance
is 200 km). The staff there can determine
whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it
needs to be replaced.
Refit the dust cap on the tyre.
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
1.
The compressor must be switched off. Make
sure that the switch is in position 0 (Off), and
take out the electrical cable and the air hose.
2.
Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in the
air hose's valve connection to the bottom of
the thread on the tyre's air valve.
3.
Plug the electrical cable into the closest
12 V socket and start the car.
WARNING
NOTE
•
The car's original tyres can be inflated using the
compressor in the emergency puncture repair kit
(p. 329).
WARNING
Remove the tyre sealing equipment.
Fit the protective cap on the air hose in order
to avoid leakage of the remaining sealing
fluid.
Inflating tyres with compressor from
the emergency puncture repair kit*
Related information
•
Emergency puncture repair* - operation
(p. 330)
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine running
in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient
ventilation.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
4.
Start the compressor by flicking the switch to
position I (On).
}}
* Option/accessory. 333
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
IMPORTANT
The compressor must not be operated for
longer than 10 minutes - risk of overheating.
5.
Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on
the tyre pressure label on the driver side
door pillar. Release air using the pressure
reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
6.
Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and the electrical cable.
7.
Refit the dust cap on the tyre.
Related information
•
•
334
Emergency puncture repair* (p. 328)
Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview
(p. 329)
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Volvo service programme
Book service and repair*1
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible,
follow the Volvo service programme as specified
in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Manage service, repair and booking information
directly in your Internet-connected car.
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo
workshop to perform the service and maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel,
special tools and service literature to guarantee
the highest quality of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Related information
•
1
2
336
Climate control system - fault tracing and
repair (p. 347)
This service1 provides a convenient way to book a
service and workshop visit directly in the car. Car
information is sent to your dealer, who can prepare the workshop visit. The dealer will contact
you to schedule an appointment time. For certain
markets, the system reminds you of a scheduled
appointment time as it approaches and the navigation system2 can also guide you to the workshop when the time comes.
4.
Prerequisite for booking from car
• To send and receive booking information
from and to the car, the car must be connected to the Internet, see the Sensus Infotainment supplement for information about
how to connect the car to the Internet.
•
Since the booking information is sent over
your private phone subscription, you will be
asked whether you want to send the information. The question is asked once and then
applies to the selected connection for a limited time.
•
For the service to work and for the system to
communicate via the car's screen, notifications/pop-up messages must be accepted.
In the normal view for the MY CAR source,
press OK/MENU and then Service & repair
Display notifications.
Before the service can be used
Volvo ID and my profile
• Register a Volvo ID. For more information
and how to create a Volvo ID, see Volvo ID
(p. 20).
•
Go to www.volvocars.com, log in and proceed
as follows:
1.
Check that the car is connected to your profile.
Choose preferred communication channel
(phone). Booking information is always sent
to the car and to you via email.
Using the service
2.
Check that your contact information is correct.
All menus and settings are accessed from the
normal view in MY CAR by pressing OK/MENU
and then Service & repair.
3.
Select the Volvo dealer you want to contact
for service and repair.
When it is time for service, and in some cases
when the car is in need of repair, this is notified
Applies to certain markets.
Applies to Sensus Navigation.
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
in the combined instrument panel (p. 66) and via
a pop-up menu in the screen.
Service message in the screen.
Meaning of the answer options in the screen's
pop-up menu:
• Yes - A booking enquiry is sent to your
dealer who then comes back with a booking
proposal. The service lamp and service message in the combined instrument panel are
extinguished.
•
No - No more pop-up messages will be
shown in the screen. The message in the
combined instrument panel remains. After
this option has been selected, it is possible
to start the manual booking in the car, see
below.
1 Applies to certain markets.
2 Applies to Sensus Navigation.
3 Vehicle Identification Number
• Postpone - The pop-up menu is shown the
–
Book a service or repair manually1
1. Press the MY CAR button in the centre console and select Service & repair Dealer
information Request service or repair.
> Vehicle data is sent automatically to your
dealer.
Using the navigation system1, 2
Enter your workshop as destination or waypoint
in the navigation system.
next time the car is started.
2.
The dealer sends a booking proposal to the
car.
3.
Accept or request a new booking proposal.
After the booking has been accepted the booking information is stored in the car, see My bookings. The car will automatically communicate with
you via the screen by means of reminders about
the booking and guide you to the workshop visit.
My bookings1
Show booking information in the car's screen.
Accept or request a new booking proposal.
–
Select Service & repair
dealer1
My bookings.
Call the
With a phone connected to the car via
Bluetooth®, you can call your dealer. For connecting the phone, see the Sensus Infotainment supplement.
Select Service & repair Dealer
information Call dealer.
–
Select Service & repair Dealer
information Set single destination.
–
Select Service & repair Dealer
information Add as waypoint.
Sending vehicle data1
Vehicle data are sent to a central Volvo database
(not your dealer) from which Volvo dealers can
retrieve vehicle information using the car's identification number (VIN3). The number is printed in
the car's service and warranty booklet, alternatively inside the windscreen's bottom left-hand
corner.
–
Select Service & repair
Send car data.
Booking information and vehicle data
When you decide to book a service from your car,
the booking information and vehicle data will be
sent. Vehicle data information consists of information within the following areas:
}}
337
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
•
•
•
•
•
•
service requirement
function status
fluid levels
meter reading
the car's vehicle identification number (VIN3)
the car's software version.
Related information
•
3
338
Volvo ID (p. 20)
Vehicle Identification Number
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Raising the car
When raising the car it is important that the jack
or lifting arms are fitted in the intended points on
the car's underbody.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
belongs to the car model in question. If a jack
is selected other than the one recommended
by Volvo, follow the instructions supplied with
the equipment.
}}
339
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Jacking points (arrows) for the jack that belongs to the car and lifting points (marked in red).
If the car is raised with a front workshop jack
then this must be positioned under one of the
two lifting points furthest in under the car. If the
car is raised with a rear workshop jack then it
must be positioned under one of the lifting
points. Ensure that the workshop jack is positioned so that the car cannot slide off the jack.
Always use axle stands or similar.
If the car is raised with a two-pillar workshop lift
then the front and rear lifting arms can be positioned under the outer lifting points (jacking
points). Alternatively, the inner lifting points can
be used at the front.
Related information
•
340
Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 322)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Bonnet - opening and closing
The bonnet can be opened when the handle in
the passenger compartment has been turned
clockwise and the lock by the radiator grille has
been moved to the left.
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when
closed.
Related information
•
•
Engine compartment - overview
The overview shows some service-related components.
Engine compartment
Engine compartment - checking (p. 342)
Engine compartment - overview (p. 341)
The handle for bonnet opening is always on the lefthand side.
The appearance of the engine compartment may differ
depending on model and engine variant.
Coolant expansion tank
Washer fluid filler pipe
Radiator
Engine oil filler pipe
Turn the handle about 20-25 degrees clockwise. You will hear when the catch releases.
Move the catch to the left and open the bonnet. (The catch hook is located between the
headlamp and radiator grille, see illustration.)
Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid (located
on the driver's side)
Starter battery
Relay and fuse box
Air filter
}}
341
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
WARNING
The ignition system has very high voltage and
output. The voltage in the ignition system is
highly dangerous. The car's electrical system
must always be in key position 0 when work is
being performed in the engine compartment;
see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 81).
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil
when the car's electrical system is in key
position II or when the engine is hot.
Engine compartment - checking
Engine oil - general
Some oils and fluids should be checked at regular intervals.
An approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals can be
applied.
Regular checking
Check the following oils and fluids at regular
intervals, e.g. when refuelling:
•
•
•
Engine oil
Washer fluid
WARNING
Related information
•
•
Coolant
Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 341)
Remember that the radiator fan (located at
the front of the engine compartment, behind
the radiator) may start automatically some
after the engine has been switched off.
Engine compartment - checking (p. 342)
Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. There is a risk of fire if the engine
is hot.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
342
Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 341)
Engine compartment - overview (p. 341)
Coolant - level (p. 345)
Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 343)
Washer fluid - filling (p. 357)
Volvo recommends:
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
When driving under adverse conditions, see
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p. 389).
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are filled
with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil
at the factory. The choice of oil has been
made very carefully with regard to service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption and
environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals can
be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil
for both filling and oil change, otherwise you
will risk affecting service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental
impact.
informed via the instrument's warning symbol
and display texts. Certain variants have
both systems. Contact a Volvo dealer for more
information.
Engine oil - checking and filling
The oil level is detected with the electronic oil
level sensor.
Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance
with the intervals specified in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Using oil of a higher than specified grade is permitted. If the car is driven in adverse conditions,
Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade
than the one specified, see Engine oil - adverse
driving conditions (p. 389).
For filling capacities, see Engine oil - grade and
volume (p. 390).
Related information
•
Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 343)
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty
liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade
and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Volvo uses different systems for warning of low/
high oil level or low oil pressure. Certain engine
variants have an oil pressure sensor, and then the
combined instrument panel's warning symbol for
low oil pressure is used
. Other variants
have an oil level sensor, when the driver is
}}
343
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
IMPORTANT
If notified of low oil level, only fill with the volume specified, for example, 0.5 litres.
NOTE
Filler pipe4.
In some cases, oil may need to be topped up
between service intervals.
No action needs to be taken on engine oil level
until a message is shown in the combined instrument panel's display, see the following illustration.
Message and graphic in the display. The left-hand display is shown in the digital combined instrument panel
and the right-hand in the analogue.
Message
Engine oil level
The oil level is checked using the electronic oil
level gauge with the thumbwheel when the
engine is switched off, see Menu navigation combined instrument panel (p. 110).
WARNING
If the message Oil service required is
shown, visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. The oil level may
be too high.
4
344
Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.
The system cannot directly detect changes
when the oil is filled or drained. The car must
have been driven approx. 30 km (approx.
20 miles) and have been stationary for
5 minutes with the engine switched off and
on level ground before the oil level indication
is correct.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold
due to the risk of fire.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Measuring the oil level
If the oil level needs to be checked then it should
be carried out in accordance with the following
sequence.
1.
Activate key position II; see Key positions functions at different levels (p. 81).
2.
Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand
stalk switch to position Oil level.
> You will then see information displayed
about the engine oil level.
For more information on menu navigation,
see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 110).
NOTE
If the right conditions for measuring the oil
level (time after engine shutdown, the car's
inclination, outside temperature, etc.) are not
met, the message Not available will be
shown. This does not mean that there is
something wrong in the car's systems.
Coolant - level
The coolant cools the internal combustion
engine to the correct operating temperature. The
heat that is transferred from the engine to the
coolant can be used to heat the passenger compartment.
Checking the level
The coolant level must lie between the MIN and
MAX marks on the expansion tank. If the cooling
system is not filled sufficiently, excessively high
temperatures could occur, causing a risk of damage to the engine.
NOTE
Check the coolant level regularly when the
engine is cold.
When topping up the coolant, follow the instructions on the packaging. Never top up with water
only. The risk of freezing increases with both too
little and too much coolant concentrate.
If there is coolant under the car, if there is coolant smoke, or if more than 2 litres have been
filled, always call for recovery to avoid the risk of
engine damage when starting due to a defective
cooling system.
WARNING
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant
requires topping up when the engine is at
operating temperature, unscrew the expansion tank cap slowly to gently release the
overpressure.
Filling
Related information
•
•
Engine oil - general (p. 342)
Key positions - functions at different levels
(p. 81)
}}
345
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
IMPORTANT
•
A high content of chlorine, chlorides and
other salts may cause corrosion in the
cooling system.
Brake and clutch fluid level should be between
the reservoir MIN and MAX marks.
•
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion
agent as recommended by Volvo.
•
Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50%
water and 50% coolant.
Brake and clutch fluid have a common reservoir.
The level must be between the MIN and MAX
marks that are visible inside the reservoir. Check
the level regularly.
•
Mix the coolant with approved quality tap
water. In the event of any doubt about
water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in
accordance with Volvo recommendations.
•
•
When changing coolant/replacing cooling system components, flush the cooling
system clean with approved quality tap
water or flush with ready-mixed coolant.
The engine must only be run with a wellfilled cooling system. Otherwise, temperatures that are too high may occur resulting in the risk of damage (cracks) in the
cylinder head.
For capacities and for standards regarding water
quality; see Coolant - grade and volume (p. 392).
346
Brake and clutch fluid - level
Filling
Checking the level
Change the brake fluid every other year or at
every other regular service.
The fluid should be changed annually on cars
driven in conditions requiring hard, frequent braking, such as driving in mountains or tropical climates with high humidity.
For capacities and recommended brake fluid
grade, see Brake fluid - grade and volume
(p. 394).
WARNING
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid. Volvo recommends that the reason for the loss of
brake fluid is investigated by an authorised
Volvo workshop.
The fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side.
Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid. The
level must be between the MIN and MAX marks,
which are located on the inside of the reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Do not forget to refit the cap.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Climate control system - fault
tracing and repair
The air conditioning system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop.
Fault tracing and repair
The air conditioning system contains fluorescent
tracing agents. Ultraviolet light must be used during leak detection.
Related information
•
Volvo service programme (p. 336)
Lamp replacement - general
Several of the car's bulbs can be replaced by
the driver. For replacement of LED lamps, please
contact a workshop.
The bulbs are specified (p. 354). The following
list contains locations of bulbs and other light
sources that are specialised, such as LED5
Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Cars with R134a refrigerant
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R134a. This system must only
be serviced and repaired by an authorised
workshop.
Cars with R1234yf refrigerant
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with
SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe
Service and Containment of Refrigerants
Used in Mobile A/C System), service and
repair of the refrigerant system must only be
performed by trained and certified technicians
in order to ensure the safety of the system.
5
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
}}
347
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
lamps, or are unsuitable for changing for some
other reason, except at a workshop6:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
position lamps,
front7
Lamp replacement - location of
front lamps
The overview shows the positioning of the lamps
at the front of a car with halogen headlamps.
daytime running lights, front bumper7
NOTE
side direction indicators, door mirrors7
Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear
lamps may temporarily have condensation on
the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to withstand this.
Condensation is normally vented out of the
lamp housing when the lamp has been
switched on for a time.
approach lighting, door mirrors
interior and cargo area lighting
glovebox lighting
position lamps, rear
side marker lamps rear
brake light above the rear windscreen
number plate lighting.
The car’s electrical system must be in key
position 0 when replacing bulbs; see Key
positions - functions at different levels (p. 81).
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease from your fingers is
vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector
and then causing damage.
348
If an error message remains after the broken
bulb has been replaced then we recommend
visiting an authorised Volvo workshop.
LED headlamps
WARNING
6
7
NOTE
Related information
•
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 354)
Position lamp (p. 351)
Lamp replacement - location of front lamps
(p. 348)
Main beam (p. 351)
•
Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps
(p. 352)
•
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting
(p. 354)
Dipped beam (p. 350)
Indicator (p. 351)
Daytime running lights (p. 352) (LED* or
bulb depending on variant)
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Certain variants
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Related information
•
•
•
Lamp replacement - general (p. 347)
Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 349)
Lamps - specifications (p. 354)
Lamp replacement - headlamps
4.
All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the
engine compartment. First loosen and remove
the whole headlamp.
Release the headlamp by alternately tilting and pulling it out.
IMPORTANT
Take care when lifting out the headlamp so
as not to damage any parts.
NOTE
Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.
5.
Press down the catch.
Unplug the connector.
Place the headlight on a soft surface so as
not to scratch the lens.
IMPORTANT
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the connector.
6.
1.
Lift out the bonnet stop.
2.
Loosen the screw with a Torx tool, size
T30.
3.
Turn the locking pin anticlockwise.
Pull out the locking pin.
Replace the relevant bulb as instructed.
The headlamp must be fitted and the contact fitted correctly before switching on the lights or
changing key position.
Related information
•
•
•
Lamp replacement - general (p. 347)
Lamp replacement - location of front lamps
(p. 348)
Lamp replacement - cover for main/dipped
beam bulbs (p. 350)
}}
349
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
•
Lamp replacement - direction indicators front
(p. 351)
Lamp replacement - cover for main/
dipped beam bulbs
•
Lamp replacement - position lamps, front
(p. 351)
Main/dipped beam bulbs are accessed by
releasing the headlamp's larger cover.
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 354)
Lamp replacement - dipped beam
The dipped beam bulb is fitted inside the headlamp's larger cover.
NOTE
NOTE
Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.
Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.
Before the larger cover can be undone, the headlamp has to be undone and removed first, see
Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 349).
1.
Replace the relevant bulb as instructed.
Related information
•
•
350
Detach the headlamp (p. 349).
2.
Undo the cover (p. 350).
3.
Press the bulb holder upwards until it
releases.
4.
Replace the bulb and put back the parts in
reverse order.
Press the hooks together.
Angle out the cover.
2.
1.
Lamp replacement - dipped beam (p. 350)
Lamp replacement - main beam (p. 351)
Pull out the bulb holder.
Related information
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 354)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Lamp replacement - main beam
The main beam bulb is fitted inside the headlamp's larger cover.
NOTE
Lamp replacement - direction
indicators front
Lamp replacement - position lamps,
front
The direction indicator lamp is fitted inside the
headlamp's smaller cover.
The position lamp's bulb holder is located on the
side of the headlamp.
NOTE
Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.
NOTE
Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.
1.
Detach the headlamp (p. 349).
2.
Undo the cover (p. 350).
3.
Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
Pull out the bulb holder.
4.
Replace the bulb and put back the parts in
reverse order.
1.
Undo the cover.
3.
Push in the catch.
Pull out the bulb holder.
4.
Related information
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 354)
Detach the headlamp (p. 349).
2.
Replace the bulb and put back the parts in
reverse order.
Related information
•
Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.
1.
Detach the headlamp (p. 349).
2.
Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
3.
Replace the bulb and put back the parts in
reverse order.
Pull out the bulb holder.
Related information
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 354)
Lamps - specifications (p. 354)
351
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Lamp replacement - daytime
running lights
The daytime running light bulb is fitted inside the
bumper's cover.
Related information
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 354)
Lamp replacement - location of rear
lamps
The overview shows the location of the lamps at
the rear.
NOTE
•
•
Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.
Only applies to daytime running lights
with bulbs.
Brake light (LED)
Position lamps (LED)
Brake light (p. 353)
Side marker lamps (LED)
352
1.
Undo the cover.
Indicator (p. 353)
2.
Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
Reversing lamp (p. 353)
Pull out the bulb holder.
Fog lamp (driver's side) (p. 353)
3.
Replace the bulb and put back the parts in
reverse order.
Related information
•
•
Lamp replacement - general (p. 347)
Lamps - specifications (p. 354)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Lamp replacement - direction
indicators rear, brake lights and
reversing lamp
Related information
•
Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps
(p. 352)
Bulbs for rear direction indicators, brake lights
and reversing lamps are replaced from inside
the cargo area.
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 354)
Lamp replacement - rear fog lamp
The bulb for the rear fog lamp is fitted in the
bumper's bulb holder.
Left-hand drive cars have the fog lamp on the
left-hand side, while right-hand drive cars have
the fog lamp on the right-hand side.
Lamp housing on the left-hand side.
1.
2.
Remove the hatch in the upholstery (1) on
the same side as the defective bulb.
Press the catch sideways.
Pull out the bulb holder.
3.
Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in and
turning anticlockwise.
4.
Replace the bulb and put back the parts in
reverse order.
}}
353
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror
lighting
The vanity mirror's lamps are fitted inside the
lamp lenses.
Lamps - specifications
The specifications apply to bulbs. For replacement of LED lamps, please contact a workshop.
Lighting
WA
Type
Dipped beamB
55
H7 LL
65
H9
Main
Insert (approx. 20 mm) a blunt, knife-like
object, e.g. a table knife, at the triangle.
Front direction indicators
21
HY21W
Carefully prise until the lug releases.
Position lamps, frontB
5
W5W LL
Daytime running lights,
front bumperC
19
PW19W
Side direction indicators, door mirrorsC
5
WY5W LL
Direction indicators,
rear
21
PY21W LL
Brake light
21
P21W LL
Reversing lamp
21
P21W LL
Rear fog lamp
21
H21W LL
Vanity mirror lighting
1.2
T5 Socket
W2x4.6d
IMPORTANT
Take care not to damage any parts.
Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
Pull out the bulb holder.
3.
Push in the lamp and turn it anticlockwise.
4.
Replace the bulb and put back the parts in
reverse order.
Related information
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 354)
1.
Insert a screwdriver under the lamp lens and
gently prize up the lug on the edge.
2.
Carefully detach and lift aside the lamp lens.
3.
Using needle-nose pliers, pull the bulb
straight out to the side. Do not squeeze the
bulb too hard with the pliers. Otherwise, the
bulb glass could then break.
4.
Replace the bulb and put back the parts in
reverse order.
Related information
•
354
beamB
Lamps - specifications (p. 354)
A
B
C
Watt
Cars with halogen headlights
Certain variants
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Related information
•
•
Lamp replacement - general (p. 347)
Lamp replacement - location of front lamps
(p. 348)
•
Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps
(p. 352)
•
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting
(p. 354)
Wiper blades
The wiper blades sweep water away from the
windscreen and rear window. Together with the
washer fluid they clean the windows and ensure
visibility for driving.
The windscreen wiper blades must be in service
position when they are to be replaced.
In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades
(for scraping off ice from the windscreen, for
example) they must be in service position.
Not required in cars with keyless start and lock system.
1.
Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch8 and briefly press the START/STOP
ENGINE button to set the car's electrical
system to key position I. For detailed information on key positions, see Key positions functions at different levels (p. 81).
2.
Briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE
button again to set the car’s electrical system
in key position 0.
3.
Within 3 seconds, move the right stalk switch
up and hold it in position for
approx. 1 second.
> The wipers then move to standing straight
up.
Service position
Wiper blades in service position.
8
IMPORTANT
Before placing the wiper blades in the service
position, make sure that they are not frozen
down.
The wipers return to their starting position when
you briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE
button to set the car’s electrical system to key
position I (or when the car is started).
}}
355
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
IMPORTANT
If the wiper arms in service position have
been folded up from the windscreen, they
must be folded back down onto the windscreen before the wipers are activated. This is
to avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet.
Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service
position. Press the button located on the
wiper blade mounting and pull straight out
parallel with the wiper arm.
Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click" is
heard.
Check that the blade is firmly installed.
4.
Fold the wiper arm back towards the windscreen.
The wipers return from service position to their
starting position when you briefly press the
START/STOP ENGINE button to set the car’s
electrical system to key position I (or when the
car is started).
356
G021763
Replacing the wiper blades
NOTE
The wiper blades are different lengths. The
blade on the driver's side is longer than on
the passenger side.
WARNING
Since the car is equipped with airbag
Pedestrian Airbag Volvo recommends that the
wiper arms should be genuine parts and that
only genuine parts are used for them.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Replacing the wiper blades, rear
window
IMPORTANT
Check the blades regularly. Neglected maintenance shortens the service life of the wiper
blades.
Washer fluid - filling
Washer fluid is used for cleaning the headlamps
and windows. Washer fluid with antifreeze must
be used when the temperature is below freezing
point.
Related information
•
1.
Fold out the wiper arm.
2.
Grip the inner section of the blade (by the
arrow).
3.
Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's end
position against the wiper arm as a lever to
detach the blade more easily.
4.
Press the new wiper blade into position.
Check that it is firmly installed.
5.
Lower the wiper arm.
Cleaning
For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see
Car wash (p. 372).
Washer fluid - filling (p. 357)
Topping up the washer fluid takes place by opening the blue cap.
The windscreen and headlamp washers share a
common reservoir.
NOTE
When there is approx. 1 litre of washer fluid
remaining in the reservoir, a message to top
up the washer fluid will be shown in the combined instrument panel, together with the
symbol
.
}}
357
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recommended
by Volvo - with frost protection during cold
weather and below freezing point.
IMPORTANT
Use Volvo genuine washer fluid or equivalent
with a recommended pH of between 6 and 8,
in working dilution (e.g. 1:1 with neutral
water).
IMPORTANT
Use washer fluid with antifreeze when the
temperature is below freezing to avoid freezing in the pump, reservoir and hoses.
Volume:
•
•
Starter battery - general
The starter battery is used to drive the starter
motor and other electrical equipment in the car.
The starter battery is a traditional 12 V battery.
The service life and function of the starter battery
is influenced by factors such as the number of
starts, discharging, driving style, driving conditions, climatic conditions etc.
•
Never disconnect the starter battery when
the engine is running.
•
Check that the cables to the starter battery
are correctly connected and properly tightened.
Cars with headlamp washing: 5.5 litres.
Voltage (V)
12
Cars without headlamp washing: 3.2 litres.
Cold start capacityA - CCAB
(A)
720
Wiper blades (p. 355)
358
Size , L×W×H (mm)
Wipers and washers (p. 102)
Capacity (Ah)
Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 341)
9 Enhanced Flooded Battery.
10 Absorbed Glass Mat.
When replacing the support battery, a battery
of AGM10 type must be fitted.
IMPORTANT
If the starter battery is replaced, make sure
you replace it with a battery with the same
cold starting capacity and type as the original
battery (see the label on the battery).
The following table shows specifications for the
starter battery.
Related information
•
•
•
IMPORTANT
When replacing the starter battery in cars
with the Start/Stop function, a battery of
EFB9 type or stronger must be installed.
A
B
According to EN standard.
Cold Cranking Amperes.
278×175×190
70
NOTE
•
When replacing the battery, the size of
the new battery must correspond with the
dimensions of the original battery.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
WARNING
•
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can
be formed if a jump lead is connected
incorrectly, and this can be enough for
the battery to explode.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid, which
can cause serious burns.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact with
eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large
quantities of water. If acid splashes into
the eyes - seek medical attention immediately.
IMPORTANT
When charging the starter battery or the support battery (p. 361), only use a modern battery charger with controlled charging voltage.
Fast charging function must not be used
since it may damage the battery.
IMPORTANT
NOTE
If the following instruction is not observed
then the energy saving function for infotainment system may be temporarily disengaged,
and/or the message in the combined instrument panel's information display about the
starter battery's state of charge may be temporarily inapplicable, following the connection
of an external battery or battery charger:
•
The life of the battery is shortened if it
becomes discharged repeatedly.
The life of the battery is affected by several
factors, including driving conditions and climate. Battery starting capacity decreases
gradually with time and therefore needs to be
recharged if the car is not used for a longer
time or when it is only driven short distances.
Extreme cold further limits starting capacity.
The negative battery terminal on the car's
starter battery must never be used for
connecting an external battery or battery
charger - only the car chassis may be
used as the grounding point.
To maintain the battery in good condition, at
least 15 minutes of driving/week is recommended or that the battery is connected to a
battery charger with automatic trickle charging.
See Jump starting (p. 271) for a description
of how the cable clamps must be attached.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a
maximum service life.
Related information
•
•
Battery - symbols (p. 360)
Starter battery - replacement (p. 360)
359
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Battery - symbols
Avoid sparks and naked
flames.
There are information and warning symbols on
the batteries.
Symbols on the batteries
Use protective goggles.
Risk of explosion.
Further information in the
owner's manual for the car.
Must be taken for recycling.
Store the battery out of the
reach of children.
NOTE
The battery contains corrosive acid.
An expended starter battery or support battery must be recycled in an environmentally
safe manner since it contains lead.
Related information
•
•
360
Starter battery - general (p. 358)
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 361)
Starter battery - replacement
The starter battery should be replaced by an
authorised workshop.
Volvo recommends that you allow an authorised
workshop to replace the batteries - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
For more information on the car's starter battery,
see Starter battery - general (p. 358) and Jump
starting (p. 271).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Battery - Start/Stop
Size , L×W×H (mm)
Cars with Start/Stop function, in addition to the
starter battery, are equipped with a support battery.
Cars with the Start/Stop function are equipped
with two 12 V batteries - one extra powerful
starter battery for starting and one support battery that helps during the Start/Stop function's
starting sequence.
Capacity (Ah)
A
B
C
D
The following table shows specifications for the
support battery.
Voltage (V)
Cold start capacityA - CCAB
(A)
11
12
13
12
150×90×130D
10D
IMPORTANT
When replacing the starter battery in cars
with the Start/Stop function, a battery of
EFB11 type or stronger must be installed.
When replacing the support battery, a battery
of AGM12 type must be fitted.
120C
•
The higher the current take-off in the car,
the more the alternator must be working
and the batteries charging = Increased
fuel consumption.
•
When the capacity of the starter battery
has fallen below the lowest permissible
level then the Start/Stop function is disengaged.
8C
According to EN standard.
Cold Cranking Amperes.
Manual gearbox in combination with Start/Stop function that
only auto-stops when the car is completely stationary.
Others.
For more information on the Start/Stop function,
see Start/Stop* (p. 279).
For more information on the car's starter battery,
see Jump starting (p. 271).
NOTE
150×90×106C
Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due to
high current take-off means:
•
The engine starts automatically13 without the
driver depressing the clutch pedal (manual
gearbox).
•
The engine starts automatically without the
driver lifting his/her foot off the foot brake
pedal (automatic gearbox).
170D
Enhanced Flooded Battery.
Absorbed Glass Mat.
Automatic starting can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position.
}}
* Option/accessory. 361
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Location of the batteries
IMPORTANT
NOTE
If the following instruction is not observed
then the Start/Stop function may temporarily
cease to work after the connection of an
external battery or battery charger:
•
If the starter battery has been discharged so
much that the car has no normal electrical
functions and the engine is then jump-started
with an external battery or a battery charger,
the Start/Stop function will continue to be
activated. If the Start/Stop function then
auto-stops the engine shortly after, there is a
great risk that engine auto-start will fail due
to insufficient battery capacity, because the
battery has not had the opportunity to
recharge.
The negative battery terminal on the car's
starter battery must never be used for
connecting an external battery or battery
charger - only the car chassis may be
used as the grounding point.
See Jump starting (p. 271) for a description
of how the cable clamps must be attached.
If the car has been jump-started, or if there is
insufficient time to charge the battery with a
battery charger, the recommendation is to
temporarily deactivate the Start/Stop function
until the battery has been recharged by the
car. In an outside temperature of +15 °C, the
battery needs to be charged for at least
1 hour by the car. In a lower outside temperature, the charging time may increase to
3-4 hours. The recommendation is to charge
the battery using an external battery charger.
Starter battery14
Support battery
The support battery normally requires no more
service than the normal starter battery. A workshop should be contacted in the event of questions or problems - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
For more information on charging the starter
battery, see Starter battery - general (p. 358).
Related information
•
14
362
See Starter battery - general (p. 358) for a detailed description of the starter battery.
Battery - symbols (p. 360)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Electrical system
Fuses - general
The electrical system is single-pole and uses the
chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to protect
the car's electrical system from damage by short
circuiting or overloading.
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator.
The size, type and performance of the starter battery depend on the car's equipment and function.
IMPORTANT
If the starter battery is replaced, make sure
you replace it with a battery with the same
cold starting capacity and type as the original
battery (see the label on the battery).
Related information
•
•
If an electrical component or function does not
work, it may be because the component's fuse
was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the
same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in
the circuit. Volvo recommends that you visit an
authorised Volvo workshop for checking.
Changing
1.
Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.
2.
Pull out the fuse and check from the side to
see whether the curved wire has blown.
3.
If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse
of the same colour and amperage.
Starter battery - replacement (p. 360)
Starter battery - general (p. 358)
Location of central electrical units
Fuse box locations in a left-hand drive car. In a
right-hand drive car the fuse box under the glovebox changes sides.
Engine compartment
Under the glovebox
Under the right-hand front seat
WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause significant
damage to the electrical system and possibly
lead to fire.
Related information
•
•
•
Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 364)
Fuses - under glovebox (p. 367)
Fuses - under the right-hand front seat
(p. 370)
363
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Fuses - in engine compartment
Fuses in the engine compartment protect engine
and brake functions, amongst other things.
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that
facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting
of fuses.
The fuse box also provides space for several
spare fuses.
Replacing fuses
The fuses can be accessed following the removal
of the cover fitted on the starter battery and the
cover for the electrical distribution unit.
364
Removing the covers
Fold out the locking catches that are fitted on the sides of the cover on the starter
battery.
Lift the cover straight up.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Positions
The label on the inside of the cover shows the
positions of the fuses.
Fold out the locking catch that is fitted on
the side of the electrical distribution unit.
Rotate the cover upward until the lock
lugs (1) are released.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
20
5
•
Central electronic module, reference voltage, support battery
Fuses 19-45 and 47-48 are of "Mini Fuse"
type.
Horn
15
Function
AA
Brake light
5
ABS pump
40
-
-
ABS valves
30
Headlamp control
5
Headlamp washers*
20
Internal relay coils
5
Ventilation fan
40
12 V socket, tunnel console front
15
Transmission control module
15
-
15
Windscreen wipers
Fuses 7-18 and 46 are of the "JCASE" type
and should be replaced by a workshop15.
Primary fuse for fuses 32-36
Refitting the covers
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
AA
•
-
Fold the cover toward the engine to access
the fuses.
Function
Heated windscreen, right-hand
side*
-
30
40
-
Heated windscreen, left-hand side*
40
Parking heater*
20
-
-
12 V socket, tunnel console rear
15
-
-
Engine Control Module (ECM)
5
Power seat, right*
20
Lambda-sonds; Relay coil in relay
for cooling fan
15
}}
* Option/accessory. 365
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
366
Function
AA
Function
Vacuum regulators; Valves; Control
module, radiator roller cover; Control module, spoiler roller cover
(diesel); Compressor A/C; Solenoid
for engine oil pump; Cooling valve
for climate control system (diesel);
Glow control module (diesel); Relay
coils in relays for Start/Stop functions
10
-
-
-
-
Collision warning system
5
Accelerator pedal sensor
5
-
-
EGR valve (diesel); EVAP valve
(petrol); Engine control module;
Thermostat for engine cooling system (petrol); Cooling pump for EGR
(diesel)
15
-
-
Ignition coils (petrol)
15
Diesel filter heater (diesel)
25
Engine Control Module (ECM)
15
ABS
5
Coolant pump (when no parking
heater is available)
A
Engine control module; Transmission control module; Airbags
7.5
Headlamp levelling*
10
Electric control servo
5
Central electronic module
15
AA
10
Ampere
Related information
•
•
Fuses - under glovebox (p. 367)
Fuses - under the right-hand front seat
(p. 370)
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Fuses - under glovebox
Fuses under the glovebox protect the airbag and
passenger compartment lighting functions,
amongst other things.
On the inside of the cover for the fuse box in
the engine compartment there are tweezers
that facilitate the procedure for the removal and
fitting of fuses.
The fuse box in the engine compartment also
provides space for several spare fuses.
Replacing fuses
The fuses can be accessed when a protective
cover has been removed from the fuse box.
}}
367
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Cover removal
Take hold of the recess and pull until the
locking lugs in the lower edge of the cover
are released from the fuse box.
Remove the cover.
NOTE
A relatively large amount of tensile force is
required to release the locking lugs at the top
edge of the cover from the electrical distribution unit.
Cover refitting
Guide in the lower lugs.
Turn the cover upwards until the upper lugs
engage.
NOTE
Make sure that the upper locking lugs are
seated properly in the grooves of the electrical distribution unit.
AA
Rear window wiper
15
Display in roof console (Seatbelt
reminder/Indicator for airbag on
the front passenger seat)
5
Interior lighting, Controls in roof
console for front reading lamps
and passenger compartment lighting; Power seats*
7.5
Power operated roller blind for
glass roof*
10
Rain sensor*; Dimming, interior
rearview mirror*; Moisture sensor*
5
Collision warning system*
5
-
-
Unlocking,
Positions
The fuses are of "Mini Fuse" type.
10
tailgateB
-
-
Reserve position 3, constant voltage
5
Function
AA
Steering lock
15
Fuel pump
20
Combined instrument panel
5
-
368
Function
-
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Function
AA
Function
AA
Central locking system, fuel filler
flapC
10
Central locking system, fuel filler
flapF
10
Climate panel
7.5
Unlocking, tailgateG
10
Steering wheel module
7.5
Electric additional heater*; Button
seat heating rear*
7.5
Airbags; Pedestrian airbag*
7.5
Reserve position 4, constant voltage
7.5
Siren*; Data link connector OBDII
5
Main beam
15
-
-
Reversing lamp
7.5
Windscreen wipersD; Rear windscreen wiperD
20
Immobiliser
5
Reserve position 1, constant voltage
15
Reserve position 2, constant voltage
20
Movement detector for alarm*;
Remote receiver
5
Windscreen wipersE; Rear windscreen wiperE
20
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
-
-
-
-
Ampere
See also fuse 84.
See also fuse 83.
See also fuse 82.
See also fuse 77.
See also fuse 70.
See also fuse 65.
Related information
•
•
Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 364)
Fuses - under the right-hand front seat
(p. 370)
* Option/accessory. 369
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Fuses - under the right-hand front
seat
Fuses under the right-hand front seat protect the
infotainment system and seat heating, amongst
other things.
On the inside of the cover for the fuse box in
the engine compartment there are tweezers
that facilitate the procedure for the removal and
fitting of fuses.
The fuse box in the engine compartment also
provides space for several spare fuses.
16
370
Positions
•
Fuses 24-28 are of "JCASE" type and
should be replaced by a workshop16.
•
Fuses 1-23 and 29-46 are of "Mini Fuse"
type.
Function
AA
-
-
Keyless system*
10
Door handles, keyless system*
5
Control panel, left front door
25
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Function
AA
Function
Control panel, right front door
25
-
-
-
Control panel, left rear door
25
-
-
Seat heating, rear right*
15
Control panel, right rear door
25
Trailer socket 2*
20
Seat heating, rear left*
15
Primary fuse for fuses 12-16: Infotainment
25
Audio control unit (amplifier)*
30
-
-
Power seat, left*
20
-
-
-
Trailer socket 1*
40
-
-
Rear window defroster
30
-
-
-
-
Internal relay coil
5
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
12 V socket, cargo area
15
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
BLIS*
5
Parking assistance*
5
Parking camera*
5
-
-
-
-
Seat heating, front driver's side
Seat heating, front passenger side
Function
AA
15
15
-
-
-
-
A
B
AA
-
Audio control module (amplifier)*,
signal for diagnosis; Audio control
module or Control module SensusB;
Infotainment control module or
ScreenB; Digital radio*; TV*
15
Telematics*; Bluetooth*
5
Ampere
Certain model variants.
Related information
•
•
Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 364)
Fuses - under glovebox (p. 367)
* Option/accessory. 371
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Car wash
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. Wash the car in a car wash with
oil separator. Use car shampoo.
Handwashing
•
•
•
372
Remove bird droppings from the paintwork
as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain
chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork
very quickly. An authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended for the removal of any discoloration.
Hose down the underbody.
Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt
has been removed so as to reduce the risk of
scratches from washing. Do not spray directly
onto the locks.
•
If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on
very dirty surfaces. Note that in this case, the
surfaces must not be hot from the sun!
•
Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and
plenty of lukewarm water.
•
Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap
solution or car shampoo.
•
Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a
water scraper. If you avoid allowing drops of
water to dry in strong sunlight, you reduce
the risk of water drying stains which may
need to be polished out.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.
NOTE
The car must only be washed by hand over
the first few months. This is because the paint
is more delicate when it is new.
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality.
Clean them regularly, when refuelling for
example.
Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents or
cleaning agents with a pH value lower than
3.5 or higher than 11.5. Use water and a nonscratching sponge.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear
lamps may temporarily have condensation on
the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to withstand this.
Condensation is normally vented out of the
lamp housing when the lamp has been
switched on for a time.
Automatic car washes
An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way
of washing the car, but it cannot reach everywhere. Handwashing the car is recommended for
achieving optimum results.
IMPORTANT
If the car is painted with a matte clear coat,
never use a washing program that finishes
with hot wax treatment.
High-pressure washing
When using high-pressure washing, use sweeping movements and make sure that the nozzle
does not come closer than 30 cm to the surface
of the car (the distance applies to all exterior
parts). Do not spray directly onto the locks.
Testing the brakes
WARNING
Always test the brakes after washing the car,
including the parking brake, to ensure that
moisture and corrosion do not attack the
brake linings and reduce braking performance.
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then
when driving long distances in rain or slush. The
heat from the friction causes the brake linings to
warm up and dry. Do the same thing after starting
in very damp or cold weather.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Wiper blades
IMPORTANT
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as
well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair
the service life of wiper blades.
Avoid washing the car with cleaning agent
with a pH value lower than 3.5 or higher than
11.5. This may result in discolouration of anodised aluminium parts such as roof rack and
around the side windows.
For cleaning:
–
Set the wiper blades to the service position;
see Wiper blades (p. 355).
Never use metal polishing agent on anodised
aluminium parts, this can result in discolouration and destroy the surface treatment.
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen regularly with lukewarm soap solution or car
shampoo.
Parts that should be washed using a cleaning agent with
a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5.
Do not use any strong solvents.
IMPORTANT
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
dealers is recommended for the cleaning and
care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim
components, such as glossy trim mouldings.
When using such a cleaning agent the instructions must be followed carefully.
The frames around the side windows, the car's
roof rails and the door frames at the windows*
are produced in anodised aluminium. This means
that they should only be washed using a cleaning
agent with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5.
This is in order to avoid discolouration.
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic, rubber
and on parts painted in matte or semi-matte
version.
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber,
only rub with light pressure if it is necessary.
Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear
away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must
not be used.
Rims
Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by
Volvo.
After washing, discolouration at the base of the
spokes may remain due to metal dust from the
brake discs attaching in the wheel rim's paint.
Paint cleaner works in many cases, with very fine
polishing using a soft cloth.
Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the surface and cause stains on chrome-plated aluminium rims.
Related information
•
•
•
Polishing and waxing (p. 374)
Cleaning the interior (p. 376)
Water and dirt-repellent coating (p. 375)
* Option/accessory. 373
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or
to give the paintwork extra protection.
The car does not need to be polished until it is
at least one year old. However, the car can be
waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax the
car in direct sunlight.
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt and
tar stains using tar remover or white spirit. More
stubborn stains can be removed using fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork.
Polish first with a polish and then wax with liquid
or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the packaging carefully. Many preparations contain both
polish and wax.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic, rubber
and on parts painted in matte or semi-matte
version.
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber,
only rub with light pressure if it is necessary.
Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear
away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must
not be used.
374
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo
should be used. Other treatment such as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or
similar could damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by such treatments is
not covered by Volvo warranty.
Matte clear coat
When the car is painted in a matte clear coat, the
following must be considered in order to avoid
paint damage due to incorrect treatment.
IMPORTANT
Never polish a matte clear coat. Polishing
leads to the paint becoming shiny.
Do not use paint cleaner, grinding agents,
polishing products or sheen preservation, e.g.
wax. These products are only intended for
glossy surfaces. If they are used on matte
paint then there will be significant damage to
the surfaces (glossy spots).
•
If wax gets onto the matte paint surface
then it must be removed immediately
using standard type white benzene.
•
Make sure you do not get resin, grease or
oil on the car's paint. They may leave residues. Remove immediately using standard type white benzene.
Proceed with caution and do not press too
hard on the painted surface.
Related information
•
Car wash (p. 372)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Water and dirt-repellent coating
The windows are treated with a surface coating
that improves visibility in difficult weather conditions.
Water and dirt-repellent coating*
There is natural wear of the waterrepellent coating.
Maintenance:
•
Never use products such as car wax,
degreaser or similar on glass surfaces as this
could ruin their water-repellent properties.
•
Take care when cleaning so as not to damage the glass surface.
•
To avoid damaging glass surfaces when
removing ice – only use plastic ice scrapers.
•
Treatment with a special finishing agent
available from Volvo dealers is recommended
in order to maintain the water-repellent properties on the side windows. This should be
used first after three years and then each
year.
Related information
•
Car wash (p. 372)
Rustproofing
The car received a thorough and complete rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body are
made of galvanised sheet metal. The underbody
is protected by a wear-resistant anti-corrosion
compound. A thin, penetrating rustproofing fluid
was sprayed into the exposed members, cavities, closed sections and side doors.
Inspection and maintenance
The car's anti-corrosion protection does not normally need to be maintained, but keeping the car
clean always helps to further reduce the risk of
corrosion. Strong alkaline or acidic cleaning solutions must always be avoided on the glossy trim
components. Any stone chips should be rectified
as soon as they are discovered.
Related information
•
Paint damage (p. 377)
IMPORTANT
Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice
from the windows. Use the heating to remove
ice from the door mirrors; see Windows and
door mirrors - heating (p. 107).
* Option/accessory. 375
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Cleaning the interior
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming
is important prior to using cleaning agents.
IMPORTANT
•
•
•
•
Certain items of coloured clothing (e.g.
dark jeans and suede garments) may
stain the upholstery. If this occurs, it is
important to clean and treat these parts
of the upholstery as soon as possible.
Never use strong solvents such as
washer fluid, pure petrol or white spirit to
clean the interior, since this may damage
the upholstery as well as other interior
materials.
Never spray the cleaning agent directly
onto components that have electrical buttons and controls. Wipe them instead
using a moistened cloth containing the
cleaning agent.
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage
the fabric upholstery.
Fabric upholstery and ceiling upholstery
Volvo offers a comprehensive fabric care product
for fabric upholstery and ceiling upholstery which,
when used in accordance with the instructions,
preserves the properties of the upholstery. The
376
fabric care product is available for purchase from
a Volvo dealer.
Leather upholstery
Volvo's leather upholstery is treated to preserve
its original appearance.
Leather upholstery is a natural product that
changes and acquires a beautiful patina over
time. Regular cleaning and treatment are
required in order that the properties and colours
of the leather shall be preserved. Volvo offers a
comprehensive product, Volvo Leather Care Kit/
Wipes, for the cleaning and treatment of leather
upholstery which, when used in accordance with
the instructions, preserves the leather's protective
coating.
To achieve best results, Volvo recommends the
cleaning and application of the protective cream
once to four times per year (or more if required).
The Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is available for
purchase from a Volvo dealer.
Leather steering wheel
Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the
leather steering wheel with protective plastic.
Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is recommended
for cleaning the leather steering wheel.
Interior plastic, metal and wood parts
A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly moistened with water, available from a Volvo dealer, is
recommended for cleaning interior parts and surfaces.
Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong
stain removers. A special cleaning agent available
from Volvo dealers can be used for more difficult
cleaning.
Seatbelts
Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special
textile cleaning agent is available from a Volvo
dealer. Ensure that the seatbelt is dry before
allowing it to retract.
Inlay mats and floor mat
Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of
the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt. Each inlay
mat is secured with pins.
Remove the inlay mat by taking hold of the inlay
mat at each pin and lifting the mat straight up.
Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each
pin.
WARNING
Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and
check before setting off that the mat by the
driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in
the pins so that it does not get caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
A special textile cleaner is recommended for
stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor
mats must be cleaned with agents recommended
by a Volvo dealer.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Related information
•
Car wash (p. 372)
Paint damage
Colour code
Paint is an important part of the car's rustproofing and should therefore be checked regularly.
The most common types of paintwork damage
are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the
edges of wings, doors and bumpers.
The label for colour code is located on the car's
door pillar and is visible when the right-hand rear
door is opened.
IMPORTANT
When the car is painted in a matte clear coat:
Only allow an authorised workshop to carry
out paint repairs. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Touching up minor paintwork damage
To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork
should be rectified immediately.
Materials that may be needed
17
18
•
Primer17 - a special adhesive primer in a
spray can is available for e.g. plastic-coated
bumpers.
•
Base coat and clear coat - are available in
spray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks18.
•
•
Masking tape.
Exterior colour code
Any secondary exterior colour code
It is important that the correct colour is used. For
product label location, see Type designations
(p. 380).
Fine sand paper17.
If required.
Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.
}}
377
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Repair minor paintwork damage such
as stone chips and scratches
3.
Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
brush, a matchstick or similar. Finish off with
a basecoat and clearcoat once the primer
has dried.
4.
For scratches, proceed as above, but mask
around the damaged area to protect the
undamaged paintwork.
NOTE
G021832
If the stone chip has not penetrated down to
the meal and an undamaged layer of paint
remains in place, fill in with basecoat and
clearcoat as soon as the surface has been
cleaned.
Before work is begun, the car must be clean and
dry and at a temperature above 15 °C.
1.
Apply a piece of masking tape over the damaged surface. Then remove the tape to
remove any loose paint.
If the damage is down to the metal, use of a
primer is appropriate. In the event of damage
to a plastic surface, an adhesive primer
should be used to give better results - spray
into the lid of the spray can and brush on
thinly.
2.
378
Before painting, gentle polishing using a very
fine polishing agent may be carried out
locally if required (e.g. if there are any uneven
edges). The surface is cleaned thoroughly
and left to dry.
Related information
•
Rustproofing (p. 375)
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Type designations
380
Type designation, vehicle identification number,
etc., i.e. information unique to the car, can be
read on a label in the car.
SPECIFICATIONS
Label location
The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on market and model.
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle identification and engine numbers can facilitate all
}}
381
SPECIFICATIONS
||
contact with an authorised Volvo dealer regarding
the car and when ordering spare parts and
accessories.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in
the owner's manual should be exact replicas
of those in the car. They are included to show
their approximate appearance and locations
in the car. The information that applies to your
particular car can be found on the decal on
the car.
Decal for type designation, vehicle identification number, permissible maximum weights
and code designation for exterior colour and
type approval number. The decal is positioned on the door pillar, and will be visible
when the right-hand rear door is opened.
Label for A/C system.
Label for parking heater.
Decal for engine code and the engine's
serial number.
Label for engine oil.
Decal for gearbox type designation and serial
number.
Manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
Decal for the car's identification number VIN (Vehicle Identification Number).
Further information on the car is presented in the
registration document.
382
Related information
•
•
Weights (p. 385)
Engine specifications (p. 388)
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions
Measurement of car length, height, etc. can be
read in the table.
V40.
Dimensions
mm
A
Wheelbase
2647
F
Load height
B
Length
4370
G
Front track
C
Load length, floor, folded rear
seat
1508
D
Load length, floor
E
Height
684
Dimensions
mm
532
Dimensions
H
Rear track
mm
1533A
1546A
1538B
1551B
1546C
1559C
I
Load width, floor
J
Width
960
1802
1420
}}
383
SPECIFICATIONS
||
A
B
C
384
Dimensions
mm
K
Width including door mirrors
2041
L
Width including folded-in door
mirrors
1857
Offset 52.5 mm.
Offset 50 mm.
Offset 46 mm.
SPECIFICATIONS
Weights
Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read on a
label in the car.
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
90% full and all fluids.
The weight of passengers and accessories, and
towball load (p. 386) (when a trailer is hitched)
influence the load capacity and are not included
in the kerb weight.
Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight Kerb weight.
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to cars
in the standard version - i.e. a car without
extra equipment or accessories. This means
that for every accessory added the loading
capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly
by the weight of the accessory.
Examples of accessories that reduce load
capacity are the different equipment levels
(e.g. Kinetic, Momentum, Summum), as well
as other accessories such as towbar, load
carrier, space box, audio system, auxiliary
lamps, GPS, fuel-driven heater, safety grille,
carpets, cargo cover, power seats, etc.
For information on label location, see Type designations
(p. 380).
Max. gross vehicle weight
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascertaining the kerb weight of your own particular
car.
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
Equipment level
Max. load: See registration document.
Max. roof load: 75 kg.
Related information
•
Towing capacity and towball load (p. 386)
385
SPECIFICATIONS
Towing capacity and towball load
Max. weight braked trailer
Towing capacity and towball load for driving with
a trailer can be read in the tables.
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
V40
Engine codeA
Gearbox
Max. weight braked trailer (kg)
Max. towball load (kg)
T2
B4204T38
Manual, M76
1500
75
T2
B4154T5
Automatic, TF-71SC
1500
75
T3
B4204T37
Manual, M76
1500
75
T3
B4154T4
Automatic, TF-71SC
1500
75
T4
B4204T19
Manual, M76
1500
75
T4
B4204T19
Automatic, TF-71SC
1500
75
T5
B4204T41
Automatic, TG-81SC
1500
75
T5
B4204T11
Automatic, TG-81SC
1500
75
D2
D4204T8
Manual, M76
1500
75
D2
D4204T8
Automatic, TF-71SC
1500
75
D3
D4204T9
Manual, M76
1500
75
D3
D4204T9
Automatic, TF-71SC
1500
75
D4
D4204T14
Manual, M66
1500
75
D4
D4204T14
Automatic, TG-81SC
1500
75
Engine
A
386
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 380).
SPECIFICATIONS
Max. weight unbraked trailer
V40
Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg)
Max. towball load (kg)
D2 (D4204T8) with manual gearbox
650
50
other
700
50
Engine
Related information
•
•
•
Weights (p. 385)
Driving with a trailer (p. 302)
Trailer Stability Assist - TSA (p. 309)
387
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine specifications
Engine specifications (output etc.) for each
respective engine alternative can be read in the
table.
V40
Engine codeA
Output (kW/
rpm)
Output (hp/rpm)
Torque (Nm/rpm)
No. of cylinders
Bore
(mm)
Stroke
(mm)
Swept volume (litres)
Compression ratio
T2
B4154T5
90/5000
122/5000
220/1600-3500
4
82.0
70.9
1.498
10.5:1
T2
B4204T38
90/5000
122/5000
220/1100-3500
4
82.0
93.2
1.969
11.3:1
T3
B4154T4
112/5000
152/5000
250/1700–4000
4
82.0
70.9
1.498
10.5:1
T3
B4204T37
112/5000
152/5000
250/1300–4000
4
82.0
93.2
1.969
11.3:1
T4
B4204T19
140/4700
190/4700
300/1300–4000
4
82.0
93.2
1.969
11.3:1
T5
B4204T41
180/5500
245/5500
350/1500–4800
4
82.0
93.2
1.969
8.6:1
T5
B4204T11
180/5500
245/5500
350/1500–4800
4
82.0
93.2
1.969
10.8:1
D2
D4204T8
88/3750
120/3750
280/1500-2250
4
82.0
93.2
1.969
16.0:1
D3
D4204T9
110/3750
150/3750
320/1750-3000
4
82.0
93.2
1.969
16.0:1
D4
D4204T14
140/4250
190/4250
400/1750-2500
4
82.0
93.2
1.969
15.8:1
Engine
A
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 380).
Related information
•
•
388
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
Coolant - grade and volume (p. 392)
Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 390)
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine oil - adverse driving
conditions
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are filled
with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil
at the factory. The choice of oil has been
made very carefully with regard to service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption and
environmental impact.
Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnormally high oil temperature or oil consumption.
Below are some examples of adverse driving
conditions.
Check the oil level (p. 343), more frequently for
long journeys:
•
•
•
•
An approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals can
be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil
for both filling and oil change, otherwise you
will risk affecting service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental
impact.
towing a caravan or trailer
in mountainous regions
at high speeds
in temperatures colder than -30 °C or hotter
than +40 °C
The above also apply to shorter driving distances
at low temperatures.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty
liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade
and viscosity is not used.
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse
driving conditions. It provides extra protection for
the engine.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Volvo recommends:
Related information
•
•
Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 390)
Engine oil - general (p. 342)
389
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine oil - grade and volume
Recommended engine oil grade and volume for
each respective engine alternative can be read
in the table.
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
Volvo recommends:
V40
Engine codeA
Oil grade
Engine
390
Volume, incl. oil filter
(litres)
T2
B4204T38
T2
B4154T5
Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20
approx. 5.6
approx. 5.6
T3
B4154T4
approx. 5.6
SPECIFICATIONS
V40
Engine codeA
Oil grade
Engine
A
Volume, incl. oil filter
(litres)
T3
B4204T37
T4
B4204T19
Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20
approx. 5.6
T5
B4204T41
approx. 5.6
T5
B4204T11
approx. 5.6
D2
D4204T8
D3
D4204T9
approx 5.2
D4
D4204T14
approx 5.2
Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20
approx. 5.6
approx 5.2
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 380).
Related information
•
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions
(p. 389)
•
Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 343)
391
SPECIFICATIONS
Coolant - grade and volume
V40
Volume
Approved coolant volume for each respective
engine alternative can be read in the table.
EngineA
(litres)
Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by
Volvo mixed with 50% water1, see the packaging.
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
D2
D4204T8
D3
D4204T9
D4
D4204T14
A
B
1
392
V40
Volume
EngineA
(litres)
T2
B4154T5
T2
B4204T38
T3
B4154T4
T3
B4204T37
T4
B4204T19
T5
B4204T41
T5
B4204T11
7.5 (7,8B)
Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the
engine; see Type designations (p. 380).
Applies to cars with fuel-driven heater.
Related information
•
8,0 (8,4B)
Coolant - level (p. 345)
SPECIFICATIONS
Transmission fluid - grade and
volume
The prescribed transmission fluid and volume for
each respective gearbox alternative can be read
in the table.
Manual gearbox
Manual gearbox
Volume (litres)
Prescribed transmission fluid
M66
approx. 1.45
BOT 350M3
M76
approx 1.6
BOT 352 B1
Automatic gearbox
Automatic gearbox
Volume (litres)
TF-71SC
approx 6.8
approx. 6.6A
TG-81SC
A
B
approx. 7.5B
Prescribed transmission fluid
AW1
AW1
Petrol engines
Diesel engines
NOTE
The transmission fluid does not need to be
changed under normal driving conditions.
However, it may be necessary under adverse
driving conditions.
Related information
•
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions
(p. 389)
•
Type designations (p. 380)
393
SPECIFICATIONS
Brake fluid - grade and volume
Brake fluid is the term for the medium in a
hydraulic brake system that is used to transfer
pressure from the master brake cylinder to the
mechanical brakes.
Prescribed grade: Volvo Original Dot 4 class 6
or equivalent.
Volume: 0.6 litres
Related information
•
394
Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 346)
SPECIFICATIONS
Fuel tank - volume
Fuel tank volume for each respective engine
alternative can be read in the table.
V40
Volume (litres)
Prescribed grade
Engine
Petrol
Diesel
A
B
approx. 62
approx.
62A
Fuel - petrol (p. 297)
(approx.
40B)
Fuel - diesel (p. 298)
Option for D2 (D4204T8) with manual gearbox.
Applies to D2 (D4204T8) with manual gearbox.
Related information
•
•
Filling up with fuel (p. 296)
Engine specifications (p. 388)
395
SPECIFICATIONS
Air conditioning, fluid - volume and
grade
Decal for R1234yf
Symbol
A trained and certified technician is
required in order to service the
mobile air conditioning system
(MAC)
The climate control system in the car uses a
refrigerant, either R1234yf or R134a, depending on market. Information about which refrigerant the car's climate control system uses can be
seen on a decal, located on the inside of the
bonnet.
Prescribed grades and volumes of fluids and
lubricants in the air conditioning system can be
read in the tables below.
A/C decal
Decal for R134a
Flammable refrigerants
The label is fitted on the inside of the bonnet.
Symbol explanation R1234yf
Symbol
Meaning
Caution
Mobile air conditioning system
(MAC)
Lubricant type
The label is fitted on the inside of the bonnet.
396
Meaning
Refrigerant
Cars with refrigerant R134a
Weight
Prescribed grade
625 g
R134a
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R134a. This system must only
be serviced and repaired by an authorised
workshop.
SPECIFICATIONS
Cars with refrigerant R1234yf
Weight
Prescribed grade
575 g
R1234yf
Related information
•
Climate control system - fault tracing and
repair (p. 347)
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with
SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe
Service and Containment of Refrigerants
Used in Mobile A/C System), service and
repair of the refrigerant system must only be
performed by trained and certified technicians
in order to ensure the safety of the system.
Compressor oil
Volume
60 ml
Prescribed grade
PAG oil
Evaporator
IMPORTANT
The A/C system's evaporator must never be
repaired or replaced with a previously used
evaporator. A new evaporator must be certified and labelled in accordance with SAE
J2842.
397
SPECIFICATIONS
Fuel consumption and CO2
emissions
NOTE
urban driving
If the consumption and emission data is missing then it is included in the enclosed supplement.
extra-urban driving
Fuel consumption in a vehicle is measured in
litres per 100 km and CO2 emissions in grams
CO2 per km.
combined driving
Explanation
manual gearbox
gram CO2/km
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
Automatic gearbox
litre/100 km
V40
398
T2A (B4204T38)
167
7.3
104
4.6
127
5.6
T2B (B4204T38)
163
7.2
100
4.4
123
5.4
T2A (B4154T5)
170
7.3
106
4.5
129
5.5
T2B (B4154T5)
168
7.2
101
4.4
125
5.4
T3 (B4204T37)
167
7.3
104
4.6
127
5.6
T3 (B4154T4)
170
7.3
106
4.5
129
5.5
SPECIFICATIONS
V40
T4 (B4204T19)
167
7.3
104
4.6
127
5.6
T4 (B4204T19)
165
7.2
107
4.6
128
5.5
T5 (B4204T11)
185
7.9
110
4.8
137
5.9
D2A (D4204T8)
105
4.0
87
3.3
94
3.6
D2B (D4204T8)
97
3.7
84
3,2
89
3.4
D2A (D4204T8)
120
4.6
95
3.6
104
3.9
D2B (D4204T8)
115
4.4
90
3.4
99
3.8
D3A (D4204T9)
112
4.3
94
3.6
101
3.8
D3B (D4204T9)
107
4.0
89
3.4
96
3.6
D3A (D4204T9)
126
4.8
98
3.8
108
4.1
D3B (D4204T9)
122
4.7
94
3.6
104
4.0
D4A (D4204T14)
110
4.2
93
3.6
99
3.8
}}
399
SPECIFICATIONS
||
V40
D4B (D4204T14)
108
4.1
89
3.5
96
3.7
D4A (D4204T14)
132
5.0
96
3.7
109
4.2
D4B (D4204T14)
129
4.9
93
3.5
106
4.0
A
B
Does not apply to the low-emission variant.
This only applies to the low-emissions variant.
Fuel consumption
Fuel consumption and emission values in the
table above are based on specific EU driving
cycles (see below), that apply to cars with kerb
weight in the basic version and without extra
equipment. The car's weight may increase
depending on equipment. This, as well as how
heavily the car is loaded, increases fuel consumption and carbon dioxide emissions.
There are several reasons for increased fuel consumption compared with the table's values.
Examples of this are:
400
•
If the car is equipped with extra equipment
that affects the car's weight.
•
The driver's driving style.
•
If the customer chooses wheels other than
those fitted as standard on the model's basic
version then rolling resistance may increase.
•
High speed results in increased wind resistance.
•
Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
weather and the condition of the car.
A combination of the above-mentioned examples
can result in significantly increased consumption.
Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise in
a comparison with the EU driving cycles (see
below) which are used in the certification of the
car and on which the consumption figures in the
table are based. For further information, please
refer to the regulations referred to.
Consumption is higher and power output lower
for fuel with an octane rating of 91 RON.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel quality are factors that considerably increase the car's fuel consumption.
SPECIFICATIONS
EU driving cycles
Official fuel consumption figures are based on
two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory
environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Regulation no 692/2008 and
715/2007 (Euro 5 / Euro 6) and UN ECE
Regulation no 101. Since the driving cycles are
also used for quality control, there are significant
requirements for repeatability of the tests. For
this reason the tests are carried out under close
scrutiny and only with the car's basic functions
(e.g. air conditioning, radio, etc. switched off). As
a consequence of this the results from the official
figures are not obviously representative of what
the customer sees during actual usage.
The exhaust gases are collected in order to
extrapolate the carbon dioxide emissions (CO2
emissions) during the two driving cycles. These
are then analysed and give the value for CO2
emissions.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Economical driving (p. 301)
Fuel - petrol (p. 297)
Fuel - diesel (p. 298)
Weights (p. 385)
The regulations cover the driving cycles for
"Urban driving" and "Extra-urban driving":
•
Urban driving - the measurement starts with
cold starting the engine. The driving is simulated.
•
Extra-urban driving - the car is accelerated
and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h
(0-75 mph). The driving is simulated.
Cars with manual gearbox are started in 2nd
gear.
The official value for combined driving, which is
reported in the table, is a combination of the
results from the "Urban driving" and "Extra-urban
driving" driving cycles, in accordance with legal
requirements.
401
SPECIFICATIONS
Wheels and tyres - approved
dimensions
In certain countries not all approved dimensions
are indicated by the registration document or
other documents. The following table shows all
402
approved combinations of wheel rims and tyres.
Information on engine and type of gearbox is
required to read the table. For information with
respect to these details, see Type designations
(p. 380).
For information on the minimum permitted load
index (LI) and the minimum permitted speed rating (SS), see Load index and speed rating
(p. 404).
✓ = Approved
V40
man/
205/55R16
205/50R17
225/45R17
Engine
aut
7x16x50
7x17x50
7,5x17x52,5
225/40R18
235/35R19A
6,5x16x52,5
7x17x52.5
7x17x50
7,5x18x52,5
8x19x50
T2B
B4154T5
aut
✓
-
-
-
-
T2C
B4154T5
aut
✓
✓
✓
✓
-
T2B
B4204T38
man
✓
-
-
-
-
T2C
B4204T38
man
✓
✓
✓
✓
-
T3
B4154T4
aut
✓
✓
✓
✓
-
T3
B4204T37
man
✓
✓
✓
✓
-
T4
B4204T19
man/aut
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
T5
B4204T11
aut
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
T5
B4204T41
aut
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
D2B
D4204T8
man/aut
✓
-
-
-
-
D2C
D4204T8
man/aut
✓
✓
✓
✓
-
D3B
D4204T9
man/aut
✓
-
-
-
-
D3C
D4204T9
man/aut
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
SPECIFICATIONS
A
B
C
V40
man/
205/55R16
205/50R17
225/45R17
Engine
aut
7x16x50
7x17x50
7,5x17x52,5
225/40R18
235/35R19A
6,5x16x52,5
7x17x52.5
7x17x50
7,5x18x52,5
8x19x50
D4B
D4204T14
man/aut
✓
-
-
-
-
D4C
D4204T14
man/aut
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Only approved for cars equipped with 19" tyres from the factory.
This only applies to the low-emissions variant.
Does not apply to the low-emission variant.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 317)
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 318)
Tyres - load index (p. 318)
Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 317)
403
SPECIFICATIONS
Load index and speed rating
The table below shows the minimum permitted
load index (LI) and speed rating (SS). Informa-
A
B
V40
man/
Engine
aut
Minimum permitted load index (LI)A
Minimum permitted speed rating (SS)B
T2
B4154T5
aut
91
H
T2
B4204T38
man
91
H
T3
B4154T4
aut
91
H
T3
B4204T37
man
91
H
T4
B4204T19
man/aut
91
H
T5
B4204T11
aut
91
W
T5
B4204T41
aut
91
W
D2
D4204T8
man/aut
91
H
D3
D4204T9
man/aut
91
H
D4
D4204T14
man/aut
91
V
The tyre's load index must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table.
The tyre's speed rating must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table.
Related information
•
•
•
•
404
tion on engine and type of gearbox is required to
read the table. For information with respect to
these details, see Type designations (p. 380).
Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions
(p. 402)
Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 405)
Tyres - load index (p. 318)
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 318)
SPECIFICATIONS
Tyres - approved tyre pressures
Approved tyre pressures for each respective
engine alternative can be read in the table.
V40
Tyre size
Engine
(km/h)
Max. load
ECO pressureA
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front/rear
(kPa)
(kPa)
(kPa)
(kPa)
0 - 160C
230
230
260
260
260 (280D)
160+E
250
250
300
280
-
225/40 R18
0 - 160C
230
230
260
260
260
235/35 R19
160+E
270
270
320
300
-
max. 80F
420
420
420
420
-
205/50 R17
225/45 R17
Temporary Spare Tyre
A
B
C
D
E
F
Load, 1-3 persons
(kPa)B
205/55 R16
All engines
Speed
Economical driving.
In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
0 - 100 mph
Only applies to 16" wheels for D2/D4 manual, low emission variant.
100+ mph
max 50 mph
NOTE
All engines, tyres or combinations of these
are not always available in all markets.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions
(p. 402)
Tyres - dimensions (p. 317)
Tyres - air pressure (p. 316)
Type designations (p. 380)
405
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Adjusting the steering wheel
A
ACC – Adaptive cruise control
203
Active bending lights
94
Active main beam
92
Active Park Assist
function
Limitations
operation
Symbols and messages
263
264
267
265
268
Active Yaw Control
186
Adaptation of headlamp beam
95
Adapting driving characteristics
186
Adaptive Cruise Control
change cruise control functionality
deactivate
fault tracing
function
managing speed
overtaking
overview
radar sensor
setting the time interval
standby mode
temporary deactivation
Additional heater
electric
fuel-driven
203
212
209
213
204
206
209
205
216
207
208
208
144, 145
144
87
Airbag
activating/deactivating, PACOS
driver's side
passenger side
36
34
35, 36
AIRBAG
34, 35
Airbag system
warning symbol
Air cleaning
material
passenger compartment
Allergy and asthma inducing substances.
Approach lighting
33
32
129
127, 128, 129
Air conditioning
135
Air conditioning, fluid
volume and grade
396
Air conditioning system
repair
347
Air distribution
Recirculation
table
129
137
138
Air quality system IAQS
128
Alarm
181, 182, 183
alarm indicator
182
alarm signals
183
automatic activation
183
automatic re-arming
182
checking the alarm
165
reduced alarm level
184
remote control key not working
183
128
102, 164
Automatic car washes
372
Automatic gearbox
manual gear positions (Geartronic)
towing and recovery
trailer
274
275
310
304
Automatic relocking
174
B
Backrest
front seat, lowering
rear seat, folding
Bag holder
folding
Battery
jump starting
maintenance
overload
remote control key/PCC
start
support
symbols on the battery
warning symbols
BLIS
Bonnet, opening
83
83
86
154
155
271, 294, 358
271
358
294
168
358
361
360
360
238, 239
341
407
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Book service and repair
336
Car key memory
161
Brake and clutch fluid
346
Car upholstery
376
Car washing
372
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)
128
Catalytic converter
Recovery
299
310
Changing wheels
321
Checking the engine oil level
343
Climate control
actual temperature
auto-regulation
general
personal preferences
sensors
temperature control
127
134
126
129
127
135
Brake fluid
grade and volume
Brake light
394
98
Brakes
289, 290
Anti-lock braking system, ABS
290
brake light
98
brake system
289, 290
Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA
291
filling brake fluid
346
handbrake
291
symbols in the combined instrument
panel
289
bulbs, specifications
354
C
Camera sensor
Car care
Leather upholstery
Cargo area
cargo net
lighting
loading
mounting points
parcel shelf
408
223, 235
372
376
156
101
152
154
157
Children
child safety locks
child seat and airbag
child seats and side airbags
location in car
safety
Child safety locks
Child seat
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats
Child seats
recommended
size classes for child seats with ISOFIX
fixture system
types
upper mounting points for child seats
46
52
38
52
46
180
53
46
47
53
55
57
City Safety™
221
Cleaning
automatic car wash
car washing
rims
372
372
373
seatbelts
upholstery
Clock, adjustment
CO2 emissions
Collision
376
376
75
398
42
Collision warning
228, 229
Collision warning system
function
general limitations
operation
Pedestrian detection
Radar sensor
229
234
232
231
216, 222
Collision Warning System with Auto
Brake
228
Colour code, paint
377
Combined instrument panel
66, 67
Compass
calibration
109
110
Condensation in headlamps
372
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Controls lighting
89
Control symbols
67, 69
Detachable towbar
storage
305
298
299
Driving with a trailer
towball load
towing capacity
302
386
386
Coolant
volume and grade
392
Diesel
run out of fuel
Coolant, checking and filling
345
Diesel particle filter
300
Cooling system
overheating
293
293
Dimensions
383
Dipstick, electronic
344
ECC, electronic climate control
131
Corner Traction Control
187
Direction indicator
99
Eco Cruise
287
42
Direction indicators
99
EcoGuide
70
194
199
195
198
197
direction of rotation
315
Ecolabelling, FSC, owner's manual
25
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor
277
ECO mode
287
Economical driving
301
Crash, see Collision
Cruise control
deactivate
managing speed
resume set speed
temporary deactivation
CTA – Cross Traffic Alert
240
Cyclist detection
230
CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package)
128
D
Daytime running lights
90
Display lighting
89
E
Distance Warning
Limitations
Symbols and messages
199
201
202
ECO pressure
Electrical socket
cargo area
152
155
Door mirrors
resetting
106
107
Electrical system
363
Drive mode ECO
287
Electronic climate control - ECC
131
Driver Alert Control
operation
247
248
Electronic temperature control - ETC
132
Driver Alert System
246
Emergency equipment
first aid kit
warning triangle
326
325
Emergency puncture repair
action
inflating the tyres
rechecking
328
330
333
332
Deadlock
deactivation
temporary deactivation
178
178
179
Driving
cooling system
with the tailgate open
294
293
293
Defroster
136
Driving in water
292
316, 405
409
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Emergency puncture repair kit
location
overview
sealing fluid
328
329
329
Emissions of carbon dioxide
398
Engine
deactivate
overheating
start
Start/Stop
271
293
270
279
Engine and passenger compartment heater
messages
143
timer
142
Engine block heater
140
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater
direct start
141
immediate stop
142
Engine compartment
Brake and clutch fluid
Check
coolant
Engine oil
overview
346
342
345
342
341
Engine drag control
187
Engine oil
adverse driving conditions
342, 389
389
filter
grade and volume
342
390
Fog lamp
rear
Engine oil, filling
343
Foot brake
289, 290
Engine specifications
388
Front bulbs
location
348
Error messages
Adaptive Cruise Control
Driver Alert Control
LKA
see Messages and symbols
214
249
254
214
Error messages in BLIS
242
ETC, electronic temperature control
132
Ethanol content
maximum 10 percent by volume
297
External dimensions
383
F
Front seat
head restraint
83
FSC, ecolabelling
Fuel
fuel consumption
fuel economy
fuel filter
identifier
25
296, 297, 298
398
316
299
297, 298
Fuel-driven heater
timer
Fuelling
filling
filling with reserve fuel can
fuel filler flap
fuel filler flap, locking
fuel filler flap, manual opening
142
178, 300
296
300
295
178
295
Fan
ECC
ETC
134
134
Fault tracing for the camera sensor
224
First aid
326
Fuel tank
volume
395
First aid kit
326
Fuse box
363
Fuses
changing
General
in engine compartment
363
363
364
Fluids, capacities
Fluids and oils
410
98
357, 392, 393, 394,
395, 396
392, 393, 394, 396
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
under glovebox
under the right-hand front seat
367
370
G
Headlamp beam
adaptation
height adjustment
95
89
IAQS - Interior Air Quality System
128
Headlamp control
88
Immobiliser
163
Headlamp levelling of headlamps
89
Indicator symbols
I
Gearbox
automatic
manual
273
274
273
Headlamp pattern, adjusting
95
Inflatable curtain
Headlamp pattern adjustment
95
Information button, PCC
Gear selector inhibitor
277
head restraint
centre seat, rear
front seat
lowering
Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disengagement
277
Gear shift indicator
274
Geartronic
275
Glass
laminated/reinforced
25
Glass roof, power operated roller blind
109
Glovebox
locking
151
176
Gross vehicle weight
385
GSI - Gear selector assistance
274
Hazard warning flashers
Heating
rearview and door mirrors
rear window
seats
windscreen
Heat-reflecting windscreen
349
Information display
Inlaid mats
85
83
85
107
107
133
107
20
High engine temperature
293
High-pressure headlamp washing
104
Hill Start Assist
278
Home safe light duration
102
Horn
H
Handbrake
Headlamps
88
71
39
165
66, 67
151
Instrument lighting
89
Instrument overview
left-hand drive car
right-hand drive car
60
63
Instruments and controls
60, 63
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)
Air cleaning
128
Interior lighting
100
Interior rearview mirror
automatic dimming
108
108
Intermittent wiping
103
Internet-connected car
book service and repair
336
291
99
411
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
J
252
Jack
326
Lane Keeping Aid - LKA
250
Journey statistics
123
Laser sensor
225
Jump starting
271
Leather upholstery, washing instructions
376
Lifting tool
326
Light indications, PCC
165
K
Kerb weight
385
Key
160, 162
Key blade
Keyless drive
167, 168
169, 170, 171, 172, 173, 270
Keyless - locking
Keyless start (keyless drive)
171
169, 170,
171, 172, 173, 270
Keyless - unlocking
172
Keypad in the steering wheel
87
Key positions
80
L
Labels
location of
Laminated glass
Lamps
412
Lane assistance
operation
380
25
347
Lighting
active bending lights
94
approach lighting
102, 164
automatic lighting, passenger compartment
101
Automatic main beam
92
bulbs, specifications
354
controls
88, 100
controls lighting
89
daytime running lights
90
display lighting
89
headlamp levelling
89
home safe lighting
102
instrument lighting
89
in the passenger compartment
100
main/dipped beam
91
position lamps
90
rear fog lamp
98
tunnel detection
91
Lighting, bulb replacement
daytime running lights
347
352
dipped beam (cars with halogen headlamps)
direction indicators, front
front position lamp
main beam (cars with halogen headlamps)
rear bulb holder: direction indicators,
brake lamps and reversing lamps
rear fog lamp
vanity mirror
LKA - Lane Keeping Aid
350
351
351
351
353
353
354
250
Loading
cargo area
General
long load
mounting points
roof load
152, 154
152, 154
153
154
154
Lock
locking
manual locking
unlocking
174
174
174, 175
Lockable wheel bolts
319
Lock confirmation
162
Lock indicator
Locking/unlocking
inside
tailgate
162, 182
175
176
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Messages in the information display
M
Main/dipped beam
91
Main beam, automatic activation
92
Meters
fuel gauge
speedometer
tachometer
112
66, 67
66, 67
66, 67
maintenance
Rustproofing
375
Mileage
114
Manual gearbox
GSI - Gear selector assistance
Towing and recovery
trailer
273
274
310
303
misting
attending to the windows
126
Misting
condensation in headlamps
372
Manual gear positions (Geartronic)
275
Mood lighting
101
Max. roof load
385
MY CAR
113
Memory function in seat
Menus
Combined instrument panel
menu overview, analogue
menu overview, digital
Messages
84
110
111
111
O
113
Oil, see also Engine oil
Messages and symbols
Adaptive Cruise Control
214
Collision Warning with Auto
Brake
227, 236
Driver Alert Control
249
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater
143
LKA
254
Messages in BLIS
242
octane rating
Oil level low
Option/accessory
Output
outside temperature gauge
Overheating
Owner's manual, ecolabelling
297
389, 390
P
PACOS
36
Paintwork
colour code
damage and touch-up
377
377
Panic function
164
PAP - Active Park Assist
263
Parcel shelf
157
Park Assist
backward
fault indicator
function
parking assistance sensors
255
256
258
255
258
Park assist camera
settings
259
262
Parking brake
291
Passenger compartment filter
128
343
Passenger compartment heater
140
16
Passenger compartment lighting
automatic
101
PCC – Personal Car Communicator
functions
range
164
166
388
75
293, 302
25
Pedestrian airbag
folding up
moving the car
44
45
45
413
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Pedestrian detection
228
Personal Car Communicator
166
Petrol grade
297
Pocket park assist - PAP
263
Polishing
374
Position lamp
90
Power guide
70
Power operated roller blind for glass roof
Power seat
109
84
Power windows
resetting
104
106
Puncture
328
Q
Queue Assist
210
Queue assistance
210
R
414
Radar sensor
Limitations
204
216
Rain sensor
103
Raising the car
339
Rear bulbs
location
Rear seat
Heating
Rearview and door mirrors
compass
door
electrically retractable
heating
interior
352
Remote control key with PCC
range
Resetting, trip meter
133
109
106
107
107
108
166
117, 121
Resetting the door mirrors
107
Resetting the power windows
106
Retractable power door mirrors
107
Reverse gear inhibitor
273
Road sign information
Limitations
operation
243
246
244
Rear window
heating
107
Roof load, max. weight
385
Recommendations during driving
294
Rustproofing
375
Recommended child seats
table
47
Recovery
311
S
Refrigerant
347
Regeneration
300
Safety lock
children
46
Remote control immobiliser
163
Safety mode
moving the car
start attempt
42
43
43
Remote control key
battery replacement
detachable key blade
functions
loss
range
160, 161, 162
168
167, 168
164
160
165, 170
Remote control key system, type approval 184
Sealing fluid
329
Seat, see Seats
82
Seatbelt
loosen
pregnancy
putting on
28
30
30
29
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
rear seat
seatbelt reminder
seatbelt tensioner
31
31
31
Seatbelt reminder
31
Seatbelt tensioner
31
Seats
head restraints, rear
heating
Heating
lowering the front backrest
lowering the rear backrest
power
82
85
133
133
83
86
84
Securing loads (Loading)
154
Sensus
79
Speed limiter
alarm for speed exceeded
deactivation
getting started
temporary deactivation
191
194
194
191, 192
193
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
148
Spin control
186
Support
Stability and traction control system
186
Support battery
361
Stability system
186
Switching off the engine
271
Stains
376
Start/Stop
function and operation
the engine does not stop
279
279
281
Symbols
indicator symbols
warning symbols
Service position
355
Service programme
336
Steering force, speed related
186
Set time interval
200
Steering force level, see Steering force
186
Side airbag SIPS
38
Steering lock
271
SIPS airbag
38
Steering wheel
keypad
steering wheel adjustment
294, 295
slippery driving conditions
295
Soot filter
300
SOOT FILTER FULL
300
spare wheel
installation
taking out
320, 321
324
321
150
151
150
318
Speed ratings, tyres
Starter battery
changing
Skidding
Storage spaces
driver's side
glovebox
tunnel console
360
87
87
87
Stickers
location of
380
Stone chips and scratches
377
Symbols and messages
Adaptive Cruise Control
Collision Warning with Auto
Brake
Driver Alert Control
LKA
15
67, 69, 71
67, 69
214
227, 236
249
254
T
Tailgate
Locking/unlocking
176
Temperature
actual temperature
127
Temperature control
135
Total airing function
126, 176
415
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Towbar
detachable, attachment
detachable, removal
306
308
Towbar, see Towing equipment
304
Towbar - detachable
attachment/removal
Towing
towing eye
Towing bracket
specifications
Trip meter
Trip meter, resetting
114, 120, 123
116
75, 114
117, 121
306, 308
Troubleshooting
Adaptive Cruise Control
213
310
311
TSA - trailer stability assist
187, 309
304, 305
305
tread depth
tread wear indicators
tyre pressure monitoring
winter tyres
Tunnel console
12 V socket
armrest
150
152
150
91
320
316
326
320
U
Unlocking
from the inside
from the outside
175
174
Unlocking with the key blade
172
Towing capacity and towball load
386
Tunnel detection
Towing eye
311
Traction control
186
Trailer
cable
driving with a trailer
snaking
302
302
302
309
Type approval
radar system
remote control key system
218
184
Type designations
380
Tyre dimension
317
Vanity mirror
lighting
151
101
Trailer stability assist
187
Tyre load index
318
Ventilation
129
Trailer Stability Assist
309
Tyre monitoring
326
Vibration damper
304
Transmission
273
Tyre pressure label
316
Volvo ID
20
Tyre pressure monitoring
326
Volvo Sensus
79
Transmission oil
volume and grade
416
Trip computer
analogue instrument panel
393
Transponder
20
Tread depth
320
Tread wear indicators
316
Tyres
dimensions
direction of rotation
maintenance
pressure
puncture repair
specifications
402, 404
315
314
316, 405
328
402, 404, 405
V
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
W
Warning lamp
Adaptive Cruise Control
collision warning system
stability and traction control system
Warning lamps
Airbags – SRS
alternator not charging
Fault in brake system
Low oil pressure
Parking brake applied
seatbelt reminder
Warning
Warning sound
collision warning system
204
232
186
73
73
73
73
73
31, 73
73
232
Wheel bolts
lockable
319
319
Wheel change
322
Wheel rim, dimensions
317
Wheel rims
cleaning
373
Wheels
removal
snow chains
spare wheel
322
320
320
Wheels and tyres
approved dimensions
tyre load index and speed rating
320
402
404
Whiplash injury, WHIPS
40
WHIPS
child seat/booster cushion
seating position
whiplash protection
40
41
40
Warning symbols
67, 69, 73
Warning triangle
325
Washer fluid
357
Washers
rear window
washer fluid, filling
windscreen
104
357
103
Windscreen
heating
Windscreen washing
103
Water and dirt-repellent coating
375
Water-repellent surface, cleaning
375
Windscreen wiper
rain sensor
102
103
Waxing
374
Winter driving
294
Weights
kerb weight
385
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
Wiper blades
changing
Cleaning
replacing, rear window
Service position
355
356
357
357
355
Wipers and washing
102
375
107, 136
Winter tyres
320
Winter wheels
320
417
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
418
TP 23288 (English), AT 1717, MY18, Copyright © 2000-2017 Volvo Car Corporation